HP Color LaserJet CM6030, CM6040 MFP Series Service Manual. Www.s Manuals.com. Manual

User Manual: Multi-functional printer HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP - Service manuals and Schematics, Disassembly / Assembly. Free.

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 1212

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and
CM6040 MFP Series
Service Manual

CM6030 MFP
CM6040 MFP

CM6030f MFP
CM6040f MFP

HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP Series
Service Manual

Trademark Credits

Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation
without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.

Corel® is a trademark or registered
trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel
Corporation Limited.

The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.

Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT®
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.

The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Part number: Q3938-90953

Windows Vista™ is either a registered
trademark or trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
PANTONE® is Pantone, Inc's checkstandard trademark for color.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open
Group.

Edition 1, 04/2008
ENERGY STAR® and the ENERGY STAR
logo® are U.S. registered marks of the United
States Environmental Protection Agency.

Table of contents

1 Product basics
Product comparison ............................................................................................................................. 2
Product features ................................................................................................................................... 4
Product walkaround .............................................................................................................................. 7
Front view ............................................................................................................................ 7
HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP Series ............................................................ 7
Back view ............................................................................................................................. 8
Interface ports ...................................................................................................................... 9
Serial number and model number location .......................................................................... 9
Supported operating systems ............................................................................................................. 11
2 Control panel
Use the control panel ......................................................................................................................... 14
Control-panel layout ........................................................................................................... 14
Home screen ..................................................................................................................... 15
Buttons on the touchscreen ............................................................................................... 16
Control-panel help system ................................................................................................. 16
Navigate the Administration menu ..................................................................................................... 17
Information menu ............................................................................................................................... 18
Default Job Options menu .................................................................................................................. 20
Default Options for Originals .............................................................................................. 20
Image adjustment .............................................................................................................. 21
Default Copy Options ......................................................................................................... 22
Default Fax Options ........................................................................................................... 23
Default E-mail Options ....................................................................................................... 24
Default Send to Folder Options ......................................................................................... 25
Default Print Options .......................................................................................................... 26
Time/Scheduling menu ....................................................................................................................... 27
Management menu ............................................................................................................................ 29
Initial Setup menu ............................................................................................................................... 31
Networking and I/O ............................................................................................................ 31
Fax Setup .......................................................................................................................... 38
E-mail Setup ...................................................................................................................... 41
Send Setup menu .............................................................................................................. 41

ENWW

iii

Device Behavior menu ....................................................................................................................... 42
Print Quality menu .............................................................................................................................. 49
Troubleshooting menu ........................................................................................................................ 53
Resets menu ...................................................................................................................................... 59
Service menu ..................................................................................................................................... 60
3 Paper and print media
Understand paper and print media use .............................................................................................. 62
Supported paper and print media sizes .............................................................................................. 63
Supported paper types ....................................................................................................................... 66
Special paper or print media guidelines ............................................................................................. 68
Load paper and print media ............................................................................................................... 69
Load Tray 1 ........................................................................................................................ 69
Print envelopes ................................................................................................. 70
Load trays 2, 3, 4, or 5 ....................................................................................................... 70
Load standard-sized media into trays 2, 3, 4, or 5 ............................................ 70
Load undetectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3, 4, and 5 .................... 72
Load custom-size media into tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 .................................................. 73
Load large size paper into Tray 3, 4, or 5 ......................................................... 74
Load letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper .......................................................... 74
Change the Image Rotation setting ................................................................... 75
Choose the correct orientation for loading letterhead, pre-printed, or prepunched paper .................................................................................................. 75
Configure trays ................................................................................................................................... 79
Configure a tray when loading paper ................................................................................. 79
Configure a tray to match print job settings ....................................................................... 79
Automatic media type sensing (auto sense mode) ............................................................ 79
Auto sense settings ........................................................................................... 80
Select the paper by source, type, or size ........................................................................... 80
Source ............................................................................................................... 80
Type and Size ................................................................................................... 81
Choose an output location .................................................................................................................. 82
Standard output bins .......................................................................................................... 82
Optional output accessories .............................................................................................. 82
3-bin stapler/stacker features ............................................................................ 82
Booklet maker finisher features ......................................................................... 83
Accessory walkaround ...................................................................................... 83
Use the booklet-making feature ......................................................................................... 84
Create a booklet from the print driver ................................................................ 85
Create a booklet from a copy ............................................................................ 85
Configure the accessory operation mode .......................................................................... 86
Select the operating mode at the control panel ................................................. 86
Select the operating mode in the printer driver ................................................. 86
Select the operating mode in the printer driver (Mac OS X) ............................. 86

ENWW

4 Manage and maintain the product
Information pages ............................................................................................................................... 90
HP Easy Printer Care ......................................................................................................................... 92
Open the HP Easy Printer Care software .......................................................................... 92
HP Easy Printer Care software sections ............................................................................ 92
Embedded Web server ....................................................................................................................... 95
Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection ..................................... 95
Embedded Web server sections ........................................................................................ 96
Use HP Web Jetadmin software ........................................................................................................ 99
Security features .............................................................................................................................. 100
Secure the embedded Web server .................................................................................. 100
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) ...................................................................................... 100
Requirements .................................................................................................. 100
Use the FIH ..................................................................................................... 100
Enable the FIH portal ...................................................................... 100
Disable the FIH portal ..................................................................... 101
Secure Disk Erase ........................................................................................................... 101
Data affected ................................................................................................... 101
Gain access to Secure Disk Erase .................................................................. 102
Additional Information ..................................................................................... 102
DSS authentication .......................................................................................................... 102
Lock the control-panel menus .......................................................................................... 102
Manage supplies .............................................................................................................................. 103
Print-cartridge storage ..................................................................................................... 103
HP policy on non-HP print cartridges ............................................................................... 103
HP fraud hotline and Web site ......................................................................................... 103
Replace supplies .............................................................................................................................. 104
Locate supplies ................................................................................................................ 104
Supply replacement guidelines ........................................................................................ 104
Approximate replacement intervals for supplies .............................................................. 105
Change print cartridges ................................................................................................... 105
Change image drums ...................................................................................................... 108
Install memory ................................................................................................................. 111
Install DDR memory DIMMs ............................................................................ 111
Enable memory ............................................................................................... 114
Enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP .................................... 114
Install an HP Jetdirect or EIO print server card or EIO hard disk .................... 115
Replace the staple cartridge ............................................................................................ 117
Replace saddle stitch staple cartridges in the booklet maker .......................................... 119
Clean the product ............................................................................................................................. 122
Clean the outside of the product ...................................................................................... 122
Clean the product interior ................................................................................................ 122

ENWW

Clean the 3X500 sheet input tray .................................................................................... 124
Clean the IPTU ................................................................................................................ 125
Clean the touchscreen ..................................................................................................... 125
Clean the scanner glass .................................................................................................. 125
Cleaning the ADF delivery system ................................................................................... 126
Clean the ADF delivery system ....................................................................... 126
Clean the ADF rollers ...................................................................................... 127
ADF maintenance kit ........................................................................................................................ 129
Calibrate the scanner ....................................................................................................................... 130
Upgrade the firmware ....................................................................................................................... 131
Determine the current firmware version ........................................................................... 131
Download new firmware from the HP Web site ............................................................... 131
Transfer the new firmware to the product ........................................................................ 131
Use FTP to upload the firmware through a browser ....................................... 131
Use FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection ........................... 132
Use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware ............................................. 133
Use MS-DOS commands to upgrade the firmware ......................................... 133
Use the HP Jetdirect firmware ......................................................................................... 133
Set the real-time clock ...................................................................................................................... 135
Set the date format .......................................................................................................... 135
Set the date ..................................................................................................................... 135
Set the time format .......................................................................................................... 135
Set the time ...................................................................................................................... 135
5 Theory of operation
Basic operation ................................................................................................................................. 138
Sequence of operation ..................................................................................................... 138
Formatter system ............................................................................................................................. 140
Sleep mode ...................................................................................................................... 140
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) ..................................................................... 140
Input/output ...................................................................................................................... 141
CPU ................................................................................................................................. 141
Memory ............................................................................................................................ 141
Hard disk ......................................................................................................... 141
Random-access memory ................................................................................ 141
DIMM slot ........................................................................................................ 141
Nonvolatile memory ........................................................................................ 141
PJL overview ................................................................................................................... 141
PML ................................................................................................................................. 142
Control panel ................................................................................................................... 142
Engine-control system ...................................................................................................................... 143
DC controller .................................................................................................................... 144
Solenoids ........................................................................................................ 144

ENWW

Switches .......................................................................................................... 145
Sensors ........................................................................................................... 146
Motors and fans .............................................................................................. 147
Fuser control .................................................................................................................... 149
Fuser temperature-control circuit .................................................................... 151
Fuser over-temperature protection .................................................................. 152
Fuser-failure detection .................................................................................... 153
Fuser identification .......................................................................................... 153
Fuser-life detection .......................................................................................... 154
Relay-failure detection ..................................................................................................... 154
Low-voltage power supply ............................................................................................... 154
Overcurrent/overvoltage protection ................................................................. 155
Safety .............................................................................................................. 155
Voltage detection ............................................................................................ 155
Sleep (powersave) mode ................................................................................ 155
High-voltage power supply .............................................................................................. 155
Laser/scanner system ...................................................................................................................... 158
Image-formation system ................................................................................................................... 160
Image-formation process ................................................................................................. 161
Step 1: Pre-exposure ...................................................................................... 162
Step 2: Primary charging ................................................................................. 162
Step 3: Laser-beam exposure ......................................................................... 163
Step 4: Development ....................................................................................... 163
Step 5: Primary transfer .................................................................................. 164
Step 6: Secondary transfer ............................................................................. 164
Step 7: Separation .......................................................................................... 165
Step 8: Fusing ................................................................................................. 165
Step 9: ITB cleaning ........................................................................................ 166
Step 10: Drum cleaning ................................................................................... 166
Print cartridge .................................................................................................................. 167
Imaging drum ................................................................................................................... 168
Developing roller engagement and disengagement ........................................ 170
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit ................................................................................. 171
Primary-transfer-roller engagement and disengagement ................................ 171
ITB unit detection ............................................................................................ 173
Secondary-transfer-roller unit .......................................................................................... 175
Calibration ........................................................................................................................ 175
Color-misregistration contol ............................................................................ 176
Image stabilization control ............................................................................... 177
Pickup, feed, and delivery system .................................................................................................... 178
Pickup-and-feed unit ........................................................................................................ 181
Cassette pickup ............................................................................................... 183
Cassette paper-size and cassette-presence detection ................... 183
Cassette lift operation ..................................................................... 185

ENWW

vii

Cassette paper-level and paper-presence detection ...................... 186
Multifeed prevention ....................................................................... 187
Multipurpose tray pickup ................................................................................. 188
Multipurpose tray last-paper detection ........................................... 189
Paper feed ....................................................................................................... 190
Skew-feed prevention ..................................................................... 191
Paper-type detection ...................................................................... 192
Feed-speed control ......................................................................... 193
Fusing and delivery unit ................................................................................................... 195
Loop control .................................................................................................... 195
Pressure-roller pressurization control ............................................................. 196
Duplexing unit .................................................................................................................. 197
Duplexing reverse and feed control ................................................................ 198
Jam detection ................................................................................................................................... 199
Optional input trays .......................................................................................................................... 201
Paper-feeder pickup and feed operation ......................................................................... 204
Scanner component ......................................................................................................................... 206
Product boards ................................................................................................................ 207
Scanner system block diagram ........................................................................................ 208
Scanner image-data path ................................................................................................ 209
Scanner power topology .................................................................................................. 210
Scanner power states ...................................................................................................... 211
Sensor topology ............................................................................................................... 212
Boards I/Os ...................................................................................................................... 215
Scanner operation flow .................................................................................................... 217
ADF .................................................................................................................................................. 221
Input tray .......................................................................................................................... 221
ADF simplex-printing operation sequence ....................................................................... 221
ADF duplex-printing operation sequence ........................................................................ 222
Multifeed operation .......................................................................................................... 223
End of a scan job operation ............................................................................................. 224
Paper pick and separation operation ............................................................................... 224
Deskew ............................................................................................................................ 225
6 Removal and replacement
Removal and replacement strategy .................................................................................................. 228
Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 228
Required tools .................................................................................................................. 229
Types of screws ............................................................................................................... 229
Service approach ............................................................................................................. 230
Before performing service ................................................................................................ 230
After performing service ................................................................................................... 230
Parts removal order ......................................................................................................... 231

viii

ENWW

User-replaceable parts ..................................................................................................................... 232
Fuser ................................................................................................................................ 233
Transfer roller .................................................................................................................. 236
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) ........................................................................................ 238
Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers ................................................................................ 241
Tray 2, 3, 4, and 5 pickup rollers .................................................................................... 243
Formatter ......................................................................................................................... 245
Tray 2 ............................................................................................................................... 248
Trays 3, 4, and 5 .............................................................................................................. 248
Service-replaceable parts ................................................................................................................. 249
Secondary transfer unit .................................................................................................... 249
Multipurpose drive unit ..................................................................................................... 254
Multipurpose-tray guide (Tray 1) unit ............................................................................... 258
Cassette (Tray 2) pickup unit ........................................................................................... 259
Rear-left cover ................................................................................................................. 260
Rear-right cover ............................................................................................................... 261
Rear cover ....................................................................................................................... 262
Low-voltage power-supply unit ........................................................................................ 263
High-voltage power supply PCA (A) ................................................................................ 264
Lifter-drive unit ................................................................................................................. 266
Fuser motor ..................................................................................................................... 269
Intermediate-transfer belt (ITB) motor ............................................................................. 270
Face-down output bin ...................................................................................................... 271
Left cover ......................................................................................................................... 272
Laser/scanner fan duct .................................................................................................... 273
Print-cartridge driver PCA ................................................................................................ 275
High-voltage power supply PCA (B) ................................................................................ 277
Formatter case ................................................................................................................. 279
DC controller PCA ........................................................................................................... 281
Environmental sensor ...................................................................................................... 283
Image-drum motor ........................................................................................................... 284
Fuser fan .......................................................................................................................... 286
Print-cartridge feed motor (black) .................................................................................... 287
Print-cartridge feed motor (yellow, magenta, and cyan) .................................................. 288
Cartridge fan unit ............................................................................................................. 289
Laser/scanner fan unit ..................................................................................................... 290
Fuser power-supply unit .................................................................................................. 291
Primary transfer-roller disengagement motor .................................................................. 292
Print-cartridge drive unit (yellow and magenta) ............................................................... 293
Print-cartridge drive unit (cyan and black) ....................................................................... 298
Print-cartridge interface PCA (cyan and black) ................................................................ 299
Print-cartridge interface PCA (yellow and magenta) ........................................................ 300
Main drive unit ................................................................................................................. 301
Cartridge fan duct ............................................................................................................ 303

ENWW

Duplex switchback tray .................................................................................................... 304
Front lower cover ............................................................................................................. 305
Inner cover ....................................................................................................................... 306
Rear scanner cover ......................................................................................................... 308
Right upper cover ............................................................................................................ 309
Front door ........................................................................................................................ 310
Front door assembly ........................................................................................................ 311
Color-misregistration and image-density sensor unit ....................................................... 312
Pressure-release sensor unit ........................................................................................... 313
Scanner cover .................................................................................................................. 315
Laser/scanner assembly (yellow and magenta) .............................................................. 316
Laser/scanner assembly (cyan and black) ...................................................................... 319
VOC fan ........................................................................................................................... 322
Duplexing reverse unit ..................................................................................................... 323
Face-down delivery unit ................................................................................................... 324
Face-down cover ............................................................................................................. 326
Right-door assembly ........................................................................................................ 327
Duplexing feed unit .......................................................................................................... 329
Multipurpose-tray (Tray 1) pickup unit ............................................................................. 331
Thermopile unit ................................................................................................................ 334
Front-lower cover ............................................................................................................. 335
ITB duct ........................................................................................................................... 336
Optional input trays .......................................................................................................................... 337
1x500-sheet input tray ..................................................................................................... 337
Right door ........................................................................................................ 337
Lower-rear cover ............................................................................................. 339
Front-right cover .............................................................................................. 340
Right cover ...................................................................................................... 341
Front-upper cover ............................................................................................ 342
Lower-left cover ............................................................................................... 343
Front-lower door .............................................................................................. 344
Box .................................................................................................................. 345
Pickup unit ....................................................................................................... 346
Input tray is attached ...................................................................... 346
Paper feeder is not attached .......................................................... 347
Auto-close unit ................................................................................................ 349
Pickup motor ................................................................................................... 350
Paper-feeder driver PCA ................................................................................. 351
3x500-sheet input tray ..................................................................................................... 352
Right door ........................................................................................................ 352
Lower-rear cover ............................................................................................. 352
Front-right cover .............................................................................................. 352
Right cover ...................................................................................................... 352
Front-upper cover ............................................................................................ 352

ENWW

Left cover ........................................................................................................ 352
Pickup unit (middle cassette) .......................................................................... 353
Pickup unit (lower cassette) ............................................................................ 354
Pickup unit (upper cassette) ............................................................................ 354
Paper feeder is attached ................................................................ 354
Paper feeder is not attached .......................................................... 355
Auto-close unit ................................................................................................ 357
Pickup motor ................................................................................................... 357
Paper-feeder driver PCA ................................................................................. 357
Scanner ............................................................................................................................................ 358
Optical scanner ................................................................................................................ 358
Upper-left scanner cover ................................................................................................. 362
Upper-right scanner cover ............................................................................................... 363
Control panel ................................................................................................................... 364
Front scanner cover ......................................................................................................... 366
Lower-left scanner cover ................................................................................................. 368
Lower-right scanner cover ............................................................................................... 370
Top scanner cover ........................................................................................................... 371
Glass assembly ............................................................................................................... 372
Carriage unit .................................................................................................................... 373
Configure the SCB when replacing the carriage unit, inverter, SCB, or optical
scanner ............................................................................................................................ 378
Pulley assembly and motor unit ....................................................................................... 380
Rail ................................................................................................................................... 383
Inverter ............................................................................................................................. 384
Inverter unit ..................................................................................................... 384
Lid sensor ........................................................................................................................ 386
SCB, CPB, and SCUID .................................................................................................... 388
Power-supply unit ............................................................................................................ 391
Scanner fan ..................................................................................................................... 393
SCB fan ........................................................................................................................... 394
Control panel fan ............................................................................................................. 395
Fan filter ........................................................................................................................... 396
ADF .................................................................................................................................................. 397
ADF assembly ................................................................................................................. 397
ADF input tray sensors .................................................................................................... 399
Separation floor assembly ............................................................................................... 401
Diverter ............................................................................................................................ 403
Jam cover ........................................................................................................................ 404
Hinge assemblies ............................................................................................................ 406
Float assembly ................................................................................................................. 407
White backing .................................................................................................................. 410
Front end cover (cap) ...................................................................................................... 412
Rear end cover (cap) ....................................................................................................... 414

ENWW

ADF PCA and wire harness ............................................................................................. 417
Input tray .......................................................................................................................... 419
7 Solve problems
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 422
Troubleshooting process .................................................................................................................. 423
Determine the problem source ........................................................................................ 423
Pre-troubleshooting checklist .......................................................................... 423
Troubleshooting checklist ................................................................................ 424
Troubleshooting flowchart ............................................................................... 426
Power subsystem ............................................................................................................ 427
Power-on checks ............................................................................................. 427
Power-on troubleshooting overview ............................................... 427
Tools for troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 429
Internal print-quality test pages ........................................................................................ 429
Print-quality-troubleshooting pages ................................................................. 429
Diagnostics page ............................................................................................. 429
Cleaning page ................................................................................................. 430
Configuration pages ........................................................................................ 431
Configuration page ......................................................................... 431
HP embedded Jetdirect page ......................................................... 433
Embedded protocol page ............................................................... 434
Finding important information on the configuration pages .............. 435
Solve performance problems ........................................................................................................... 436
Solve connectivity problems ............................................................................................................. 437
Solve direct-connect problems ........................................................................................ 437
Solve network connectivity problems ............................................................................... 437
Solve network printing problems ..................................................................... 437
Verify communication over the network .......................................................... 438
Control-panel message types ........................................................................................................... 439
Control-panel messages .................................................................................................................. 440
Event log messages ......................................................................................................................... 511
Print an event log ............................................................................................................. 511
Show an event log ........................................................................................................... 511
Clear the event log ........................................................................................................... 511
Event log message .......................................................................................................... 512
Paper-handling problems ................................................................................................................. 519
Jams ................................................................................................................................ 519
Common causes of jams ................................................................................. 519
Jam locations .................................................................................................. 520
Clear jams ....................................................................................................... 520
Jam sensors ................................................................................... 521
AREA 1: Jams in the output bin ...................................................... 522

xii

ENWW

AREA 2 and 3: Jams in the fuser and transfer area ....................... 524
AREA 4: Jams in the duplex area ................................................... 531
AREA 5: Jams in Tray 2 and the internal paper path ..................... 535
AREA 6:Jams in Tray 1 .................................................................. 539
AREA 7: Jams in optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 ................................... 543
AREA 8: Jams in the optional finishing devices ............................. 547
AREA 9: Jams in the ADF .............................................................. 552
Clear staple jams ............................................................................ 553
Jam recovery ................................................................................................... 557
Product feeds multiple sheets .......................................................................................... 558
Product pulls from incorrect tray ...................................................................................... 558
Product feeds incorrect page size ................................................................................... 558
Paper does not feed automatically .................................................................................. 559
Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 ..................................................................... 559
Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed .................................................................. 560
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product .................................................................. 561
Output is curled or wrinkled ............................................................................................. 561
Product will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly ................................................................ 562
Solve image quality problems .......................................................................................................... 563
Example print quality problems ........................................................................................ 563
Repetitive defects ruler .................................................................................................... 563
Overhead transparency defects ....................................................................................... 565
Print quality problems associated with the environment .................................................. 565
Print quality problems associated with jams .................................................................... 565
Optimize and improve image quality ................................................................................ 565
Use supported paper ....................................................................................... 566
Calibrate the product ....................................................................................... 566
Specify the correct paper type ........................................................................ 566
Clean the fuser ................................................................................................ 567
Respond to control-panel error messages ...................................................... 568
Clean the registration second transfer assembly ........................... 568
Use manual print modes ................................................................................. 570
Print-quality-troubleshooting pages ................................................................. 571
Image-quality issues ........................................................................................................ 574
Interface troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 579
Communication checks .................................................................................................... 579
EIO troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 579
Engine diagnostics ........................................................................................................................... 580
LED diagnostics ............................................................................................................... 580
Understand lights on the formatter .................................................................. 580
HP Jetdirect LEDs .......................................................................... 580
Heartbeat LED ................................................................................ 581
Understand lights on the SCB ......................................................................... 581
Understand lights on the copy-process board (CPB) ...................................... 583

ENWW

xiii

Engine-test button ............................................................................................................ 583
Troubleshooting menu ..................................................................................................... 584
Diagnostics mode ............................................................................................................ 585
Diagnostics that put the engine into the special diagnostics mode ................................. 585
Diagnostic tests ............................................................................................................... 586
Disable cartridge check ................................................................................................... 587
Paper-path sensors test ................................................................................................... 587
Paper-path test ................................................................................................................ 589
Manual sensor test (special-mode test) ........................................................................... 590
Component tests .............................................................................................................. 592
Component test (special-mode test) ............................................................... 592
Transfer-motors test ........................................................................................ 592
Belt-only test ................................................................................................... 592
Image-drum motors test .................................................................................. 592
CMYK-laser test .............................................................................................. 593
Fuser-motor test .............................................................................................. 593
Fuser pressure-release motor test .................................................................. 593
Color-alienation motor test .............................................................................. 593
ITB-contact/alienation test ............................................................................... 593
Paper-transport motor test .............................................................................. 594
Tray-1 pickup-solenoid test ............................................................................. 594
Tray-2 pickup-motor test ................................................................................. 594
Duplexer reverse-motor test ............................................................................ 594
Duplexer refeed-motor test ............................................................................. 594
Print/stop test ................................................................................................................... 596
Color-band test ................................................................................................................ 597
Scanner tests ................................................................................................................... 597
Service-mode functions .................................................................................................................... 598
Service menu ................................................................................................................... 598
Product resets .................................................................................................................. 600
NVRAM initialization ........................................................................................ 600
Solve scanner problems ................................................................................................................... 601
Solve fax problems ........................................................................................................................... 602
Solve e-mail problems ...................................................................................................................... 603
Validate the SMTP gateway address ............................................................................... 603
Validate the LDAP gateway address ............................................................................... 603
Diagrams .......................................................................................................................................... 604
Connectors ...................................................................................................................... 604
DC controller PCA ........................................................................................... 604
PCAs ............................................................................................................... 604
Product base ................................................................................................... 606
1 x 500 input tray ............................................................................................. 609
3 x 500 input tray ............................................................................................. 610
IPTU ................................................................................................................ 611

xiv

ENWW

Fans ................................................................................................................................. 611
Product base ................................................................................................... 611
Sensors ............................................................................................................................ 612
Product base ................................................................................................... 612
1 x 500 input tray ............................................................................................. 614
3 x 500 input tray ............................................................................................. 615
IPTU ................................................................................................................ 616
Motors .............................................................................................................................. 617
Product base ................................................................................................... 617
1 x 500 input tray ............................................................................................. 618
3 x 500 input tray ............................................................................................. 619
IPTU ................................................................................................................ 620
Solenoids ......................................................................................................................... 620
Product base ................................................................................................... 620
1 x 500 input tray ............................................................................................. 621
3 x 500 input tray ............................................................................................. 621
Switches .......................................................................................................................... 622
Product base ................................................................................................... 622
1 x 500 input tray ............................................................................................. 623
3 x 500 input tray ............................................................................................. 623
Block diagrams ................................................................................................................ 625
Main assemblies ............................................................................................. 625
Main parts ....................................................................................................... 628
PCAs ............................................................................................................... 629
1 x 500 input tray ............................................................................................. 630
3 x 500 input tray ............................................................................................. 631
Intermediate paper-transfer unit (IPTU) .......................................................... 632
Scanner ........................................................................................................... 632
Components (scanner) ................................................................... 632
ADF ................................................................................................................. 633
Sensors (ADF) ................................................................................ 633
General timing chart ........................................................................................................ 634
General circuit diagrams .................................................................................................. 634
Signals .............................................................................................................................................. 639
8 Output accessories and intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU)
Theory of operation .......................................................................................................................... 668
Intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU) ........................................................................... 668
Basic operation ............................................................................................... 668
Feed operation ................................................................................................ 670
Jam detection .................................................................................................. 670
3-bin stapler/stacker ........................................................................................................ 671
Basic operation ............................................................................................... 671

ENWW

Electrical circuitry ............................................................................ 672
Feed drive system ........................................................................................... 672
Construction of the control system ................................................. 673
Paper delivery path (stapler/stacker and booklet maker) ............... 675
Intermediate-process output-bin assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet
maker) ............................................................................................................. 679
Stack job offset ............................................................................... 679
Process output bin paper-stacking operation .................................................. 681
Offset operation ............................................................................................... 681
Stack trailing-edge assist operation ................................................................ 682
Stack delivery operation .................................................................................. 682
Staple operation (stapler/stacker and booklet maker) ..................................... 683
Staple unit ....................................................................................... 686
Shift the staple unit .......................................................................................... 687
Stack operation (stapler/stacker and booklet maker) ...................................... 689
Output bin operation ....................................................................... 689
Shutter operation ............................................................................ 691
Jam detection .................................................................................................. 692
Power supply ................................................................................................... 693
Power-supply route ......................................................................... 693
Protection function .......................................................................... 693
HP Booklet Maker/Finisher accessory ............................................................................. 694
Basic operation ............................................................................................... 694
Basic operation of the stacker unit ................................................. 694
Electrical circuitry of the stacker unit .............................................. 694
Basic operation of the booklet maker unit ...................................... 695
Electrical circuitry for the booklet maker unit .................................. 696
Feed drive system .......................................................................... 696
Paper-delivery path (booklet maker only) ....................................... 701
Basic operation for the booklet maker ............................................................. 702
Control of the inlet flappers ............................................................................. 706
Control of paper movement ............................................................................. 709
Alignment of paper .......................................................................................... 711
Control the phase of the crescent roller .......................................................... 713
Overview of folding .......................................................................................... 715
Control of stack movement ............................................................................. 716
Fold the stack .................................................................................................. 716
Double folding a stack ..................................................................................... 719
Intermediate-process-tray assembly ............................................................... 720
Staple operation .............................................................................................. 721
Stapler unit ..................................................................................... 721
Stapling operation ........................................................................... 722
Stitcher (stapler) unit ...................................................................... 722
Stack operation ............................................................................................... 723

xvi

ENWW

Jam detection .................................................................................................. 723
Detect jams in the stacker unit ....................................................... 724
Detect jams in the booklet maker unit ............................................ 724
Power supply ................................................................................................... 725
Power-supply route for the stacker unit .......................................... 725
Protective function for the stacker unit ........................................... 726
Power-supply route for the booklet maker unit ............................... 726
Protective function for the booklet maker unit ................................ 726
Specifications ................................................................................................................................... 727
Accessory specifications .................................................................................................. 727
Stapler/stacker output-bin capacities ............................................................................... 732
Booklet-maker output-bin capacities ................................................................................ 733
Removal and replacement ............................................................................................................... 734
Intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU) ........................................................................... 734
IPTU ................................................................................................................ 734
Upper guide assembly .................................................................................... 736
Rear cover ....................................................................................................... 738
Fan unit ........................................................................................................... 742
Right belt-drive unit ......................................................................................... 743
Left belt-drive unit ............................................................................................ 746
Finisher lock-assembly .................................................................................... 748
IPTU paper-feed motor 1 ................................................................................ 750
IPTU paper-feed motor 2 ................................................................................ 751
IPTU driver PCA .............................................................................................. 752
Stapler/stacker and Booklet maker .................................................................................. 753
Identify the booklet maker and stapler/stacker ............................................... 753
Remove the booklet maker and stapler/stacker from the printer .................... 754
External covers ............................................................................................... 757
Entrance lower-guide assembly ..................................................... 757
Front door ....................................................................................... 758
Rear cover ...................................................................................... 759
Front-foot cover .............................................................................. 760
Rear-foot cover ............................................................................... 760
Front inside-upper cover ................................................................. 761
Front inside-lower cover (booklet maker only) ................................ 762
Left-upper cover ............................................................................. 763
Top door ......................................................................................... 765
Grate-shaped upper guide .............................................................. 767
Move output bins 1 and 2 ............................................................... 768
Grate-shaped lower guide .............................................................. 770
PCA cover ...................................................................................... 771
Drive system ................................................................................................... 772
Stapler ............................................................................................ 772
Stapler assembly ............................................................................ 774

ENWW

xvii

Swing unit ....................................................................................... 777
Upper crossmember unit ................................................................ 781
Saddle unit (booklet maker only) .................................................... 784
Saddle-stapler assembly (booklet maker only) ............................... 788
Positioning plate unit (inner side-plate assembly) (booklet maker
only) ................................................................................................ 789
Document feed system ................................................................................... 792
Operation-tray assembly ................................................................ 792
Output-bin 1 .................................................................................... 797
Output-bin 2 .................................................................................... 799
Upper output bin (stapler-stacker only) .......................................... 801
Buffer rollers ................................................................................... 802
Booklet-delivery output bin (booklet maker only) ............................ 803
Booklet-delivery output bin unit (booklet maker only) ..................... 804
Return roller unit ............................................................................. 805
Pressure roller unit ......................................................................... 807
Entrance upper guide unit .............................................................. 812
Upper-delivery guide (booklet maker only) ..................................... 814
Inlet feed unit (stapler-stacker only) ............................................... 815
Inlet feed unit (booklet maker only) ................................................ 818
Paper-folding roller (booklet maker only) ........................................ 821
Electrical system ............................................................................................. 826
Stacker controller PCA ................................................................... 826
Saddle-stitcher controller PCA (booklet maker only) ...................... 827
Solve problems ................................................................................................................................. 828
Intermediate paper-transfer unit (IPTU) ........................................................................... 828
......................................................................................................................... 828
Stapler/stacker and booklet maker .................................................................................. 828
Individual component diagnostics ................................................................... 828
Manual sensor test ......................................................................... 828
Component test .............................................................................. 829
LED diagnostics .............................................................................. 830
Diagrams ......................................................................................................... 832
Cross sections ................................................................................ 832
Sensors ......................................................................................... 835
Microswitches ................................................................................. 839
Solenoids ........................................................................................ 841
Motors ............................................................................................. 843
Clutches .......................................................................................... 845
PCA ................................................................................................ 846
Variable resistors, LED, and check pins ........................................ 849
Circuit diagrams .............................................................................. 852
Adjustments ................................................................................................... 857
Adjust the alignment position .......................................................... 857

xviii

ENWW

Adjust the staple position ................................................................ 857
Adjust the folding position to the stitch position (Booklet maker
only) ................................................................................................ 859
Adjust the stitcher unit .................................................................... 862
9 Parts and diagrams
Order parts, accessories, and supplies ............................................................................................ 866
Order directly from HP ..................................................................................................... 866
Order directly through the software ................................................................................. 866
Orderable and non-orderable parts ................................................................................. 866
Replacement kits .............................................................................................................................. 868
Printer supplies and accessories ..................................................................................... 868
Printer ............................................................................................................................................... 872
Printer parts ..................................................................................................................... 872
Input-accessory devices ................................................................................................................... 916
Input trays ........................................................................................................................ 916
Output-accessory devices ................................................................................................................ 934
Intermediate paper-transfer unit (IPTU) ........................................................................... 934
Stapler/stacker and booklet-maker .................................................................................. 945
Automatic document-feeder (ADF) ................................................................................................. 1016
Automatic document feeder (ADF) assemblies ............................................................. 1016
Scanner .......................................................................................................................................... 1032
Scanner assemblies ...................................................................................................... 1032
Alphabetical parts list ..................................................................................................................... 1066
Numerical parts list ......................................................................................................................... 1094
Appendix A Service and support
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement .................................................................................. 1124
Print cartridge limited warranty statement ...................................................................................... 1126
Color LaserJet Fuser Kit, Transfer Kit, and Roller Kit Limited Warranty Statement ....................... 1127
Customer self repair warranty service ............................................................................................ 1128
Customer support ........................................................................................................................... 1129
Availability of support and service .................................................................................................. 1130
HP maintenance agreements ......................................................................................................... 1131
On-site service agreements ........................................................................................... 1131
Priority onsite service ..................................................................................................... 1131
Next-day onsite service ................................................................................................. 1131
Weekly (volume) on-site service .................................................................................... 1131
Appendix B Product specifications
Physical specifications ................................................................................................................... 1134
Electrical specifications .................................................................................................................. 1135
Acoustic specifications ................................................................................................................... 1136

ENWW

xix

Environmental specifications .......................................................................................................... 1137
Appendix C Regulatory information
Compliance with FCC regulations .................................................................................................. 1140
Declaration of Conformity ............................................................................................................... 1141
Declaration of Conformity ............................................................................................................... 1142
Environmental product stewardship program ................................................................................. 1143
Protecting the environment ............................................................................................ 1143
Ozone production .......................................................................................................... 1143
Power consumption ....................................................................................................... 1143
Toner consumption ........................................................................................................ 1143
Paper use ...................................................................................................................... 1143
Plastics .......................................................................................................................... 1143
HP LaserJet print supplies ............................................................................................. 1143
Return and recycling instructions ................................................................................... 1144
United States and Puerto Rico ...................................................................... 1144
Multiple returns (more than one cartridge) ................................... 1144
Single returns ............................................................................... 1144
Shipping ........................................................................................ 1144
Non-U.S. returns ........................................................................................... 1144
Paper ............................................................................................................................. 1144
Material restrictions ........................................................................................................ 1144
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European
Union ............................................................................................................................. 1145
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) .............................................................................. 1145
For more information ..................................................................................................... 1146
Certificate of volatility ..................................................................................................................... 1147
Types of memory ........................................................................................................... 1147
Volatile memory ............................................................................................ 1147
Non-volatile memory ..................................................................................... 1147
Hard-disk-drive memory ................................................................................ 1147
Safety statements ........................................................................................................................... 1148
Laser safety ................................................................................................................... 1148
Canadian DOC regulations ............................................................................................ 1148
VCCI statement (Japan) ................................................................................................ 1148
Power cord statement (Japan) ....................................................................................... 1148
EMI statement (Korea) ................................................................................................... 1148
EMI statement (Taiwan) ................................................................................................. 1149
General telecom statement ............................................................................................ 1149
Laser statement for Finland ........................................................................................... 1149
Substances Table (China) ............................................................................................. 1150
Index ............................................................................................................................................................... 1151

ENWW

List of tables

Table 1-1 Product models .................................................................................................................................. 2
Table 1-2 Features ............................................................................................................................................. 4
Table 2-1 Information menu ............................................................................................................................. 18
Table 2-2 Default Options for Originals menu .................................................................................................. 20
Table 2-3 Image Adjustment menu .................................................................................................................. 21
Table 2-4 Default Copy Options menu ............................................................................................................. 22
Table 2-5 Fax Send menu ................................................................................................................................ 23
Table 2-6 Fax Receive menu ........................................................................................................................... 23
Table 2-7 Default Print Options menu .............................................................................................................. 26
Table 2-8 Time/Scheduling menu .................................................................................................................... 27
Table 2-9 Management menu .......................................................................................................................... 29
Table 2-10 Networking and I/O ........................................................................................................................ 31
Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus .............................................................................................................................. 31
Table 2-12 Fax Setup menu ............................................................................................................................. 38
Table 2-13 E-mail Setup menu ......................................................................................................................... 41
Table 2-14 Send Setup menu .......................................................................................................................... 41
Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu ................................................................................................................... 42
Table 2-16 Print Quality menu .......................................................................................................................... 49
Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu ................................................................................................................... 53
Table 2-18 Resets menu .................................................................................................................................. 59
Table 3-1 Supported paper and print media sizes ........................................................................................... 63
Table 3-2 Supported envelopes and postcards ............................................................................................... 63
Table 3-3 Supported paper and print media sizes for the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker and HP Booklet
Maker/Finisher accessories ................................................................................................................................ 64
Table 3-4 Tray 1 paper information .................................................................................................................. 66
Table 3-5 Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 paper information ............................................................................................. 66
Table 3-6
Table 3-7
Table 3-8
Table 3-9
Table 5-1
Table 5-2

Load letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper — Image Rotation = Left to right .................... 76
Load letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper — Image Rotation = Right to left .................... 77
3-bin stapler/stacker features ........................................................................................................... 82
Booklet-maker finisher features ....................................................................................................... 83
Sequence of operation ................................................................................................................... 138
Solenoids ....................................................................................................................................... 145

Table 5-3 Switches ......................................................................................................................................... 145
Table 5-4 Sensors .......................................................................................................................................... 146

ENWW

xxi

Table 5-5
Table 5-6
Table 5-7
Table 5-8
Table 5-9
Table 5-10
Table 5-11
Table 5-12
Table 5-13
Table 5-14
Table 5-15
Table 5-16
Table 5-17
Table 5-18
Table 5-19
Table 5-20
Table 5-21
Table 5-22
Table 5-23
Table 7-1
Table 7-2
Table 7-3
Table 7-4
Table 7-5
Table 7-6
Table 7-7
Table 7-8
Table 7-9
Table 7-10
Table 7-11
Table 7-12
Table 7-13
Table 7-14
Table 7-15
Table 7-16
Table 7-17
Table 7-18
Table 7-19
Table 7-20
Table 7-21
Table 7-22
Table 7-23
Table 7-24
Table 7-25

xxii

Motors ............................................................................................................................................ 147
Fans ............................................................................................................................................... 149
Fuser components ......................................................................................................................... 150
Converted DC voltages .................................................................................................................. 155
High-voltage power supply circuits ................................................................................................. 156
Primary-transfer-roller engagement states ................................................................................... 172
ITB unit detection ......................................................................................................................... 173
Image stabilization controls .......................................................................................................... 177
Switches and sensors for the pickup, feed, and delivery system ................................................. 178
Motors and solenoids for the pickup, feed, and delivery system ................................................. 180
Main operations within the pickup-and-feed system .................................................................... 182
Switch states for paper-size detection ......................................................................................... 184
Duplexing-unit components ......................................................................................................... 197
Jams that the product detects ...................................................................................................... 199
Electrical components for the optional input trays ....................................................................... 202
Scanner power states .................................................................................................................. 211
Sensors ........................................................................................................................................ 213
SCB connectors ........................................................................................................................... 216
CCD map ..................................................................................................................................... 216
Pre-troubleshooting checklist ......................................................................................................... 423
Troubleshooting flowchart .............................................................................................................. 426
Important information on the configuration pages .......................................................................... 435
Control-panel messages ................................................................................................................ 440
Causes and solutions for delivery-delay jam ................................................................................. 522
Causes and solutions for fuser delivery-delay jams ....................................................................... 524
Causes and solutions for wrapping jams ....................................................................................... 524
Causes and solutions for fuser delivery stationary jams ................................................................ 525
Causes and solutions for residual media jams .............................................................................. 525
Causes and solutions for pickup delay jams 2 ............................................................................. 525
Causes and solutions for pickup-stationary jam .......................................................................... 526
Causes and solutions for fuser delivery-stationary jam ............................................................... 526
Causes and solutions for duplexing reverse jams 1 .................................................................... 531
Causes and solutions for duplexing reverse jams 2 .................................................................... 531
Causes and solutions for duplexing-repickup jams 1 ................................................................... 532
Causes and solutions for duplexing-repickup jams 2 ................................................................... 532
Causes and solutions for pickup-delay jam 1: tray pickup ........................................................... 535
Causes and solutions for pickup stationary jams ......................................................................... 536
Causes and solutions for pickup-delay jam s1; MP-tray pickup ................................................... 539
Causes and solutions for pickup stationary jams ......................................................................... 540
Causes and solutions for pickup-delay jam ................................................................................. 543
Causes and solutions for delivery delay jams 1 ........................................................................... 547
Causes and solutions for delivery delay jams 2 ........................................................................... 548
Causes and solutions for delivery stationary jams ....................................................................... 548
Communication check .................................................................................................................. 579

ENWW

Table 7-26
Table 7-27
Table 7-28
Table 7-29
Table 7-30
Table 7-31
Table 7-32
Table 7-33
Table 8-1
Table 8-2
Table 8-3
Table 8-4
Table 8-5
Table 8-6
Table 8-7
Table 8-8
Table 8-9
Table 8-10
Table 8-11
Table 8-12
Table 8-13
Table 8-14
Table 8-15
Table 8-16
Table 8-17
Table 8-18
Table 8-19
Table 8-20
Table 8-21
Table 8-22
Table 8-23
Table 8-24
Table 8-25
Table 8-26
Table 8-27
Table 8-28
Table 8-29
Table 8-30
Table 8-31
Table 8-32
Table 9-1
Table 9-2
Table 9-3
Table 9-4

ENWW

Paper-path sensors diagnostic tests ............................................................................................ 588
N-Media sensor test values .......................................................................................................... 588
Manual sensor diagnostic tests .................................................................................................... 590
Component test details ................................................................................................................ 595
Scanner problems ........................................................................................................................ 601
Components (scanner) ................................................................................................................. 632
Sensors (ADF) ............................................................................................................................. 633
Input/output signals to and from DC Controller PCA ................................................................... 639
Components of the IPTU ................................................................................................................ 669
IPTU components .......................................................................................................................... 670
Motors for the stack job offset ........................................................................................................ 680
Sensors for the stack job offset ...................................................................................................... 680
Sensors used in stapling ................................................................................................................ 684
Motors used in stapling .................................................................................................................. 684
Output-bin-1-shift area sensor PCA ............................................................................................... 691
Output-bin-2-shift area sensor PCA ............................................................................................... 691
Sensors and paper sizes ............................................................................................................... 706
Solenoids and paper sizes ........................................................................................................... 707
Stapling and stacking specifications (stapler/stacker and booklet maker) ................................... 727
Specifications for booklet making (Booklet maker only) ............................................................. 730
Stapler/stacker output-bin capacities ........................................................................................... 732
Booklet-maker output-bin capacities ............................................................................................ 733
Manual sensor test letter designations ........................................................................................ 828
Component test motors and solenoids ........................................................................................ 829
LED .............................................................................................................................................. 830
Stapler/stacker cross-sectional view ............................................................................................ 832
Booklet maker cross-sectional view highlighting the stapling/stacking paper path ...................... 833
Booklet maker cross-sectional view highlighting the booklet-making paper path ........................ 834
Sensors (booklet maker) .............................................................................................................. 837
Microswitches (stapler/stacker) .................................................................................................... 839
Microswitches (booklet maker) ..................................................................................................... 840
Solenoids (stapler/stacker) ........................................................................................................... 841
Solenoids (booklet maker) ........................................................................................................... 842
Motors (stapler/stacker) ............................................................................................................... 843
Motors (booklet maker) ................................................................................................................ 844
Clutches (stapler/stacker) ............................................................................................................ 845
PCA (stapler/stacker) ................................................................................................................... 846
PCA (booklet maker) .................................................................................................................... 848
SW504 settings ............................................................................................................................ 861
Do not use the following setting. .................................................................................................. 861
Printer external covers and panels ................................................................................................ 873
Printer front-door assembly ............................................................................................................ 875
Printer right-door assembly ............................................................................................................ 877
Printer internal components (1 of 7) ............................................................................................... 879

xxiii

Table 9-5
Table 9-6
Table 9-7
Table 9-8
Table 9-9
Table 9-10
Table 9-11
Table 9-12
Table 9-13
Table 9-14
Table 9-15
Table 9-16
Table 9-17
Table 9-18
Table 9-19
Table 9-20
Table 9-21
Table 9-22
Table 9-23
Table 9-24
Table 9-25
Table 9-26
Table 9-27
Table 9-28
Table 9-29
Table 9-30
Table 9-31
Table 9-32
Table 9-33
Table 9-34
Table 9-35
Table 9-36
Table 9-37
Table 9-38
Table 9-39
Table 9-40
Table 9-41
Table 9-42
Table 9-43
Table 9-44
Table 9-45
Table 9-46
Table 9-47
Table 9-48

xxiv

Printer internal components (2 of 7) ............................................................................................... 881
Printer internal components (3 of 7) ............................................................................................... 883
Printer internal components (4 of 7) ............................................................................................... 885
Printer internal components (5 of 7) ............................................................................................... 889
Printer internal components (6 of 7) ............................................................................................... 891
Printer internal components (7 of 7) ............................................................................................. 893
Printer multi-purpose-drive assembly ........................................................................................... 895
Printer lifter-drive assembly .......................................................................................................... 897
Printer cassette ............................................................................................................................ 899
Printer cassette paper-pickup assembly ...................................................................................... 901
Printer multi-purpose paper-pickup assembly .............................................................................. 903
Printer multi-purpose-tray assembly ............................................................................................ 905
Printer multi-purpose-guide assembly ......................................................................................... 907
Printer face-down paper-delivery assembly ................................................................................. 909
Printer duplexing-reverse assembly ............................................................................................. 911
Printer duplexing-feed assembly .................................................................................................. 913
Printer PCA assembly location ..................................................................................................... 915
Input-tray main body (1x500-sheet) ............................................................................................. 919
Input-tray main body (3x500-sheet) ............................................................................................. 923
Input-tray auto-close assembly .................................................................................................... 927
Input-tray cassette ........................................................................................................................ 929
Input-tray paper-pickup assembly ................................................................................................ 931
Input-tray PCA assembly ............................................................................................................. 933
Intermediate-feed main body ....................................................................................................... 935
Intermediate-feed lower-guide assembly ..................................................................................... 937
Intermediate-feed upper-guide assembly .................................................................................... 939
Left-assist assembly ..................................................................................................................... 941
Right-assist assembly .................................................................................................................. 943
PCA assembly .............................................................................................................................. 945
Stapler/stacker unit ...................................................................................................................... 946
Booklet-maker unit ....................................................................................................................... 949
External panels and covers (stapler/stacker) ............................................................................... 951
External panels and covers (booklet-maker) ............................................................................... 953
Finisher (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ............................................................................... 959
Output bin 1 (stack upper-tray assembly) (stapler/stacker) ......................................................... 963
Output bin 1 (stack upper-tray assembly) (booklet-maker) .......................................................... 967
Output bin 2 (stack lower-tray assembly) (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ........................... 971
Top output bin (stack sub-tray assembly) (stapler/stacker) ......................................................... 973
Operation-tray assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) .................................................... 975
Paper-feeder motor assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ............................................ 977
Return-roller assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ....................................................... 979
Pressure-roller assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) .................................................... 981
Swing-guide assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ....................................................... 983
Entrance upper-guide assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ......................................... 985

ENWW

Table 9-49 Staple assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ................................................................. 987
Table 9-50 Saddle assembly (booklet-maker) ................................................................................................ 993
Table 9-51 Saddle-tray assembly (booklet-maker) ........................................................................................ 997
Table 9-52 Saddle-guide assembly (booklet-maker) ..................................................................................... 999
Table 9-53 Saddle-stapler assembly (booklet-maker) ................................................................................. 1001
Table 9-54 Saddle paper-feeder assembly (stapler/stacker) ....................................................................... 1003
Table 9-55 Saddle paper-feeder assembly (booklet-maker) ........................................................................ 1005
Table 9-56 Pass lower-guide assembly (booklet-maker) ............................................................................. 1007
Table 9-57 Inner side-plate assembly (booklet-maker) ................................................................................ 1009
Table 9-58 Saddle paper-delivery assembly (booklet-maker) ...................................................................... 1011
Table 9-59 Motor-mount assembly (booklet-maker) .................................................................................... 1013
Table 9-60 PCA assembly ............................................................................................................................ 1015
Table 9-61 ADF unit ..................................................................................................................................... 1017
Table 9-62 Front-end cover .......................................................................................................................... 1019
Table 9-63 Hinge assembly .......................................................................................................................... 1021
Table 9-64 Backbone assembly ................................................................................................................... 1023
Table 9-65 Jam-cover assembly .................................................................................................................. 1025
Table 9-66 Pickup-roller assembly ............................................................................................................... 1027
Table 9-67 Separation-pad assembly .......................................................................................................... 1029
Table 9-68 Separation-floor assembly ......................................................................................................... 1031
Table 9-69 Scanner unit ............................................................................................................................... 1033
Table 9-70 Carriage assembly ..................................................................................................................... 1035
Table 9-71 Scanner controller-board (SCB) assembly ................................................................................ 1037
Table 9-72 Large-pin assembly .................................................................................................................... 1039
Table 9-73 Small-pin assembly .................................................................................................................... 1041
Table 9-74 Inverter assembly ....................................................................................................................... 1043
Table 9-75 Glass assembly .......................................................................................................................... 1045
Table 9-76 Lid-sensor assembly .................................................................................................................. 1047
Table 9-77 Motor assembly .......................................................................................................................... 1049
Table 9-78 Pulley assembly ......................................................................................................................... 1051
Table 9-79 Power-supply assembly ............................................................................................................. 1053
Table 9-80 Main-frame assembly ................................................................................................................. 1055
Table 9-81 Plastic-parts assembly ............................................................................................................... 1059
Table 9-82 Transmission assembly .............................................................................................................. 1061
Table 9-83 Fan-system assembly ................................................................................................................ 1063
Table 9-84 Havic assembly .......................................................................................................................... 1065
Table 9-85 Alphabetical parts list ................................................................................................................. 1066
Table 9-86 Numerical parts list ..................................................................................................................... 1094
Table B-1 Product dimensions ..................................................................................................................... 1134
Table B-2 Product dimensions, with all doors and trays fully opened .......................................................... 1134
Table B-3 Power requirements (HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP Series) ................................................. 1135
Table B-4 Power consumption HP Color LaserJet CM6030 and CM6040 MFP Series (average, in
watts) .............................................................................................................................................................. 1135
Table B-5 Sound power and pressure level (HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP Series) .............................. 1136

ENWW

xxv

xxvi

ENWW

List of figures

Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 5-1
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
Figure 5-6
Figure 5-7
Figure 5-8
Figure 5-9
Figure 5-10
Figure 5-11
Figure 5-12
Figure 5-13
Figure 5-14
Figure 5-15
Figure 5-16
Figure 5-17
Figure 5-18
Figure 5-19
Figure 5-20
Figure 5-21
Figure 5-22
Figure 5-23
Figure 5-24
Figure 5-25
Figure 5-26
Figure 5-27
Figure 5-28

ENWW

3-bin stapler/stacker accessory ...................................................................................................... 83
Booklet-maker finisher accessory ................................................................................................... 84
Supply item locations .................................................................................................................... 104
Location of product components that require cleaning ................................................................. 123
Location of components that require cleaning .............................................................................. 124
Location of IPTU components that require cleaning ..................................................................... 125
Relationship between the main product systems ......................................................................... 138
Engine-control system .................................................................................................................. 143
DC controller block diagram .......................................................................................................... 144
Fuser components ........................................................................................................................ 150
Fuser temperature-control circuit .................................................................................................. 151
Low-voltage power-supply circuit .................................................................................................. 154
High-voltage power supply circuits ............................................................................................... 156
Laser/scanner system ................................................................................................................... 158
Image-formation system ............................................................................................................... 160
Image-formation process ............................................................................................................ 161
Pre-exposure .............................................................................................................................. 162
Primary charging ......................................................................................................................... 162
Laser-beam exposure ................................................................................................................. 163
Development ............................................................................................................................... 163
Primary transfer .......................................................................................................................... 164
Secondary transfer ...................................................................................................................... 164
Separation ................................................................................................................................... 165
Fusing ......................................................................................................................................... 165
ITB cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 166
Drum cleaning ............................................................................................................................. 166
Print-cartridge system ................................................................................................................. 167
Imaging-drum system ................................................................................................................. 169
Developing roller engagement and disengagement control ....................................................... 170
ITB unit ........................................................................................................................................ 171
Three states of primary-transfer-roller engagement and disengagement ................................... 173
Secondary-transfer-roller unit ..................................................................................................... 175
Toner patterns for calibration ...................................................................................................... 176
Switches and sensors for the pickup, feed, and delivery system ............................................... 178

xxvii

Figure 5-29
Figure 5-30
Figure 5-31
Figure 5-32
Figure 5-33
Figure 5-34
Figure 5-35
Figure 5-36
Figure 5-37
Figure 5-38
Figure 5-39
Figure 5-40
Figure 5-41
Figure 5-42
Figure 5-43
Figure 5-44
Figure 5-45
Figure 5-46
Figure 5-47
Figure 5-48
Figure 5-49
Figure 5-50
Figure 5-51
Figure 5-52
Figure 5-53
Figure 5-54
Figure 5-55
Figure 5-56
Figure 5-57
Figure 5-58
Figure 5-59
Figure 5-60
Figure 5-61
Figure 5-62
Figure 5-63
Figure 5-64
Figure 5-65
Figure 5-66
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-2
Figure 6-3
Figure 6-4
Figure 6-5
Figure 6-6

xxviii

Motors and solenoids for the pickup, feed, and delivery system ................................................ 180
Three main units of the pickup, feed, and delivery system ......................................................... 181
Cassette-pickup mechanism ....................................................................................................... 183
Cassette paper-size detection switches ..................................................................................... 184
Cassette lift mechanism .............................................................................................................. 186
Paper-level-detection mechanism .............................................................................................. 187
Multifeed prevention .................................................................................................................... 188
Multipurpose tray pickup mechanism .......................................................................................... 189
Multipurpose tray last-paper detection ........................................................................................ 190
Paper-feed mechanism ............................................................................................................... 191
Skew-feed prevention ................................................................................................................. 192
Media sensor unit ........................................................................................................................ 193
Loop-control mechanism ............................................................................................................. 195
Pressure-roller pressurization control ......................................................................................... 196
Duplexing unit ............................................................................................................................. 197
Optional input trays ..................................................................................................................... 201
Signals for the input trays ........................................................................................................... 202
Paper-feeder pickup and feed operation .................................................................................... 204
Scanner components (1 of 2) ..................................................................................................... 206
Scanner components (2 of 3) ..................................................................................................... 206
Scanner components (3 of 3) ..................................................................................................... 207
Scanner ...................................................................................................................................... 208
Scanner system block diagram ................................................................................................... 209
Scanner system image-data path ............................................................................................... 210
Scanner power topology ............................................................................................................. 210
Sleep-state power topology ........................................................................................................ 211
Deep-sleep-state power topology ............................................................................................... 212
Sensor topology .......................................................................................................................... 213
SCB map ..................................................................................................................................... 215
CCD map .................................................................................................................................... 216
Power-on initialization-operation flow (1 of 2) ............................................................................. 217
Power-on initialization-operation flow (2 of 2) ............................................................................. 218
FB scan-operation flow ............................................................................................................... 219
ADF scan-operation flow ............................................................................................................. 219
ADF operation ............................................................................................................................. 221
Simplex scanning document path ............................................................................................... 222
Duplex scanning document path ................................................................................................ 223
ADF paper pick and separation .................................................................................................. 225
Screwdrivers ................................................................................................................................. 229
Remove the secondary transfer unit (1 of 9) ................................................................................ 249
Remove the secondary transfer unit (2 of 9) ................................................................................ 250
Remove the secondary transfer unit (3 of 9) ................................................................................ 250
Remove the secondary transfer unit (4 of 9) ................................................................................ 251
Remove the secondary transfer unit (5 of 9) ................................................................................ 251

ENWW

Figure 6-7
Figure 6-8
Figure 6-9
Figure 6-10
Figure 6-11
Figure 6-12
Figure 6-13
Figure 6-14
Figure 6-15
Figure 6-16
Figure 6-17
Figure 6-18
Figure 6-19
Figure 6-20
Figure 6-21
Figure 6-22
Figure 6-23
Figure 6-24
Figure 6-25
Figure 6-26
Figure 6-27
Figure 6-28
Figure 6-29
Figure 6-30
Figure 6-31
Figure 6-32
Figure 6-33
Figure 6-34
Figure 6-35
Figure 6-36
Figure 6-37
Figure 6-38
Figure 6-39
Figure 6-40
Figure 6-41
Figure 6-42
Figure 6-43
Figure 6-44
Figure 6-45
Figure 6-46
Figure 6-47
Figure 6-48
Figure 6-49
Figure 6-50

ENWW

Remove the secondary transfer unit (6 of 9) ................................................................................ 252
Remove the secondary transfer unit (7 of 9) ................................................................................ 252
Remove the secondary transfer unit (8 of 9) ................................................................................ 253
Remove the secondary transfer unit (9 of 9) .............................................................................. 253
Remove the multipurpose drive unit (1 of 7) ............................................................................... 254
Remove the multipurpose drive unit (2 of 7) ............................................................................... 254
Remove the multipurpose drive unit (3 of 7) ............................................................................... 255
Remove the multipurpose drive unit (4 of 7) ............................................................................... 255
Remove the multipurpose drive unit (5 of 7) ............................................................................... 256
Remove the multipurpose drive unit (6 of 7) ............................................................................... 256
Remove the multipurpose drive unit (7 of 7) ............................................................................... 257
Remove the multipurpose tray guide unit ................................................................................... 258
Remove the cassette (Tray 2) pickup unit .................................................................................. 259
Remove rear left cover ................................................................................................................ 260
Remove rear right cover ............................................................................................................. 261
Remove rear cover (1 of 2) ......................................................................................................... 262
Remove rear cover (2 of 2) ......................................................................................................... 262
Remove the low-voltage power-supply unit ................................................................................ 263
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA (A) (1 of 3) ........................................................... 264
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA (A) (2 of 3) ........................................................... 265
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA (A) (3 of 3) ........................................................... 265
Remove the lifter-drive unit (1 of 2) ............................................................................................. 266
Remove the lifter-drive unit (2 of 2) ............................................................................................. 267
Unlocked position of the lifter-drive unit (correct) ....................................................................... 267
Locked position of the lifter-drive unit (incorrect) ........................................................................ 268
Remove the fuser motor ............................................................................................................. 269
Remove the intermediate-transfer belt (ITB) motor .................................................................... 270
Remove face-down output bin .................................................................................................... 271
Remove left cover (1 of 2) ........................................................................................................... 272
Remove left cover (2 of 2) ........................................................................................................... 272
Remove the laser/scanner fan duct (1 of 3) ................................................................................ 273
Remove the laser/scanner fan duct (2 of 3) ................................................................................ 273
Remove the laser/scanner fan duct (3 of 3) ................................................................................ 274
Remove the print-cartridge driver PCA (1 of 3) ........................................................................... 275
Remove the print-cartridge driver PCA (2 of 3) ........................................................................... 276
Remove the print-cartridge driver PCA (3 of 3) ........................................................................... 276
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA (B) (1 of 3) ........................................................... 277
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA (B) (2 of 3) ........................................................... 277
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA (B) (3 of 3) ........................................................... 278
Remove the formatter case (1 of 3) ............................................................................................ 279
Remove the formatter case (2 of 3) ............................................................................................ 279
Remove the formatter case (3 of 3) ............................................................................................ 280
Remove the DC controller PCA (1 of 2) ...................................................................................... 281
Remove the DC controller PCA (2 of 2) ...................................................................................... 282

xxix

Figure 6-51
Figure 6-52
Figure 6-53
Figure 6-54
Figure 6-55
Figure 6-56
Figure 6-57
Figure 6-58
Figure 6-59
Figure 6-60
Figure 6-61
Figure 6-62
Figure 6-63
Figure 6-64
Figure 6-65
Figure 6-66
Figure 6-67
Figure 6-68
Figure 6-69
Figure 6-70
Figure 6-71
Figure 6-72
Figure 6-73
Figure 6-74
Figure 6-75
Figure 6-76
Figure 6-77
Figure 6-78
Figure 6-79
Figure 6-80
Figure 6-81
Figure 6-82
Figure 6-83
Figure 6-84
Figure 6-85
Figure 6-86
Figure 6-87
Figure 6-88
Figure 6-89
Figure 6-90
Figure 6-91
Figure 6-92
Figure 6-93
Figure 6-94

xxx

Remove the environmental sensors ........................................................................................... 283
Remove the image-drum motor (1 of 3) ...................................................................................... 284
Remove the image-drum motor (2 of 3) ...................................................................................... 284
Remove the image-drum motor (3 of 3) ...................................................................................... 285
Remove the fuser fan .................................................................................................................. 286
Remove the print-cartridge feed motor (black) ........................................................................... 287
Remove the print-cartridge feed motor (yellow, magenta, and cyan) ......................................... 288
Remove the cartridge fan unit (1 of 2) ........................................................................................ 289
Remove the cartridge fan unit (2 of 2) ........................................................................................ 289
Remove the laser/scanner fan unit (1 of 2) ................................................................................. 290
Remove the laser/scanner fan unit (2 of 2) ................................................................................. 290
Remove the fuser power-supply unit (1 of 2) .............................................................................. 291
Remove the fuser power-supply unit (2 of 2) .............................................................................. 291
Remove the primary transfer-roller disengagement motor (1 of 2) ............................................. 292
Remove the primary transfer-roller disengagement motor (2 of 2) ............................................. 292
Remove the print-cartridge drive unit (yellow and magenta) ...................................................... 293
Gear alignment (1 of 7) ............................................................................................................... 294
Gear alignment (2 of 7) ............................................................................................................... 294
Gear alignment (3 of 7) ............................................................................................................... 295
Gear alignment (4 of 7) ............................................................................................................... 295
Correct position of print-cartridge drive unit (5 of 7) ................................................................... 296
Incorrect position of print-cartridge drive unit (6 of 7) ................................................................. 296
Gear alignment (7 of 7) ............................................................................................................... 297
Remove the print-cartridge drive unit (cyan and black) .............................................................. 298
Remove the print-cartridge interface PCA (cyan and black) ....................................................... 299
Print-cartridge interface PCA (yellow and magenta) ................................................................... 300
Remove the main drive unit (1 of 3) ............................................................................................ 301
Remove the main drive unit (2 of 3) ............................................................................................ 302
Remove the cartridge fan duct .................................................................................................... 303
Remove front lower cover (1 of 2) ............................................................................................... 305
Remove front lower cover (2 of 2) ............................................................................................... 305
Remove inner cover (1 of 4) ....................................................................................................... 306
Remove inner cover (2 of 4) ....................................................................................................... 306
Remove inner cover (3 of 4) ....................................................................................................... 307
Remove inner cover (4 of 4) ....................................................................................................... 307
Remove rear-scanner cover ....................................................................................................... 308
Remove right upper cover ........................................................................................................... 309
Remove front door ...................................................................................................................... 310
Remove front door assembly ...................................................................................................... 311
Remove the color-misregistration and image-density sensor unit (1 of 3) .................................. 312
Remove the color-misregistration and image-density sensor unit (2 of 3) .................................. 313
Remove the color-misregistration and image-density sensor unit (3 of 3) .................................. 313
Remove the pressure-release sensor unit (1 of 2) ..................................................................... 314
Remove the pressure-release sensor unit (2 of 2) ..................................................................... 314

ENWW

Figure 6-95
Figure 6-96
Figure 6-97
Figure 6-98
Figure 6-99
Figure 6-100
Figure 6-101
Figure 6-102
Figure 6-103
Figure 6-104
Figure 6-105
Figure 6-106
Figure 6-107
Figure 6-108
Figure 6-109
Figure 6-110
Figure 6-111
Figure 6-112
Figure 6-113
Figure 6-114
Figure 6-115
Figure 6-116
Figure 6-117
Figure 6-118
Figure 6-119
Figure 6-120
Figure 6-121
Figure 6-122
Figure 6-123
Figure 6-124
Figure 6-125
Figure 6-126
Figure 6-127
Figure 6-128
Figure 6-129
Figure 6-130
Figure 6-131
Figure 6-132
Figure 6-133
Figure 6-134
Figure 6-135
Figure 6-136
Figure 6-137
Figure 6-138

ENWW

Remove the laser/scanner assembly (yellow and magenta) (1 of 3) .......................................... 316
Remove the laser/scanner assembly (yellow and magenta) (2 of 3) .......................................... 317
Remove the laser/scanner assembly (yellow and magenta) (3 of 3) .......................................... 318
Replace cables ........................................................................................................................... 318
Remove the laser/scanner assembly (cyan and black) (1 of 3) .................................................. 319
Remove the laser/scanner assembly (cyan and black) (2 of 3) ................................................ 320
Remove the laser/scanner assembly (cyan and black) (3 of 3) ................................................ 321
Replace cables ......................................................................................................................... 321
Remove the VOC fan ............................................................................................................... 322
Remove the duplexing reverse unit .......................................................................................... 323
Remove the face-down delivery unit (1 of 3) ............................................................................ 324
Remove the face-down delivery unit (2 of 3) ............................................................................ 325
Remove the face-down delivery unit (3 of 3) ............................................................................ 325
Remove face-down cover ......................................................................................................... 326
Remove right-door assembly (1 of 4) ........................................................................................ 327
Remove right-door assembly (2 of 4) ........................................................................................ 327
Remove right-door assembly (3 of 4) ........................................................................................ 328
Remove right-door assembly (4 of 4) ........................................................................................ 328
Remove the duplexing feed unit (1 of 3) ................................................................................... 329
Remove the duplexing feed unit (2 of 3) ................................................................................... 329
Remove the duplexing feed unit ............................................................................................... 330
Remove the multipurpose tray (1 of 5) ..................................................................................... 331
Remove the multipurpose tray (2 of 5) ..................................................................................... 332
Remove the multipurpose tray (3 of 5) ..................................................................................... 332
Remove the multipurpose tray (4 of 5) ..................................................................................... 333
Remove the multipurpose tray (5 of 5) ..................................................................................... 333
Remove the thermopile unit (1 of 2) ......................................................................................... 334
Remove the thermopile unit (2 of 2) ......................................................................................... 334
Remove front-lower cover ......................................................................................................... 335
Remove the ITB duct (1 of 2) .................................................................................................... 336
Remove the ITB duct (2 of 2) .................................................................................................... 336
Remove the right door (1 of 2) .................................................................................................. 337
Remove the right door (2 of 2) .................................................................................................. 338
Remove the lower-rear cover (1 of 2) ....................................................................................... 339
Remove the lower rear cover (2 of 2) ....................................................................................... 339
Remove the front-right cover (1 of 2) ........................................................................................ 340
Remove the front-right cover (2 of 2) ........................................................................................ 340
Remove the right cover ............................................................................................................. 341
Remove the front-upper cover .................................................................................................. 342
Remove the lower-left cover ..................................................................................................... 343
Remove the front-lower cover (1 of 2) ...................................................................................... 344
Remove the front-lower cover (2 of 2) ...................................................................................... 344
Remove the box (1 of 2) ........................................................................................................... 345
Remove the box (2 of 2) ........................................................................................................... 345

xxxi

Figure 6-139
Figure 6-140
Figure 6-141
Figure 6-142
Figure 6-143
Figure 6-144
Figure 6-145
Figure 6-146
Figure 6-147
Figure 6-148
Figure 6-149
Figure 6-150
Figure 6-151
Figure 6-152
Figure 6-153
Figure 6-154
Figure 6-155
Figure 6-156
Figure 6-157
Figure 6-158
Figure 6-159
Figure 6-160
Figure 6-161
Figure 6-162
Figure 6-163
Figure 6-164
Figure 6-165
Figure 6-166
Figure 6-167
Figure 6-168
Figure 6-169
Figure 6-170
Figure 6-171
Figure 6-172
Figure 6-173
Figure 6-174
Figure 6-175
Figure 6-176
Figure 6-177
Figure 6-178
Figure 6-179
Figure 6-180
Figure 6-181
Figure 6-182

xxxii

Remove the pickup unit ............................................................................................................ 346
Remove the pickup unit (1 of 3) ................................................................................................ 347
Remove the pickup unit (2 of 3) ................................................................................................ 347
Remove the pickup unit (2 of 3) ................................................................................................ 348
Remove the auto-close unit (1 of 2) .......................................................................................... 349
Remove the auto-close unit (2 of 2) .......................................................................................... 349
Remove the pickup motor ......................................................................................................... 350
Remove the paper-feeder driver PCA ...................................................................................... 351
Remove the pickup unit (middle cassette) (1 of 2) ................................................................... 353
Remove the pickup unit (middle cassette) (2 of 2) ................................................................... 353
Remove the pickup unit (upper cassette) ................................................................................. 354
Remove the pickup unit (upper cassette) (1 of 3) ..................................................................... 355
Remove the pickup unit (upper cassette) (2 of 3) ..................................................................... 355
Remove the pickup unit (upper cassette) (3 of 3) ..................................................................... 356
Remove optical scanner (1 of 7) ............................................................................................... 358
Remove optical scanner (2 of 7) ............................................................................................... 359
Remove optical scanner (3 of 7) ............................................................................................... 359
Remove optical scanner (4 of 7) ............................................................................................... 360
Remove optical scanner (5 of 7) ............................................................................................... 360
Remove optical scanner (6 of 7) ............................................................................................... 361
Remove optical scanner (7 of 7) ............................................................................................... 361
Upper-left scanner cover ........................................................................................................... 362
Remove upper-right scanner cover .......................................................................................... 363
Remove control panel (1 of 3) .................................................................................................. 364
Remove control panel (2 of 3) .................................................................................................. 364
Remove control panel (3 of 3) .................................................................................................. 365
Remove front cover (1 of 2) ...................................................................................................... 366
Remove front cover (2 of 2) ...................................................................................................... 367
Remove lower left cover (1 of 2) ............................................................................................... 368
Remove lower left cover (2 of 2) ............................................................................................... 369
Remove lower right cover ......................................................................................................... 370
Remove top cover (1 of 2) ........................................................................................................ 371
Remove top cover (2 of 2) ........................................................................................................ 371
Remove glass assembly .......................................................................................................... 372
Remove carriage unit (1 of 8) ................................................................................................... 373
Remove carriage unit (2 of 8) ................................................................................................... 374
Remove carriage unit (3 of 8) ................................................................................................... 374
Remove carriage unit (4 of 8) ................................................................................................... 375
Remove carriage unit (5 of 8) ................................................................................................... 375
Remove carriage unit (6 of 8) ................................................................................................... 376
Remove carriage unit (7 of 8) ................................................................................................... 376
Remove carriage unit (8 of 8) ................................................................................................... 377
Lamp cable ............................................................................................................................... 378
Jumpers on the SCB ................................................................................................................. 378

ENWW

Figure 6-183
Figure 6-184
Figure 6-185
Figure 6-186
Figure 6-187
Figure 6-188
Figure 6-189
Figure 6-190
Figure 6-191
Figure 6-192
Figure 6-193
Figure 6-194
Figure 6-195
Figure 6-196
Figure 6-197
Figure 6-198
Figure 6-199
Figure 6-200
Figure 6-201
Figure 6-202
Figure 6-203
Figure 6-204
Figure 6-205
Figure 6-206
Figure 6-207
Figure 6-208
Figure 6-209
Figure 6-210
Figure 6-211
Figure 6-212
Figure 6-213
Figure 6-214
Figure 6-215
Figure 6-216
Figure 6-217
Figure 6-218
Figure 6-219
Figure 6-220
Figure 6-221
Figure 6-222
Figure 6-223
Figure 6-224
Figure 6-225
Figure 6-226

ENWW

Remove pulley assembly and motor unit (1 of 5) ..................................................................... 380
Remove pulley assembly and motor unit (2 of 5) ..................................................................... 381
Remove pulley assembly and motor unit (3 of 5) ..................................................................... 381
Remove pulley assembly and motor unit (4 of 5) ..................................................................... 382
Remove pulley assembly and motor unit (5 of 5) ..................................................................... 382
Remove rail ............................................................................................................................... 383
Remove inverter (1 of 3) ........................................................................................................... 384
Remove inverter (2 of 3) ........................................................................................................... 385
Remove inverter (3 of 3) ........................................................................................................... 385
Remove lid sensor (1 of 3) ........................................................................................................ 386
Remove lid sensor (2 of 3) ........................................................................................................ 387
Remove lid sensor (3 of 3) ........................................................................................................ 387
Remove SCB and CPB (1 of 5) ................................................................................................ 388
Remove SCB and CPB (2 of 5) ................................................................................................ 388
Remove SCB, CPB, and SCUID (3 of 5) .................................................................................. 389
Remove SCB, CPB, and SCUID (4 of 5) .................................................................................. 389
Remove SCB, CPB, and SCUID (5 of 5) .................................................................................. 390
Remove power supply unit (1 of 3) ........................................................................................... 391
Remove power supply unit (2 of 3) ........................................................................................... 391
Remove power supply unit (3 of 3) ........................................................................................... 392
Remove scanner fan ................................................................................................................. 393
Remove the SCB fan ................................................................................................................ 394
Remove control panel fan ......................................................................................................... 395
Remove fan filter ....................................................................................................................... 396
Remove the ADF assembly (1 of 4) .......................................................................................... 397
Remove the ADF assembly (2 of 4) .......................................................................................... 397
Remove the ADF assembly (3 of 4) .......................................................................................... 398
Remove the ADF assembly (4 of 4) .......................................................................................... 398
Remove the ADF sensors (1 of 2) ............................................................................................ 399
Remove the ADF sensors (2 of 2) ............................................................................................ 400
Remove the ADF separation floor assembly (1 of 4) ................................................................ 401
Remove the ADF separation floor assembly (2 of 4) ................................................................ 401
Remove the ADF separation floor assembly (3 of 4) ................................................................ 402
Remove the ADF separation floor assembly (4 of 4) ................................................................ 402
Remove the ADF diverter (1 of 2) ............................................................................................. 403
Remove the ADF diverter (2 of 2) ............................................................................................. 403
Remove the ADF jam cover (1 of 3) ......................................................................................... 404
Remove the ADF jam cover (2 of 3) ......................................................................................... 404
Remove the ADF jam cover (3 of 3) ......................................................................................... 405
Remove the ADF hinges ........................................................................................................... 406
Remove the ADF float assembly (1 of 5) .................................................................................. 407
Remove the ADF float assembly (2 of 5) .................................................................................. 407
Remove the ADF float assembly (3 of 5) .................................................................................. 408
Remove the ADF float assembly (4 of 5) .................................................................................. 408

xxxiii

Figure 6-227 Remove the ADF float assembly (5 of 5) .................................................................................. 409
Figure 6-228 Remove the ADF white backing (1 of 4) ................................................................................... 410
Figure 6-229 Remove the ADF white backing (2 of 4) ................................................................................... 410
Figure 6-230 Remove the ADF white backing (3 of 4) ................................................................................... 411
Figure 6-231 Remove the ADF white backing (4 of 4) ................................................................................... 411
Figure 6-232 Remove the ADF front end cover (1 of 4) ................................................................................. 412
Figure 6-233 Remove the ADF front end cover (2 of 4) ................................................................................. 412
Figure 6-234 Remove the ADF front end cover ( 3 of 4) ................................................................................ 413
Figure 6-235 Remove the ADF front end cover (4 of 4) ................................................................................. 413
Figure 6-236 Remove the ADF rear end cover (1 of 5) .................................................................................. 414
Figure 6-237 Remove the ADF rear end cover (2 of 5) .................................................................................. 414
Figure 6-238 Remove the ADF rear end cover (3 of 5) .................................................................................. 415
Figure 6-239 Remove the ADF rear end cover (4 of 5) .................................................................................. 415
Figure 6-240 Remove the ADF rear end cover (5 of 5) .................................................................................. 416
Figure 6-241 Reinstall the ADF rear end cover .............................................................................................. 416
Figure 6-242 Remove the ADF PCA and wire harness (1 of 3) ..................................................................... 417
Figure 6-243 Remove the ADF PCA and wire harness (2 of 3) ..................................................................... 417
Figure 6-244 Remove the ADF PCA and wire harness (3 of 3) ..................................................................... 418
Figure 6-245 Remove the ADF input tray (1 of 2) .......................................................................................... 419
Figure 6-246 Remove the ADF input tray (2 of 2) .......................................................................................... 419
Figure 7-1 Configuration page ....................................................................................................................... 432
Figure 7-2 HP embedded Jetdirect page ....................................................................................................... 433
Figure 7-3 Embedded protocol page ............................................................................................................. 434
Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors ....................................................................................................................... 512
Figure 7-5 Jam locations ................................................................................................................................ 520
Figure 7-6 Locations of jam sensors .............................................................................................................. 522
Figure 7-7 Paper deck sensors ...................................................................................................................... 543
Figure 7-8 Print-quality troubleshooting procedure ........................................................................................ 572
Figure 7-9 Yellow print-quality troubleshooting page ..................................................................................... 572
Figure 7-10 Yellow comparison page ............................................................................................................. 573
Figure 7-11 Black print-quality troubleshooting page ..................................................................................... 574
Figure 7-12 SCB LEDs ................................................................................................................................... 581
Figure 7-13 CPB LEDs ................................................................................................................................... 583
Figure 7-14 Engine-test button ....................................................................................................................... 584
Figure 7-15 Front- and right-door switch on the right side ............................................................................. 586
Figure 7-16 Front-door switch on the left side ................................................................................................ 587
Figure 7-17 DC controller PCA ....................................................................................................................... 604
Figure 7-18 Cartridge driver PCA ................................................................................................................... 604
Figure 7-19 Fuser control PCA ....................................................................................................................... 605
Figure 7-20 Duplexing driver PCA .................................................................................................................. 605
Figure 7-21 Input tray driver PCA ................................................................................................................... 605
Figure 7-22 IPTU driver PCA ......................................................................................................................... 606
Figure 7-23 Product connector locations (1 of 6) ........................................................................................... 606
Figure 7-24 Product connector locations (2 of 6) ........................................................................................... 607

xxxiv

ENWW

Figure 7-25 Product connector locations (3 of 6) ........................................................................................... 607
Figure 7-26 Product connector locations (4 of 6) ........................................................................................... 608
Figure 7-27 Product connector locations (5 of 6) ........................................................................................... 608
Figure 7-28 Product connector locations (6 of 6) ........................................................................................... 609
Figure 7-29 1 x 500 input tray ........................................................................................................................ 609
Figure 7-30 3 x 500 input tray (1 of 2) ............................................................................................................ 610
Figure 7-31 3 x 500 input tray (2 of 2) ............................................................................................................ 610
Figure 7-32 IPTU ............................................................................................................................................ 611
Figure 7-33 Product fan locations ................................................................................................................. 611
Figure 7-34 Product sensor locations (1 of 3) ................................................................................................ 612
Figure 7-35 Product sensor locations (2 of 3) ................................................................................................ 613
Figure 7-36 Product sensor locations (3 of 3) ................................................................................................ 613
Figure 7-37 1 x 500 input tray sensor locations ............................................................................................. 615
Figure 7-38 3 x 500 input tray sensor locations (1 of 2) ................................................................................. 615
Figure 7-39 3 x 500 input tray sensor locations (2 of 2) ................................................................................. 616
Figure 7-40 IPTU sensor locations ................................................................................................................. 616
Figure 7-41 Product motor locations (1 of 2) .................................................................................................. 617
Figure 7-42 Product motor locations (2 of 2) .................................................................................................. 617
Figure 7-43 1 x 500 input tray motor locations ............................................................................................... 619
Figure 7-44 3 x 500 input tray motor locations ............................................................................................... 619
Figure 7-45 IPTU motor locations .................................................................................................................. 620
Figure 7-46 Product solenoid locations .......................................................................................................... 620
Figure 7-47 1 x 500 input-tray solenoid locations .......................................................................................... 621
Figure 7-48 3 x 500 input-tray solenoid locations ......................................................................................... 621
Figure 7-49 Product switch locations ............................................................................................................. 622
Figure 7-50 1 x 500 input tray switch locations .............................................................................................. 623
Figure 7-51 3 x 500 input tray switch locations (1 of 2) .................................................................................. 623
Figure 7-52 3 x 500 input tray switch locations (2 of 2) .................................................................................. 624
Figure 7-53 Main assemblies (1 of 2) ............................................................................................................. 625
Figure 7-54 Main assemblies (2 of 2) ............................................................................................................. 627
Figure 7-55 Main parts ................................................................................................................................... 628
Figure 7-56 PCAs ........................................................................................................................................... 629
Figure 7-57 1 x 500 input tray ........................................................................................................................ 630
Figure 7-58 3 x 500 input tray ........................................................................................................................ 631
Figure 7-59 IPTU ............................................................................................................................................ 632
Figure 7-60 Components (scanner) ............................................................................................................... 632
Figure 7-61 Sensors (ADF) ............................................................................................................................ 633
Figure 7-62 General timing chart .................................................................................................................... 634
Figure 7-63 General circuit diagram (1 of 4) .................................................................................................. 635
Figure 7-64 General circuit diagram (2 of 4) .................................................................................................. 635
Figure 7-65 General circuit diagram (3 of 4) .................................................................................................. 636
Figure 7-66 General circuit diagram (4 of 4) .................................................................................................. 637
Figure 8-1 Paper path of the IPTU ................................................................................................................. 668
Figure 8-2 Signal flow in the IPTU .................................................................................................................. 669

ENWW

xxxv

Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4
Figure 8-5
Figure 8-6
Figure 8-7
Figure 8-8
Figure 8-9
Figure 8-10
Figure 8-11
Figure 8-12
Figure 8-13
Figure 8-14
Figure 8-15
Figure 8-16
Figure 8-17
Figure 8-18
Figure 8-19
Figure 8-20
Figure 8-21
Figure 8-22
Figure 8-23
Figure 8-24
Figure 8-25
Figure 8-26
Figure 8-27
Figure 8-28
Figure 8-29
Figure 8-30
Figure 8-31
Figure 8-32
Figure 8-33
Figure 8-34
Figure 8-35
Figure 8-36
Figure 8-37
Figure 8-38
Figure 8-39
Figure 8-40
Figure 8-41
Figure 8-42
Figure 8-43
Figure 8-44
Figure 8-45
Figure 8-46

xxxvi

Motors and sensors of the IPTU ................................................................................................... 670
Basic operation of the stapler/stacker ........................................................................................... 671
Electrical circuitry of the stapler/stacker ........................................................................................ 672
Electrical circuitry of the stapler/stacker ........................................................................................ 672
Output bins of the stapler/stacker ................................................................................................. 673
Stacker controller PCA (1 of 2) ..................................................................................................... 674
Stacker controller PCA (2 of 2) ..................................................................................................... 675
Paper path when set to non-sort ................................................................................................. 676
Paper path for sizes other than A4, B5, or LTR .......................................................................... 677
Paper path (1 of 5) ...................................................................................................................... 678
Paper path (2 of 5) ...................................................................................................................... 678
Paper path (3 of 5) ...................................................................................................................... 678
Paper path (4 of 5) ...................................................................................................................... 679
Paper path (5 of 5) ...................................................................................................................... 679
Motors and sensors for stack job offset ...................................................................................... 680
Stack job offset example ............................................................................................................. 680
Process output bin ...................................................................................................................... 681
Job offset operation (1 of 2) ........................................................................................................ 681
Job offset operation (2 of 2) ........................................................................................................ 682
Stack trailing-edge assist operation ............................................................................................ 682
Stack delivery .............................................................................................................................. 683
Stapler unit .................................................................................................................................. 683
Staple location ............................................................................................................................ 684
Paper path for stapling ................................................................................................................ 685
Rollers and sensors for stapling ................................................................................................. 685
Paper path .................................................................................................................................. 686
Shift process for the staple unit .................................................................................................. 686
Stapling operation (1 of 2) .......................................................................................................... 687
Stapling operation (2 of 2) .......................................................................................................... 687
Front 1-point stapling .................................................................................................................. 688
Rear 1-point stapling ................................................................................................................... 688
2-point stapling ............................................................................................................................ 689
Items detected by the area sensors (PS981, PS982, PS983) .................................................... 690
Output-bin components .............................................................................................................. 691
Shutter location ........................................................................................................................... 692
Jam detection sensors ................................................................................................................ 693
Power-supply route ..................................................................................................................... 693
Stacker unit basics ...................................................................................................................... 694
Electrical circuitry of the stacker unit ........................................................................................... 695
Booklet maker unit basics ........................................................................................................... 695
Electrical circuitry for the booklet maker unit .............................................................................. 696
Feed drive for the stacker unit .................................................................................................... 696
Feed drive for the booklet maker unit ......................................................................................... 697
Components of the stacker unit control system (1 of 2) ............................................................. 698

ENWW

Figure 8-47
Figure 8-48
Figure 8-49
Figure 8-50
Figure 8-51
Figure 8-52
Figure 8-53
Figure 8-54
Figure 8-55
Figure 8-56
Figure 8-57
Figure 8-58
Figure 8-59
Figure 8-60
Figure 8-61
Figure 8-62
Figure 8-63
Figure 8-64
Figure 8-65
Figure 8-66
Figure 8-67
Figure 8-68
Figure 8-69
Figure 8-70
Figure 8-71
Figure 8-72
Figure 8-73
Figure 8-74
Figure 8-75
Figure 8-76
Figure 8-77
Figure 8-78
Figure 8-79
Figure 8-80
Figure 8-81
Figure 8-82
Figure 8-83
Figure 8-84
Figure 8-85
Figure 8-86
Figure 8-87
Figure 8-88
Figure 8-89
Figure 8-90

ENWW

Components of the stacker unit control system (2 of 2) ............................................................. 698
Components of the booklet-maker-unit control system .............................................................. 700
Components of the booklet-maker control system ..................................................................... 701
Booklet-maker-unit paper path ................................................................................................... 702
Paper delivery for booklet maker ................................................................................................ 703
Alignment plates ......................................................................................................................... 703
Stitching the stack ....................................................................................................................... 704
Position the stack ........................................................................................................................ 705
Fold and deliver the stack ........................................................................................................... 706
A3/279 mm x 432 mm 11 x 17 paper path (3 sheets) ................................................................. 707
B4/LGL paper path (3 sheets) .................................................................................................... 708
A4R/LTRR Paper Path (3 sheets) ............................................................................................... 708
Paper movement (1 of 3) ............................................................................................................ 710
Paper movement (2 of 3) ............................................................................................................ 710
Paper movement (3 of 3) ............................................................................................................ 710
Paper alignment (1 of 8) ............................................................................................................. 711
Paper alignment (2 of 8) ............................................................................................................. 711
Paper alignment (3 of 8) ............................................................................................................. 711
Paper alignment (4 of 8) ............................................................................................................. 712
Paper alignment (5 of 8) ............................................................................................................. 712
Paper alignment (6 of 8) ............................................................................................................. 713
Paper alignment (7 of 8) ............................................................................................................. 713
Paper alignment (8 of 8) ............................................................................................................. 713
Crescent-roller process (1 of 4) .................................................................................................. 714
Crescent-roller process (2 of 4) .................................................................................................. 714
Crescent-roller process (3 of 4) .................................................................................................. 715
Crescent-roller process (4 of 4) .................................................................................................. 715
Movement of the stack ................................................................................................................ 716
Stack sequence .......................................................................................................................... 716
Folding position (1 of 5) .............................................................................................................. 717
Folding process (2 of 5) .............................................................................................................. 717
Folding start position (3 of 5) ...................................................................................................... 718
Folding start position (4 of 5) ...................................................................................................... 718
Folding stop position (5 of 5) ...................................................................................................... 718
Double-folding process (1 of 5) ................................................................................................... 719
Double-folding process (2 of 5) ................................................................................................... 719
Double-folding process (3 of 5) ................................................................................................... 719
Double-folding process (4 of 5) ................................................................................................... 720
Double-folding process (5 of 5) ................................................................................................... 720
Location of the staplers ............................................................................................................... 721
Stapling operation (1 of 2) .......................................................................................................... 721
Stapling operation (2 of 2) .......................................................................................................... 722
Stitcher unit ................................................................................................................................. 723
Sequence of stitching ................................................................................................................. 723

xxxvii

Figure 8-91
Figure 8-92
Figure 8-93
Figure 8-94
Figure 8-95
Figure 8-96
Figure 8-97
Figure 8-98
Figure 8-99
Figure 8-100
Figure 8-101
Figure 8-102
Figure 8-103
Figure 8-104
Figure 8-105
Figure 8-106
Figure 8-107
Figure 8-108
Figure 8-109
Figure 8-110
Figure 8-111
Figure 8-112
Figure 8-113
Figure 8-114
Figure 8-115
Figure 8-116
Figure 8-117
Figure 8-118
Figure 8-119
Figure 8-120
Figure 8-121
Figure 8-122
Figure 8-123
Figure 8-124
Figure 8-125
Figure 8-126
Figure 8-127
Figure 8-128
Figure 8-129
Figure 8-130
Figure 8-131
Figure 8-132
Figure 8-133
Figure 8-134

xxxviii

Rotation of the cam ..................................................................................................................... 723
Jams in the stacker unit .............................................................................................................. 724
Jams in the booklet maker unit ................................................................................................... 725
Power-supply route for the stacker unit ...................................................................................... 725
Power supply route for the booklet maker unit ........................................................................... 726
Stapling position .......................................................................................................................... 730
Staple and folding position .......................................................................................................... 732
Remove IPTU (1 of 2) ................................................................................................................. 734
Remove IPTU (2 of 2) ................................................................................................................. 734
Correct placement of the IPTU (1 of 2) ..................................................................................... 735
Incorrect placement of the IPTU (2 of 2) ................................................................................... 735
Remove upper guide assembly (1 of 5) .................................................................................... 736
Remove upper guide assembly (2 of 5) .................................................................................... 736
Remove upper guide assembly (3 of 5) .................................................................................... 737
Remove upper guide assembly (4 of 5) .................................................................................... 737
Remove upper guide assembly (5 of 5) .................................................................................... 738
Remove the rear cover (1 of 4) ................................................................................................. 738
Remove the rear cover (2 of 4) ................................................................................................. 739
Remove the rear cover (3 of 4) ................................................................................................. 740
Remove the rear cover (4 of 4) ................................................................................................. 740
Reassemble the rear cover ....................................................................................................... 741
Remove the damper unit .......................................................................................................... 742
Remove the right belt-drive unit (1 of 6) ................................................................................... 743
Remove the right belt-drive unit (2 of 6) ................................................................................... 743
Remove the right belt-drive unit (3 of 6) ................................................................................... 744
Remove the right belt-drive unit (4 of 6) ................................................................................... 744
Remove the right belt-drive unit (5 of 6) ................................................................................... 745
Remove the right belt-drive unit (6 of 6) ................................................................................... 745
Remove the left belt-drive unit (1 of 3) ...................................................................................... 746
Remove the left belt-drive unit (2 of 3) ...................................................................................... 747
Remove the left belt-drive unit (3 of 3) ...................................................................................... 747
Remove finisher lock-assembly (1 of 4) .................................................................................... 748
Remove the finisher lock-assembly (2 of 4) .............................................................................. 748
Remove the finisher lock-assembly (3 of 4) .............................................................................. 749
Remove the finisher lock-assembly (4 of 4) .............................................................................. 749
Remove the IPTU paper-feed motor 1 ...................................................................................... 750
Remove the IPTU paper-feed motor 2 ...................................................................................... 751
Remove the IPTU driver PCA ................................................................................................... 752
Booklet maker and stapler/stacker (1 of 2) ............................................................................... 753
Booklet maker and stapler/stacker (2 of 2) ............................................................................... 753
Remove output accessory (1 of 5) ............................................................................................ 754
Remove output accessory (2 of 5) ............................................................................................ 754
Remove output accessory (3 of 5) ............................................................................................ 755
Remove output accessory (4 of 5) ............................................................................................ 755

ENWW

Figure 8-135
Figure 8-136
Figure 8-137
Figure 8-138
Figure 8-139
Figure 8-140
Figure 8-141
Figure 8-142
Figure 8-143
Figure 8-144
Figure 8-145
Figure 8-146
Figure 8-147
Figure 8-148
Figure 8-149
Figure 8-150
Figure 8-151
Figure 8-152
Figure 8-153
Figure 8-154
Figure 8-155
Figure 8-156
Figure 8-157
Figure 8-158
Figure 8-159
Figure 8-160
Figure 8-161
Figure 8-162
Figure 8-163
Figure 8-164
Figure 8-165
Figure 8-166
Figure 8-167
Figure 8-168
Figure 8-169
Figure 8-170
Figure 8-171
Figure 8-172
Figure 8-173
Figure 8-174
Figure 8-175
Figure 8-176
Figure 8-177
Figure 8-178

ENWW

Remove output accessory (5 of 5) ............................................................................................ 756
Remove entrance lower-guide assembly (1 of 2) ..................................................................... 757
Remove entrance lower-guide assembly (2 of 2) ..................................................................... 757
Remove the front door .............................................................................................................. 758
Remove the rear cover (1 of 2) ................................................................................................. 759
Remove the rear cover (2 of 2) ................................................................................................. 759
Remove the front-foot cover ..................................................................................................... 760
Remove the rear-foot cover ...................................................................................................... 760
Remove the front inside-upper cover ........................................................................................ 761
Remove the front inside-lower cover (1 of 2) ............................................................................ 762
Remove the front inside-lower cover (2 of 2) ............................................................................ 762
Remove the left-upper cover (1 of 3) ........................................................................................ 763
Remove the left-upper cover (2 of 3) ........................................................................................ 764
Remove the left-upper cover (3 of 3) ........................................................................................ 764
Remove the top door (1 of 3) .................................................................................................... 765
Remove the top door (2 of 3) .................................................................................................... 765
Remove the top door (3 of 3) .................................................................................................... 766
Remove the grate-shaped upper guide .................................................................................... 767
Move output bins (1 of 3) .......................................................................................................... 768
Move output bins (2 of 3) .......................................................................................................... 768
Move output bins (3 of 3) .......................................................................................................... 769
Remove grate-shaped lower guide ........................................................................................... 770
Remove the PCA cover ............................................................................................................ 771
Remove stapler (1 of 3) ............................................................................................................ 772
Remove stapler (2 of 3) ............................................................................................................ 773
Remove stapler (3 of 3) ............................................................................................................ 773
Remove stapler assembly (1 of 5) ............................................................................................ 774
Remove stapler assembly (2 of 5) ............................................................................................ 774
Remove stapler assembly (3 of 5) ............................................................................................ 775
Remove stapler assembly (4 of 5) ............................................................................................ 775
Remove stapler assembly (5 of 5) ............................................................................................ 776
Remove the swing unit (1 of 6) ................................................................................................. 777
Remove the swing unit (2 of 6) ................................................................................................. 778
Remove the swing unit (3 of 6) ................................................................................................. 778
Remove the swing unit (4 of 6) ................................................................................................. 779
Remove the swing unit (5 of 6) ................................................................................................. 779
Remove the swing unit (6 of 6) ................................................................................................. 780
Remove the upper crossmember unit (1 of 5) .......................................................................... 781
Remove the upper crossmember unit (2 of 5) .......................................................................... 782
Remove the upper crossmember unit (3 of 5) .......................................................................... 782
Remove the upper crossmember unit (4 of 5) .......................................................................... 783
Remove the upper crossmember unit (5 of 5) .......................................................................... 783
Remove the saddle unit (1 of 7) ................................................................................................ 784
Remove the saddle unit (2 of 7) ................................................................................................ 785

xxxix

Figure 8-179
Figure 8-180
Figure 8-181
Figure 8-182
Figure 8-183
Figure 8-184
Figure 8-185
Figure 8-186
Figure 8-187
Figure 8-188
Figure 8-189
Figure 8-190
Figure 8-191
Figure 8-192
Figure 8-193
Figure 8-194
Figure 8-195
Figure 8-196
Figure 8-197
Figure 8-198
Figure 8-199
Figure 8-200
Figure 8-201
Figure 8-202
Figure 8-203
Figure 8-204
Figure 8-205
Figure 8-206
Figure 8-207
Figure 8-208
Figure 8-209
Figure 8-210
Figure 8-211
Figure 8-212
Figure 8-213
Figure 8-214
Figure 8-215
Figure 8-216
Figure 8-217
Figure 8-218
Figure 8-219
Figure 8-220
Figure 8-221
Figure 8-222

Remove the saddle unit (3 of 7) ................................................................................................ 785
Remove the saddle unit (4 of 7) ................................................................................................ 786
Remove the saddle unit (5 of 7) ................................................................................................ 786
Remove the saddle unit (6 of 7) ................................................................................................ 787
Remove the saddle unit (7 of 7) ................................................................................................ 787
Remove the saddle-stapler assembly ...................................................................................... 788
Remove the positioning plate unit (1 of 5) ................................................................................ 789
Remove the positioning plate unit (2 of 5) ................................................................................ 790
Remove the positioning plate unit (3 of 5) ................................................................................ 790
Remove the positioning plate unit (4 of 5) ................................................................................ 791
Remove the positioning plate unit (5 of 5) ................................................................................ 791
Remove the operation-tray assembly (1 of 6) ........................................................................... 793
Remove the operation-tray assembly (2 of 6) ........................................................................... 793
Remove the operation-tray assembly (3 of 6) ........................................................................... 794
Remove the operation-tray assembly (4 of 6) ........................................................................... 794
Remove the operation-tray assembly (5 of 6) ........................................................................... 795
Remove the operation-tray assembly (6 of 6) ........................................................................... 796
Correct position of sheet .......................................................................................................... 796
Remove output-bin 1 (1 of 3) .................................................................................................... 797
Remove output-bin 1 (2 of 3) .................................................................................................... 798
Remove output-bin 1 (3 of 3) .................................................................................................... 798
Remove output-bin 2 (1 of 3) .................................................................................................... 799
Remove output-bin 2 (2 of 3) .................................................................................................... 800
Remove output-bin 2 (3 of 3) .................................................................................................... 800
Remove the upper output bin ................................................................................................... 801
Remove buffer rollers ................................................................................................................ 802
Remove booklet-delivery output bin (1 of 2) ............................................................................. 803
Remove booklet-delivery output bin (2 of 2) ............................................................................. 803
Remove the saddle-delivery output bin (1 of 3) ........................................................................ 804
Remove the saddle delivery output bin (2 of 3) ........................................................................ 804
Remove the saddle delivery output bin (3 of 3) ........................................................................ 805
Remove the return roller unit (1 of 2) ........................................................................................ 806
Remove the return roller unit (2 of 2) ........................................................................................ 806
Remove the pressure roller unit (1 of 8) ................................................................................... 807
Remove the pressure roller unit (2 of 8) ................................................................................... 808
Remove the pressure roller unit (3 of 8) ................................................................................... 808
Remove the pressure roller unit (4 of 8) ................................................................................... 809
Remove the pressure roller unit (5 of 8) ................................................................................... 809
Remove the pressure roller unit (6 of 8) ................................................................................... 810
Remove the pressure roller unit (7 of 8) ................................................................................... 810
Remove the pressure roller unit (8 of 8) ................................................................................... 811
Remove the entrance upper guide unit (1 of 3) ........................................................................ 812
Remove the entrance upper guide unit (2 of 3) ........................................................................ 813
Remove the entrance upper guide unit (3 of 3) ........................................................................ 813

ENWW

Figure 8-223
Figure 8-224
Figure 8-225
Figure 8-226
Figure 8-227
Figure 8-228
Figure 8-229
Figure 8-230
Figure 8-231
Figure 8-232
Figure 8-233
Figure 8-234
Figure 8-235
Figure 8-236
Figure 8-237
Figure 8-238
Figure 8-239
Figure 8-240
Figure 8-241
Figure 8-242
Figure 8-243
Figure 8-244
Figure 8-245
Figure 8-246
Figure 8-247
Figure 8-248
Figure 8-249
Figure 8-250
Figure 8-251
Figure 8-252
Figure 8-253
Figure 8-254
Figure 8-255
Figure 8-256
Figure 8-257
Figure 8-258
Figure 8-259
Figure 8-260
Figure 8-261
Figure 8-262
Figure 8-263
Figure 8-264
Figure 8-265
Figure 8-266

ENWW

Remove the upper-delivery guide ............................................................................................. 814
Remove the inlet feed unit (1 of 4) ............................................................................................ 815
Remove the inlet feed unit (2 of 4) ............................................................................................ 816
Remove the inlet feed unit (3 of 4) ............................................................................................ 816
Remove the inlet feed unit (4 of 4) ............................................................................................ 817
Remove the inlet feed unit (1 of 4) ............................................................................................ 818
Remove the inlet feed unit (2 of 4) ............................................................................................ 819
Remove the inlet feed unit (3 of 4) ............................................................................................ 819
Remove the inlet feed unit (4 of 4) ............................................................................................ 820
Remove the paper-folding roller (1 of 9) ................................................................................... 821
Remove the paper-folding roller (2 of 9) ................................................................................... 822
Remove the paper-folding roller (3 of 9) ................................................................................... 822
Remove the paper-folding roller (4 of 9) ................................................................................... 823
Remove the paper-folding roller (5 of 9) ................................................................................... 823
Remove the paper-folding roller (6 of 9) ................................................................................... 824
Remove the paper-folding roller (7 of 9) ................................................................................... 824
Remove the paper-folding roller (8 of 9) ................................................................................... 825
Remove the paper-folding roller (9 of 9) ................................................................................... 825
Remove the stacker controller PCA .......................................................................................... 826
Remove the saddle-stitcher controller PCA .............................................................................. 827
LEDs on the output accessories ............................................................................................... 830
Stapler/stacker cross-sectional view ......................................................................................... 832
Booklet maker cross-sectional view highlighting the stapling/stacking paper path ................... 833
Booklet maker cross-sectional view highlighting the booklet-making paper path ..................... 834
Sensors (stapler/stacker) .......................................................................................................... 835
Sensors (booklet maker) ........................................................................................................... 837
Microswitches (stapler/stacker) ................................................................................................. 839
Microswitches (booklet maker) ................................................................................................. 840
Solenoids (stapler/stacker) ....................................................................................................... 841
Solenoids (booklet maker) ........................................................................................................ 842
Motors (stapler/stacker) ............................................................................................................ 843
Motors (booklet maker) ............................................................................................................. 844
Clutches (stapler/stacker) ......................................................................................................... 845
PCA (stapler/stacker) ................................................................................................................ 846
Stacker controller PCA .............................................................................................................. 847
PCA (booklet maker) ................................................................................................................. 847
Saddle-stitcher controller PCA .................................................................................................. 849
Stacker controller PCA switches ............................................................................................... 850
Saddle-stitcher controller PCA switches ................................................................................... 850
Stapler/stacker stacker controller PCA circuit diagram (1 of 2) ................................................ 852
Stacker controller PCA circuit diagram (2 of 2) ......................................................................... 852
Saddle-stitcher controller PCA circuit diagram (1 of 2) ............................................................. 854
Saddle-stitcher controller PCA circuit diagram (2 of 2) ............................................................. 854
Saddle-stitcher controller PCA circuit diagram ......................................................................... 855

xli

Figure 8-267 SW4 settings ............................................................................................................................. 857
Figure 8-268 SW4 settings ............................................................................................................................. 858
Figure 8-269 SW504 settings ......................................................................................................................... 859
Figure 8-270 Mark the paper .......................................................................................................................... 859
Figure 8-271 Folding position adjustment (1 of 2) .......................................................................................... 860
Figure 8-272 Folding position adjustment (2 of 2) .......................................................................................... 860
Figure 8-273 Positive and negative width adjustment .................................................................................... 861
Figure 8-274 Adjust the stitcher (1 of 6) ......................................................................................................... 862
Figure 8-275 Adjust the stitcher (1 of 6) ......................................................................................................... 862
Figure 8-276 Adjust the stitcher (2 of 6) ......................................................................................................... 863
Figure 8-277 Adjust the stitcher (3 of 6) ......................................................................................................... 863
Figure 8-278 Adjust the stitcher (5 of 6) ......................................................................................................... 863
Figure 8-279 Adjust the stitcher (6 of 6) ......................................................................................................... 864
Figure 9-1 Printer external covers and panels ............................................................................................... 872
Figure 9-2 Printer front-door assembly ........................................................................................................... 874
Figure 9-3 Printer right-door assembly ........................................................................................................... 876
Figure 9-4 Printer internal components (1 of 7) ............................................................................................. 878
Figure 9-5 Printer internal components (2 of 7) ............................................................................................. 880
Figure 9-6 Printer internal components (3 of 7) ............................................................................................. 882
Figure 9-7 Printer internal components (4 of 7) ............................................................................................. 884
Figure 9-8 Printer internal components (5 of 7) ............................................................................................. 888
Figure 9-9 Printer internal components (6 of 7) ............................................................................................. 890
Figure 9-10 Printer internal components (7 of 7) ........................................................................................... 892
Figure 9-11 Printer multi-purpose-drive assembly ......................................................................................... 894
Figure 9-12 Printer lifter-drive assembly ........................................................................................................ 896
Figure 9-13 Printer cassette ........................................................................................................................... 898
Figure 9-14 Printer cassette paper-pickup assembly ..................................................................................... 900
Figure 9-15 Printer multi-purpose paper-pickup assembly ............................................................................ 902
Figure 9-16 Printer multi-purpose-tray assembly ........................................................................................... 904
Figure 9-17 Printer multi-purpose-guide assembly ........................................................................................ 906
Figure 9-18 Printer face-down paper-delivery assembly ................................................................................ 908
Figure 9-19 Printer duplexing-reverse assembly ............................................................................................ 910
Figure 9-20 Printer duplexing-feed assembly ................................................................................................ 912
Figure 9-21 Printer PCA assembly location ................................................................................................... 914
Figure 9-22 Input-tray units (1x500-sheet and 3x500-sheet) ......................................................................... 916
Figure 9-23 Input-tray main body (1x500-sheet) ............................................................................................ 918
Figure 9-24 Input-tray main body (3x500-sheet) ............................................................................................ 922
Figure 9-25 Input-tray auto-close assembly ................................................................................................... 926
Figure 9-26 Input-tray cassette ...................................................................................................................... 928
Figure 9-27 Input-tray paper-pickup assembly ............................................................................................... 930
Figure 9-28 Input-tray PCA assembly ............................................................................................................ 932
Figure 9-29 Intermediate-feed main body ...................................................................................................... 934
Figure 9-30 Intermediate-feed lower-guide assembly .................................................................................... 936
Figure 9-31 Intermediate-feed upper-guide assembly ................................................................................... 938

xlii

ENWW

Figure 9-32
Figure 9-33
Figure 9-34
Figure 9-35
Figure 9-36
Figure 9-37
Figure 9-38
Figure 9-39
Figure 9-40
Figure 9-41
Figure 9-42
Figure 9-43
Figure 9-44
Figure 9-45
Figure 9-46
Figure 9-47
Figure 9-48
Figure 9-49
Figure 9-50
Figure 9-51
Figure 9-52
Figure 9-53
Figure 9-54
Figure 9-55
Figure 9-56
Figure 9-57
Figure 9-58
Figure 9-59
Figure 9-60
Figure 9-61
Figure 9-62
Figure 9-63
Figure 9-64
Figure 9-65
Figure 9-66
Figure 9-67
Figure 9-68
Figure 9-69
Figure 9-70
Figure 9-71
Figure 9-72
Figure 9-73
Figure 9-74
Figure 9-75

ENWW

Left-assist assembly ................................................................................................................... 940
Right-assist assembly ................................................................................................................. 942
PCA assembly ............................................................................................................................ 944
Stapler/stacker unit ..................................................................................................................... 945
Booklet-maker unit ...................................................................................................................... 948
External panels and covers (stapler/stacker) .............................................................................. 950
External panels and covers (booklet-maker) .............................................................................. 952
Finisher (1 of 5) (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ................................................................. 954
Finisher (2 of 5) (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ................................................................. 954
Finisher (3 of 5) (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ................................................................. 955
Finisher (4 of 5) (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ................................................................. 957
Finisher (5 of 5) (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ................................................................. 958
Output bin 1 (stack upper-tray assembly) (1 of 2) (stapler/stacker) ............................................ 961
Output bin 1 (stack upper-tray assembly) (2 of 2) (stapler/stacker) ............................................ 962
Output bin 1 (stack upper-tray assembly) (1 of 2) (booklet-maker) ............................................ 964
Output bin 1 (stack upper-tray assembly) (2 of 2) (booklet-maker ) ........................................... 966
Output bin 2 (stack lower-tray assembly) (1 of 2) (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ............. 968
Output bin 2 (stack lower-tray assembly) (2 of 2) (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ............. 970
Top output bin (stack sub-tray assembly) (stapler/stacker) ........................................................ 972
Operation-tray assembly (1 of 2) (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ....................................... 973
Operation-tray assembly (2 of 2) (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ....................................... 974
Paper-feeder motor assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ........................................... 976
Return-roller assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ...................................................... 978
Pressure-roller assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) .................................................. 980
Swing-guide assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ...................................................... 982
Entrance upper-guide assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ....................................... 984
Staple assembly (stapler/stacker and booklet-maker) ................................................................ 986
Saddle assembly (1 of 4) (booklet-maker) .................................................................................. 988
Saddle assembly (2 of 4) (booklet-maker) .................................................................................. 988
Saddle assembly (3 of 4) (booklet-maker) .................................................................................. 989
Saddle assembly (4 of 4) (booklet-maker) .................................................................................. 992
Saddle-tray assembly (booklet-maker) ....................................................................................... 996
Saddle-guide assembly (booklet-maker) .................................................................................... 998
Saddle-stapler assembly (booklet-maker) ................................................................................ 1000
Saddle paper-feeder assembly (stapler/stacker) ...................................................................... 1002
Saddle paper-feeder assembly (booklet-maker) ....................................................................... 1004
Pass lower-guide assembly (booklet-maker) ............................................................................ 1006
Inner side-plate assembly (booklet-maker) ............................................................................... 1008
Saddle paper-delivery assembly (booklet-maker) .................................................................... 1010
Motor-mount assembly (booklet-maker) ................................................................................... 1012
PCA assembly .......................................................................................................................... 1014
ADF unit .................................................................................................................................... 1016
Front-end cover ......................................................................................................................... 1018
Hinge assembly ........................................................................................................................ 1020

xliii

Figure 9-76
Figure 9-77
Figure 9-78
Figure 9-79
Figure 9-80
Figure 9-81
Figure 9-82
Figure 9-83
Figure 9-84
Figure 9-85
Figure 9-86
Figure 9-87
Figure 9-88
Figure 9-89
Figure 9-90
Figure 9-91
Figure 9-92
Figure 9-93
Figure 9-94
Figure 9-95
Figure 9-96
Figure 9-97
Figure 9-98
Figure 9-99
Figure 9-100

xliv

Base assembly .......................................................................................................................... 1021
Backbone assembly .................................................................................................................. 1022
Jam-cover assembly ................................................................................................................. 1024
Pickup-roller assembly .............................................................................................................. 1026
Separation-pad assembly ......................................................................................................... 1028
Separation-floor assembly ........................................................................................................ 1030
Scanner unit .............................................................................................................................. 1032
Carriage assembly .................................................................................................................... 1034
Scanner controller-board (SCB) assembly ............................................................................... 1036
Large-pin assembly ................................................................................................................... 1038
Small-pin assembly ................................................................................................................... 1040
Inverter assembly ...................................................................................................................... 1042
Glass assembly ......................................................................................................................... 1044
Lid-sensor assembly ................................................................................................................. 1046
Motor assembly ......................................................................................................................... 1048
Pulley assembly ........................................................................................................................ 1050
Power-supply assembly ............................................................................................................ 1052
Main-frame assembly ................................................................................................................ 1054
Support-frame assembly ........................................................................................................... 1055
Plastic-parts assembly (1 of 2) .................................................................................................. 1056
Plastic-parts assembly (2 of 2) .................................................................................................. 1058
Scanner controller board (SCB)-cage assembly ...................................................................... 1059
Transmission assembly ............................................................................................................ 1060
Fan-system assembly ............................................................................................................... 1062
Havic assembly ....................................................................................................................... 1064

ENWW

Product basics

●

Product comparison

●

Product features

●

Product walkaround

●

Supported operating systems

Product comparison
Table 1-1 Product models
Model

Features

HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP

●

100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1)

●

40 pages per minute (ppm)

●

Two 500-sheet input trays

●

Automatic document feeder (ADF) that holds up to
50 pages

●

HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a
10/100Base-TX network

●

512 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)

●

Duplexer

●

Hard drive

●

100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1)

●

40 ppm

●

Four 500-sheet input trays

●

Automatic document feeder (ADF) that holds up to
50 pages

●

HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a
10/100Base-TX network

●

512 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)

●

Duplexer

●

Hard drive

●

Analog fax

●

100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1)

●

30 ppm

●

Two 500-sheet input trays

●

Automatic document feeder (ADF) that holds up to
50 pages

●

HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a
10/100Base-TX network

●

512 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)

●

Duplexer

●

Hard drive

●

100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1)

●

30 ppm

●

Four 500-sheet input trays

HP Color LaserJet CM6040f MFP

HP Color LaserJet CM6030 MFP

HP Color LaserJet CM6030f MFP

Chapter 1 Product basics

ENWW

Table 1-1 Product models (continued)
Model

ENWW

Features
●

Automatic document feeder (ADF) that holds up to
50 pages

●

HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a
10/100Base-TX network

●

512 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)

●

Duplexer

●

Hard drive

●

Analog fax

Product comparison

Product features
Table 1-2 Features
Speed and throughput

Resolution

Memory

User interface

Languages and fonts

Print cartridges/image
drums (4 of each)

Chapter 1 Product basics

●

Print up to 40 ppm (HP Color LaserJet CM6040) or 30 ppm (HP Color LaserJet CM6030)
on letter-size paper.

●

Less than 11 seconds to print the first page

●

Recommended maximum monthly print volume of 15,000 pages (HP Color LaserJet
CM6040) or 10,000 pages (HP Color LaserJet CM6030)

●

An 835 megahertz (MHz) microprocessor

●

Duplex at speed

●

600 dots per inch (dpi) with Image Resolution Enhancement technology 4800 for optimum
overall imaging

●

1200 x 600 dpi for detailed line work and small text

●

512 MB of random-access memory (RAM), expandable to 1 gigabyte (GB) by using 200pin small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128, 256, or 512 MB
of RAM.

●

Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) automatically compresses data to use RAM more
efficiently.

●

HP Easy Select Control Panel

●

An embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (for networkconnected products)

●

HP Easy Printer Care software (a Web-based status and troubleshooting tool)

●

Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities through HP Easy Printer Care software and
embedded Web server

●

HP Printer Control Language (PCL) 6

●

HP Universal Printer Driver (UPD) PCL 5

●

HP UPD postscript (PS)

●

Printer Management Language

●

80 scalable TrueType PS typefaces

●

Two-part toner/imaging system

●

Black print cartridges print up to 19,500 pages at 5% coverage

●

Color print cartridges print up to 21,000 pages at 5% coverage

●

Image drums print up to 35,000 pages at 5% coverage

●

Authentic HP print cartridge detection

●

Automatic toner strip remover

ENWW

Table 1-2 Features (continued)
Paper-handling

●

Input
◦

Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): A multipurpose tray for paper, transparencies, labels,
envelopes and other paper types. See Supported paper types on page 66 for a list
of paper types. The tray holds up to 100 sheets of paper, 50 transparencies, or
10 envelopes. See Supported paper and print media sizes on page 63.

◦

Tray 2, 3, 4, and 5: 500-sheet trays. These trays automatically detect common paper
sizes and allow printing on custom-size paper. Tray 2 supports up to 279 x 432 mm
(11 x 17 inches) and A3 paper sizes, and Trays 3,4, and 5 support sizes up to 305 x
457 mm (12 x 18 inches), and SRA3. See Supported paper and print media sizes
on page 63 for a list of supported paper sizes. For a list of supported paper types,
see Supported paper types on page 66.

◦

Automatic document feeder (ADF): Holds up to 50 sheets of paper.

◦

ADF duplex scanning: The ADF has an automatic duplexer for scanning two-sided
documents.

◦

Duplex printing: Provides automatic two-sided printing (printing on both sides of the
paper).
The paper size range for automatic duplex printing is 175 mm to 320 mm (6.9 to 12.6
inches) x 210 mm to 457 mm (8.3 to 18 inches). The media weight range is 60–220
g/m² (16-58 lb).

●

Supported operating
systems

Connectivity

ENWW

Output
◦

Standard output bin: The standard output bin is located underneath the scanner on
the top of the product. This bin can hold up to 500 sheets of paper. The product
provides a sensor that indicates when the bin is full.

◦

Optional 3-bin stapler/stacker: Provides job separation in multiple output bins,
convenient stapling (up to 50-sheet jobs), job offset capability, and additional output
capacity. The stacker has three bins: a 100-sheet bin, a 500-sheet bin, and a 1000sheet bin.

◦

Optional booklet maker finisher: Provides convenient stapling (up to 50-sheet jobs),
saddle-stitching (up to 15-sheet booklets), single-sheet v-folding, job separation and
offset capability, as well as additional output capacity. The booklet maker finisher has
three bins: two 1000-sheet bins and one bin that can hold up to 25 saddle-stitched
booklets.

◦

ADF output bin: The ADF output bin is underneath the ADF input tray. The bin holds
up to 50 sheets of paper, and the product automatically stops when this bin is full.

●

Windows 2000®

●

Windows XP®

●

Windows Server 2003®

●

Windows Vista™

●

Macintosh OS

●

Local area network (LAN) connector (RJ-45) for the embedded HP Jetdirect print server

●

One enhanced input/output (EIO) slot

●

USB 2.0 connection

●

Optional analog fax card

●

A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) connection (AUX) for connecting other devices

●

Optional HP Digital Sending Software (DSS)

Product features

Table 1-2 Features (continued)
Environmental features

Security features

Copying and sending

Chapter 1 Product basics

●

Sleep setting saves energy.

●

High content of recyclable components and materials.

●

Secure Disk Erase

●

Security lock (optional)

●

Job retention

●

User PIN authentication for stored jobs

●

DSS authentication

●

IPv6 security

●

Modes for text, graphics, and mixed text and graphics formats

●

Job-interrupt feature

●

Multiple pages per sheet

●

Control panel animations (for example, jam recovery)

●

Scan and send to e-mail
◦

Local address book for e-mail and fax

◦

LDAP addressing

●

Send to folder

●

Automatic duplex (two-sided) scanning

ENWW

Product walkaround
Front view
HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP Series

10
5
9

6
8

Control panel

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) top cover

ADF input tray for copy/scan/fax originals

ADF output bin

Right-door (provides access to the transfer unit, transfer roller, and fuser unit)

On/Off switch

Lower right door

HP Color LaserJet CM6030 MFP and HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP: Trays 2 and 3
HP Color LaserJet CM6030f MFP and HP Color LaserJet CM6040f MFP: Trays 2, 3, 4 and 5

ENWW

Front cover (provides access to print cartridges and image drums)

Output bin

Product walkaround

Back view

Interface ports and formatter

Lock lever for additional input bins

Chapter 1 Product basics

ENWW

Interface ports
The product has five ports for connecting to a computer or a network. The ports are at the left, rear
corner of the product.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1

Foreign interface harness (FIH)

Fax connection (when installed)

Scanner cable

Access port for Kensington lock

USB 2.0 port

EIO expansion slot

Network port

Serial number and model number location
The model number and serial number are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the printer.
The serial number contains information about the country/region of origin, the printer version, production
code, and the production number of the printer.

ENWW

Product walkaround

Model name

Model number

HP Color LaserJet CM6030 MFP

CE664A

HP Color LaserJet CM6030f MFP

CE665A

HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP

Q3938A

HP Color LaserJet CM6040f MFP

Q3939A

Chapter 1 Product basics

ENWW

Supported operating systems
The product supports the following operating systems:
●

Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit)

●

Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)

●

Windows 2000

●

Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)

●

Mac OS X V10.2.8, V10.3, V10.4, V10.5 and later

NOTE: For Mac OS X V10.4 and later, PPC and Intel Core Processor Macs are supported.

ENWW

Supported operating systems

Chapter 1 Product basics

ENWW

Control panel

●

Use the control panel

●

Navigate the Administration menu

●

Information menu

●

Default Job Options menu

●

Time/Scheduling menu

●

Management menu

●

Initial Setup menu

●

Device Behavior menu

●

Print Quality menu

●

Troubleshooting menu

●

Resets menu

●

Service menu

Use the control panel
The control panel has a VGA touchscreen that provides access to all device functions. Use the buttons
and numeric keypad to control jobs and the device status. The LEDs indicate overall device status.

Control-panel layout
The control panel includes a touchscreen graphical display, job-control buttons, a numeric keypad, and
three light-emitting diode (LED) status lights.

10
9

Touchscreen graphical display

Use the touchscreen to open and set up all device functions.

Numeric keypad

Allows you to type numeric values for number of copies required and other
numeric values.

Reset button

Resets the job settings to factory or user-defined default values.

Sleep button

If the device is inactive for a long period of time, it automatically enters a
sleep mode. To place the device into sleep mode or to reactivate the device,
press the Sleep button.

Stop button

Stops the active job and opens the Job Status screen.

Start button

Begins a copy job, starts digital sending, or continues a job that has been
interrupted.

Attention light

The Attention light indicates that the device has a condition that requires
intervention. Examples include an empty paper tray or an error message
on the touchscreen.

Ready light

The Ready light indicates that the device is ready to begin processing any
job.

Data light

The Data light indicates that the device is receiving data.

Contrast-adjustment dial

Turn the dial to adjust the contrast of the touchscreen display for your
viewing angle.

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Home screen
The home screen provides access to the device features, and it indicates the current status of the device.
NOTE: Depending on how the device has been configured, the features that appear on the home
screen can vary.

3 4

5
6

9
1

ENWW

Features

Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device, the features that appear
in this area can include any of the following items:
●

Copy

●

Fax

●

E-mail

●

Secondary E-mail

●

Job Status

●

Network Folder

●

Job Storage

●

Workflow

●

Supplies Status

●

Administration

Device status line

The status line provides information about the overall device status. Various buttons appear in
this area, depending on the current status. For a description of each button that can appear in
the status line, see Buttons on the touchscreen on page 16.

Copy type

Shows whether copies are color.

Copy count

The copy count box indicates the number of copies that the device is set to make.

Help button

Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.

Scroll bar

Touch the up or down arrows on the scroll bar to see the complete list of available features.

Sign Out

Touch Sign Out to sign out of the device if you have signed in for access to restricted features.
After you sign out, the device restores all options to the default settings.

Network Address

Touch Network Address to find information about the network connection.

Date and time

The current date and time appear here. The system administrator can select the format that
the device uses to show the date and time, for example 12-hour format or 24-hour format.

Use the control panel

Buttons on the touchscreen
The status line on the touchscreen provides information about the status of the device. Various buttons
can appear in this area. The following table describes each button.
Home button. Touch the home button to go to the Home screen from any other screen.

Start button. Touch the Start button to begin the action for the feature that you are using.
NOTE: The name of this button changes for each feature. For example, in the Copy feature, the button
is named Start Copy.
Stop button. If the device is processing a print or fax job, the Stop button appears instead of the Start
button. Touch the Stop button to halt the current job. The device prompts you to cancel the job or to resume
it.
Error button. The error button appears whenever the device has an error that requires attention before
it can continue. Touch the error button to see a message that describes the error. The message also has
instructions for solving the problem.
Warning button. The warning button appears when the device has a problem but can continue
functioning. Touch the warning button to see a message that describes the problem. The message also
has instructions for solving the problem.
Help button. Touch the help button to open the built-in online Help system. For more information, see
Control-panel help system on page 16.

Control-panel help system
The device has a built-in Help system that explains how to use each screen. To open the Help system,
touch the Help button
in the upper-right corner of the screen.
For some screens, the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specific topics. You can
browse through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu.
For screens that contain settings for individual jobs, the Help opens to a topic that explains the options
for that screen.
or warning
button to open a message
If the device alerts you of an error or warning, touch the error
that describes the problem. The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem.

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Navigate the Administration menu
From the Home screen, touch Administration to open the menu structure. You might need to scroll to
the bottom of the Home screen to see this feature.
The Administration menu has several sub-menus, which are listed on the left side of the screen. Touch
the name of a menu to expand the structure. A plus sign (+) next to a menu name means that it contains
sub-menus. Continue opening the structure until you reach the option that you want to configure. To
return to the previous level, touch Back.
To exit the Administration menu, touch the Home button

in the upper-left corner of the screen.

The device has built-in Help that explains each of the features that are available through the menus.
Help is available for many menus on the right-hand side of the touchscreen. Or, to open the global Help
system, touch the Help button
in the upper-right corner of the screen.
The tables in the sections that follow indicate the overall structure of each menu under the Administration
menu.

ENWW

Navigate the Administration menu

Information menu
Administration > Information
Use this menu to print information pages and reports that are stored internally on the device.
Table 2-1 Information menu
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Configuration/Status
Pages

Fax Reports

Values

Description

Administration Menu
Map

Shows the basic structure of the
Administration menu and current
administration settings.

Configuration/status
Pages

A set of configuration pages that show the
current device settings.

Supplies Status
Page

Shows the status of supplies such as
cartridges, maintenance kits, and staples.

Usage Page

Shows information about the number of
pages that have been printed on each paper
type and size.

Color Usage Job Log

A directory page that contains job-by-job
color usage information. Page content
includes the user name, application name,
and number of black-only pages and color
pages.

File Directory

A directory page that contains information for
any mass-storage devices, such as flash
drives, memory cards, or hard disks, that are
installed in this device.

Fax Activity Log

Contains a list of the faxes that have been
sent from or received by this device.

A detailed report of the last fax operation,
either sent or received.

Fax Call Report

Sub-menu item

Fax Call Report

Thumbnail on Report Yes

Choose whether or not to include a thumbnail
of the first page of the fax on the call report.

No (default)
When to Print Report Never auto print
Print after any fax job
Print after fax send jobs
Print after any fax error (default)
Print after send errors only
Print after receive errors only

Billing Codes Report

A list of billing codes that have been used for
outgoing faxes. This report shows how many
sent faxes were billed to each code.

Blocked Fax List

A list of phone numbers that are blocked from
sending faxes to this device.

Speed Dial List

Shows the speed dials that have been set up
for this device.

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Table 2-1 Information menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Sample Pages/Fonts

ENWW

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Demonstration Page

Printout of a page highlighting the print
capabilities of the product.

RGB Samples

Printout of color samples for different RGB
values. The samples act as a guide for color
matching.

CMYK Samples

Printout of color samples for different CMYK
values. The samples act as a guide for color
matching.

PCL Font List

A list of printer control language (PCL) fonts
that are currently available on the device.

PS Font List

A list of PostScript (PS) fonts that are
currently available on the device.

Information menu

Default Job Options menu
Administration > Default Job Options
Use this menu to define the default job options for each function. These are used if the user does not
specify other options when creating the job.

Default Options for Originals
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Options For Originals
Table 2-2 Default Options for Originals menu
Menu item

Values

Description

Paper Size

Select a paper size from the list.

Select the paper size that is most often used for copy or scan
originals.

Number of Sides

Select whether copy or scan originals are most often single-sided or
double-sided.

2
Orientation

Portrait
Landscape

Optimize Text/Picture

Manually Adjust
Text
Printed Picture

Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan
originals. Select Portrait if the short edge is at the top or select
Landscape if the long edge is at the top.
Optimize the output for a particular type of original: text, pictures, or
a mixture of both.
If you select Manually Adjust, specify the mix of text and pictures that
is used most often.

Photograph

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Image adjustment
Administration > Default Job Options > Image Adjustment
Table 2-3 Image Adjustment menu
Menu item

Values

Description

Darkness

Select a value.

Select the level of density (darkness) for the output.

Background Cleanup

Adjust the value within the range.

Increase the Background Removal setting to remove faint images
from the background or to remove a light background color.

Sharpness

Adjust the value within the range. Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image.

ENWW

Default Job Options menu

Default Copy Options
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Copy Options
Table 2-4 Default Copy Options menu
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Number of Copies

Type the number of
copies. The factory
default setting is 1.

Set the default number of copies for a copy job.

Number of Sides

Set the default number of sides for copies.

2
Color/Black

Auto detect

Choose whether the default copy mode is color or
black.

Color
Black (default)
Staple/Collate

Staple

None (default)

Set up options for stapling and collating sets of copies.

One left angled

If Collate is selected, the device prints a complete copy
before starting on the next copy. Otherwise, the device
prints the first page of all copies before printing the
second page, and so on.

Two left
Two top
One right angled
Two right
Collate

The staple and collate feature may not be present in
your product. These features depend on the optional
output accessory installed.

Off
On (default)

Output Bin

Select the default output bin for copies.
This option is available only if an optional output
accessory is installed.

Edge-To-Edge

Normal (recommended)
(default)
Edge-To-Edge Output

Auto Include Margins

Off (default)

If the original document is printed close to the edges,
use the Edge-To-Edge feature to avoid shadows along
the edges. Combine this feature with the Reduce/
Enlarge feature to ensure that the entire page appears
on the copies.
This feature automatically reduces the image size
during scanning so the margins are included.

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Default Fax Options
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Fax Options
Table 2-5 Fax Send menu
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Resolution

Values

Description

Standard (100x200dpi)
(default)

Set the resolution for sent documents. Higher
resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so
they show more detail. Lower resolution images have
fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the file
size is smaller.

Fine (200x200dpi)
Superfine (300x300dpi)
Fax Header

Prepend (default)

Select the position of the fax header on the page.

Overlay

Select Prepend to print the fax header above the fax
content and move the fax content down on the page.
Select Overlay to print the fax header over the top of
the fax contents without moving the contents down.
Using this option could prevent a single-page fax from
flowing onto another page.

Table 2-6 Fax Receive menu
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Fax Forwarding

Off (default)

To forward received faxes to another fax device, select
Fax Forwarding and Custom. Then type the number of
the other fax device into the Fax Forwarding Number
field. When you select this menu item for the first time,
you are prompted to set up a PIN. Type that PIN every
time you use this menu. This is the same PIN that is
used to access the Fax Printing menu.

Custom

Create PIN
Stamp Received Faxes

Enabled
Disabled (default)

Fit to Page

Enabled (default)
Disabled

Add the date, time, senders phone number, and page
number to each page of the faxes that this device
receives.
Shrink faxes that are larger than Letter-size or A4-size
so that they can fit onto a Letter-size or A4-size page.
If it this feature set to Disabled, faxes larger than Letter
or A4 will flow across multiple pages.

Fax Paper Tray

Select from the list of trays.
The default setting is
Automatic.

Select the tray that holds the size and type of paper
that you want to use for incoming faxes.

Output Bin

Select the default output bin, if applicable, to use for
faxes.

ENWW

Default Job Options menu

Default E-mail Options
Administration > Default Job Options > Default E-mail Options
Menu item

Values

Description

Document File Type

PDF (default)

Select the file format for the e-mail.

JPEG
TIFF
M-TIFF
Output Quality

High (large file)

Selecting higher quality for output increases the size of the
output file.

Medium (default)
Low (small file)
Resolution

300 DPI

Select the resolution. Use a lower setting to create smaller
files.

200 DPI
150 DPI (default)
75 DPI
Color/Black

Color scan (default)

Specify whether the e-mail will be in black or in color.

Black/white scan
TIFF Version

TIFF 6.0 (default)

Specify the TIFF version to use when saving scanned files.

TIFF (Post 6.0)

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Default Send to Folder Options
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Send To Folder Options
Menu item

Values

Description

Color/Black

Color scan

Specify whether the file will be in black or in color.

Black/white scan (default)
Document File Type

PDF (default)

Select the file format for the file.

M-TIFF
TIFF
JPEG
TIFF version

TIFF 6.0 (default)

Specify the TIFF version to use when saving scanned files.

TIFF (post 6.0)
Output Quality

High (large file)

Selecting higher quality for output increases the size of the
output file.

Medium (default)
Low (small file)
Resolution

75 DPI

Select the resolution. Use a lower setting to create smaller
files.

150 DPI (default)
200 DPI
300 DPI
400 DPI
600 DPI

ENWW

Default Job Options menu

Default Print Options
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Print Options
Table 2-7 Default Print Options menu
Menu item

Values

Description

Copies Per Job

Type a value.

Set the default number of copies for print jobs.

Default Paper Size

(List of supported sizes)

Select a paper size.

Millimeters

Configure the default paper size that is used when the
user selects Custom as the paper size for a print job.

Default Custom Paper
Size

Sub-menu item

Unit of measure

Inches
X Dimension

Configure the width measurement for the Default
Custom Paper Size.

Y Dimension

Configure the height measurement for the Default
Custom Paper Size.

Output Bin

Select the default output bin for print jobs. If optional
trays are installed, output bin options vary.

Print Sides

1-sided

Select whether print jobs are single-sided or doublesided by default.

2-sided

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Time/Scheduling menu
Administration > Time/Scheduling
Use this menu to set options for setting the time and for setting the device to enter and exit sleep mode.
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Table 2-8 Time/Scheduling menu
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Date/Time

Date Format

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

YYYY/MMM/DD
(default)

Use this feature to set the current date and
time, and to set the date format and time
format that are used to time-stamp outgoing
faxes.

MMM/DD/YYYY
DD/MMM/YYYY
Date

Month
Day
Year

Time Format

12 hour (AM/PM)
(default)
24 hour

Time

Hour
Minute
AM
PM

Sleep Delay

1 Minute
20 minutes

Use this feature to select the time interval that
the device should remain inactive before
entering Sleep Mode.

30 minutes (default)
45 minutes
1 hour (60 minutes)
90 minutes
2 hours
4 hours
Wake Time

Monday

Off (default)

Tuesday

Custom

Wednesday
Thursday

Select Custom to set a wake time for each
day of the week. The device exits sleep mode
according to this schedule. Using a sleep
schedule helps conserve energy and
prepares the device for use so that users do
not have to wait for it to warm up.

Friday
Saturday
Sunday

ENWW

Time/Scheduling menu

Table 2-8 Time/Scheduling menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Sleep Time

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Monday

Off (default)

Tuesday

Custom

Use this feature to set a sleep time for each
day of the week for periods when the device
will not likely be in use (for example, at a
certain time each evening). Setting a sleep
time makes the device automatically go into
a low-power mode. Select a day and then
select Custom to set up a custom sleep time
schedule.

Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
FAX Printing

Chapter 2 Control panel

Create PIN

If you have concerns about the security of
private faxes, use this feature to store faxes
rather than having them automatically print by
creating a printing schedule. When you select
this menu item for the first time, you are
prompted to set up a PIN. Type that PIN every
time you use this menu.

ENWW

Management menu
Administration > Management
Use this menu to set up global device-management options.
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.
Table 2-9 Management menu
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Network Address Button

Display

Values

Description
Use this feature to display the Network Address button
on the Home screen.

Hide (default)
Stored Job Management

Quick Copy Job Storage
Limit

Select the maximum
number of jobs to store

Quick Copy Job Held
Timeout

Off (default)

Use this menu to view and manage any jobs that are
stored on the device.

1 Hour
4 Hours
1 Day
1 Week
Sleep mode

Disable

Use this feature to customize the sleep mode settings
for this device.

Use Sleep Delay (default)
Select Use Sleep Delay to set the device to enter sleep
mode after the delay that is specified in the Time/
Scheduling menu.
Manage Supplies

Replace Supplies

Stop at low
Stop at out (default)
Override at out 1
Override at out 2

This menu sets the product behavior for when a print
cartridge, fuser kit, or transfer kit is low. Choose Stop
at low to stop printing when a supply reaches a low
condition. Choose Stop at out to allow the product to
continue printing until a color print cartridge is empty.
Choose Override at out 1 to allow the product to
continue printing when the cartridges are empty or
when the other supplies are worn out. The product
stops printing when the toner collection units are full.
Using this option could reduce print quality.
Choose Override at out 2 to allow the product to keep
printing when the cartridges are empty; when other
supplies are worn out; and when the waste toner
collection units are full. Using this option can damage
the device.

Supply Low/Order
Threshold

Select a value in the
range. The default is 5%.

Use this menu to carry out administrative supply
management tasks such as changing the threshold
when supplies should be ordered.

Color Supply Out

Stop (default)

This menu sets the product behavior when a color
supply is empty. When Auto-continue black is selected,
the product will continue printing using black toner only.

Auto-continue black

ENWW

Management menu

Table 2-9 Management menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Restrict Color Use

Color printing access

Enable Color (default)

This item allows the administrator to disable or restrict
color printing. To use the Color If Allowed setting, set
up user permissions and/or application permissions in
the embedded Web server, HP Easy Printer Care
software, or Web Jetadmin.

Color If Allowed
Disable Color
Color copying access

Enable Color (default)

This item allows the administrator to disable or restrict
color copying.

Disable Color
Color/Black Mix

Automatic (default)
Mostly color pages
Mostly black pages

This item controls how the engine switches from color
mode to monochrome mode for maximum
performance and print cartridge life.
Choose Automatic to reset the product to the factory
default setting.
Choose Mostly color pages if nearly all of your print
jobs are color with high page coverage.
Choose Mostly black pages if you print mostly
monochrome jobs or a combination of color and
monochrome jobs.

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Initial Setup menu
Administration > Initial Setup
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Networking and I/O
Administration > Initial Setup > Networking and I/O
Table 2-10 Networking and I/O
Menu item

Sub-menu item

I/O Timeout

Embedded Jetdirect

Values

Description

Select a value in the
range. The factory default
setting is 15 seconds.

I/O timeout refers to the elapsed time before a print job
fails. If the stream of data that the device receives for
a print job gets interrupted, this setting indicates how
long the device will wait before it reports that the job
has failed.

See Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus on page 31 for the list of options.

Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus
Menu item

Sub-menu item

TCP/IP

Enable

Sub-menu item

Values and Description
Off: Disable the TCP/IP protocol.
On (default): Enable the TCP/IP protocol.

Host Name

IPV4 Settings

An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to
identify the device. This name is listed on the
HP Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name
is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the
LAN hardware (MAC) address.
Config Method

Specifies the method that TCP/IPv4 parameters will be
configured on the HP Jetdirect print server.
Bootp: Use BootP (Bootstrap Protocol) for automatic
configuration from a BootP server.
DHCP: Use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) for automatic configuration from a DHCPv4
server. If selected and a DHCP lease exists, DHCP
Release and DHCP Renew menus are available to set
DHCP lease options.
Auto IP: Use automatic link-local IPv4 addressing. An
address in the form 169.254.x.x is assigned
automatically.
Manual: Use the Manual Settings menu to configure
TCP/IPv4 parameters.

Default IP

Specify the IP address to default to when the print
server is unable to obtain an IP address from the
network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for
example, when manually configured to use BootP or
DHCP).
Auto IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set.

ENWW

Initial Setup menu

Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values and Description
Legacy: The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent
with older HP Jetdirect devices.

DHCP Release

This menu appears if Config Method was set to
DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.
No (default): The current DHCP lease is saved.
Yes: The current DHCP lease and the leased IP
address are released.

DHCP Renew

This menu appears if Config Method was set to
DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.
No (default): The print server does not request to renew
the DHCP lease.
Yes: The print server requests to renew the current
DHCP lease.

IPV6 Settings

Primary DNS

Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary DNS
Server.

Secondary DNS

Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary
Domain Name System (DNS) Server.

Enable

Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the
print server.
Off: IPv6 is disabled.
On (default): IPv6 is enabled.

Address

Manual Settings: Use this item to manually set IPv6
addresses on the print server.
Enable: Select this item and choose On to enable
manual configuration, or Off to disable manual
configuration.
Address: Use this item to type a 32 hexadecimal digit
IPv6 node address that uses the colon hexadecimal
syntax.

DHCPV6 Policy

Router Specified: The stateful auto-configuration
method to be used by the print server is determined by
a router. The router specifies whether the print server
obtains its address, its configuration information, or
both from a DHCPv6 server.
Router Unavailable: If a router is not available, the print
server should attempt to obtain its stateful
configuration from a DHCPv6 server.
Always: Whether or not a router is available, the print
server always attempts to obtain its stateful
configuration from a DHCPv6 server.

Chapter 2 Control panel

Primary DNS

Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a primary
DNS server that the print server should use.

Secondary DNS

Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a
secondary DNS server that the print server should use.

ENWW

Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item
Proxy Server

Sub-menu item

Values and Description
Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded
applications in the device. A proxy server is typically
used by network clients for Internet access. It caches
Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security,
for those clients.
To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or
fully-qualified domain name. The name can be up to
255 octets.
For some networks, you may need to contact your
Independent Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy
server address.

IPX/SPX

Proxy Port

Type the port number used by the proxy server for
client support. The port number identifies the port
reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be
a value from 0 to 65535.

Enable

Off: Disable the IPX/SPX protocol.
On (default): Enable the IPX/SPX protocol.

Frame Type

Selects the frame-type setting for your network.
Auto: Automatically sets and limits the frame type to
the first one detected.
EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, and EN_SNAP: Frametype selections for Ethernet networks.

AppleTalk

Enable

Off: Disable the AppleTalk protocol.
On (default): Enable the AppleTalk protocol.

DLC/LLC

Enable

Off: Disable the DLC/LLC protocol.
On (default): Enable the DLC/LLC protocol.

ENWW

Initial Setup menu

Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Security

Print Sec Page

Sub-menu item

Values and Description
Yes (default): Prints a page that contains the current
security settings on the HP Jetdirect print server.
No: A security settings page is not printed.

Secure Web

For configuration management, specify whether the
embedded Web server will accept communications
using HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and
HTTPS.
HTTPS Required (default): For secure, encrypted
communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. The
print server will appear as a secure site.
HTTP/HTTPS optional: Access using either HTTP or
HTTPS is permitted.

IPSEC

Specify the Firewall status on the print server.
Keep: Firewall status remains the same as currently
configured.
Disable: Firewall operation on the print server is
disabled.

Reset Security

Specify whether the current security settings on the
print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults.
No: The current security settings are maintained.
Yes: Security settings are reset to factory defaults.

Diagnostics

Embedded Tests

This menu provides tests to help diagnose network
hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems.
Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault
is internal or external to the device. Use an embedded
test to check hardware and communication paths on
the print server. After you select and enable a test and
set the execution time, you must select Execute to
initiate the test.
Depending on the execution time, a selected test runs
continuously until either the device is turned off, or an
error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed.
LAN HW Test

CAUTION: Running this embedded test will erase
your TCP/IP configuration.
This test performs an internal loopback test. An internal
loopback test will send and receive packets only on the
internal network hardware. There are no external
transmissions on your network.
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.

HTTP Test

This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving
predefined pages from the device, and tests the
embedded Web server.
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.

SNMP Test

Chapter 2 Control panel

This test checks operation of SNMP communications
by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the device.

ENWW

Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values and Description
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.

Data Path Test

This test helps to identify data path and corruption
problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation device.
It sends a predefined PS file to the device, However,
the test is paperless; the file will not print.
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.

Select All Tests

Use this item to select all available embedded tests.
Select Yes to choose all tests. Select No to select
individual tests.

Execution Time [H]

Use this item to specify the length of time (in hours) that
an embedded test will be run. You can select a value
from 1 to 60 hours. If you select zero (0), the test runs
indefinitely until an error occurs or device is turned off.
Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and Data Path
tests is printed after the tests have completed.

Execute

No: Do not initiate the selected tests.
Yes: Initiate the selected tests.

Ping Test

ENWW

This test is used to check network communications.
This test sends link-level packets to a remote network
host, then waits for an appropriate response. To run a
ping test, set the following items:
Dest Type

Specify whether the target device is an IPv4 or IPv6
node.

Dest IPv4

Type the IPv4 address.

Dest IPv6

Type the IPv6 address.

Packet Size

Specify the size of each packet, in bytes, to be sent to
the remote host. The minimum is 64 (default) and the
maximum is 2048.

Timeout

Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a
response from the remote host. The default is 1 and
the maximum is 100.

Count

Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this
test. Select a value from 1 to 100. To configure the test
to run continuously, select 0.

Print Results

If the ping test was not set for continuous operation,
you can choose to print the test results. Select Yes to
print results. If you select No (default), results are not
printed.

Execute

Specify whether to initiate the ping test. Select Yes to
initiate the test, or No to not run the test.

Initial Setup menu

Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Ping Results

Link Speed

Values and Description
Use this item to view the ping test status and results
using the control panel display. You can select the
following items:

Packets Sent

Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) sent to the
remote host since the most recent test was initiated or
completed.

Packets Received

Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) received from
the remote host since the most recent test was initiated
or completed.

Percent Lost

Shows the percent of ping test packets that were sent
with no response from the remote host since the most
recent test was initiated or completed.

RTT Min

Shows the minimum detected roundtrip- time (RTT),
from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission
and response.

RTT Max

Shows the maximum detected roundtrip- time (RTT),
from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission
and response.

RTT Average

Shows the average round-trip-time (RTT), from 0 to
4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and
response.

Ping In Progress

Shows whether a ping test is in progress. Yes indicates
a test in progress, and No indicates that a test
completed or was not run.

Refresh

When viewing the ping test results, this item updates
the ping test data with current results. Select Yes to
update the data, or No to maintain the existing data.
However, a refresh automatically occurs when the
menu times out or you manually return to the main
menu.
The link speed and communication mode of the print
server must match the network. The available settings
depend on the device and installed print server. Select
one of the following link configuration settings:
CAUTION: If you change the link setting, network
communications with the print server and network
device might be lost.
Auto (default): The print server uses auto-negotiation
to configure itself with the highest link speed and
communication mode allowed. If auto-negotiation fails,
either 100TX HALF or 10TX HALF is set depending on
the detected link speed of the hub/switch port. (A
1000T half-duplex selection is not supported.)
10T Half: 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation.
10T Full: 10 Mbps, Full-duplex operation.
100TX Half: 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.
100TX Full: 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation.
100TX Auto: Limits auto-negotiation to a maximum link
speed of 100 Mbps.

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values and Description
1000TX Full: 1000 Mbps, full-duplex operation.

Print Protocols

ENWW

Use this item to print a page that lists the configuration
of the following protocols: IPX/SPX, Novell NetWare,
AppleTalk, DLC/LLC.

Initial Setup menu

Fax Setup
Administration > Initial Setup > Fax Setup
Table 2-12 Fax Setup menu
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Required Settings

Country/Region
Date/Time

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

(Countries/regions
listed)

Configure the settings that are legally
required for outgoing faxes.

Disabled

Use this feature to enable or disable PC Fax
Send. PC Fax Send enables users to send
faxes through the device from their
computers if they have the Send Fax driver
installed on their PC.

Date Format
Date
Time Format
Time

Fax Header
Information

Phone Number
Company Name

PC Fax Send

Enabled (default)

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Table 2-12 Fax Setup menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Fax Send Settings

Fax Dial Volume

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Off

Use this feature to set the volume of the tones
that you hear while the device dials the fax
number.

Low (default)
High
Error Correction
Mode

Enabled (default)
Disabled

JBIG Compression

Enabled (default)
Disabled

When Error Correction Mode is enabled and
an error occurs during fax transmission, the
device sends or receives the error portion
again.
JBIG compression reduces fax-transmission
time, which can result in lower phone
charges. However, using JBIG compression
sometimes causes compatibility problems
with older fax machines. If this occurs, turn off
JBIG compression.

Maximum Baud Rate

Select a value from
the list. The default is
33.6K.

Use this feature to set the maximum baud
rate for receiving faxes. This can be used as
a diagnostic tool for troubleshooting fax
problems.

TCF T.30 Delay
Timer

Default (default)

This setting should be left at the default value
and only changed when directed by an HP
technical support agent. Adjustment
procedures associated with this setting are
beyond the scope of this guide.

Custom

TCF Extend

Default (default)
Custom

Dialing Mode

Tone (default)

Pulse
Redial On Busy

The range is between Type the number of times the device should
0 and 9. The factory attempt to redial if the line is busy.
default is 3 times.

Redial On No Answer

Never (default)
Once
Twice

ENWW

Use this feature to specify the number of
times the device should attempt to dial if the
recipient fax number does not answer.
NOTE: Twice is available in locations other
than the United States and Canada.

Initial Setup menu

Table 2-12 Fax Setup menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Redial Interval

The range is between
1 and 5 minutes. The
factory default is 5
minutes.

Use this feature to specify the number of
minutes between dialing attempts if the
recipient number is busy or not answering.

Detect Dial Tone

Enabled

Use this feature to specify whether the device
should check for a dial tone before sending a
fax.

Disabled (default)
Dialing Prefix

Off (default)
Custom

Billing Codes

Off (default)
Custom

Use this feature to specify a prefix number
that must be dialed when sending faxes from
the device.
When billing codes are enabled, a prompt
appears that asks the user to enter the billing
code for an outgoing fax.
The range is between 1 and 16 digits. The
default is 1 digit.

Fax Receive Settings

Rings To Answer

The range varies by
location. The factory
default is 2 rings.

Use this feature to specify the number of rings
that must occur before the fax modem
answers.

Ring Interval

Default (default)

This setting is used to adjust for some PBX
ring signals. Change this setting only when
directed by an HP technical support agent.

Custom
Ring Frequency

Default (default)

Ringer Volume

Custom

Off

Set the volume for the fax ring-tone.

Low (default)
High
Blocked Fax
Numbers

Add Blocked
Numbers

Type the fax number
to add.

Remove Blocked
Numbers

Select a fax number
to remove.

Clear All Blocked
Numbers

No (default)

Use this feature to add or delete numbers
from the blocked fax list. The blocked fax list
can contain up to 30 numbers. When the
device receives a call from one of the blocked
fax numbers, it deletes the incoming fax. It
also logs the blocked fax in the activity log
along with job-accounting information.

Yes

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

E-mail Setup
Administration > Initial Setup > E-mail Setup
Use this menu to enable the e-mail feature and to configure basic e-mail settings.
NOTE: To configure advanced e-mail settings, use the embedded Web server. For more information,
see Embedded Web server on page 95.
Table 2-13 E-mail Setup menu
Menu item

Values

Description

Address Validation

On (default)

This option enables the device to check e-mail syntax when you type
an e-mail address. Valid e-mail addresses require the "@" sign and
a ".".

Off
Find Send Gateways
SMTP Gateway

Search the network for SMTP gateways that the device can use to
send e-mail.
Enter a value.

Test Send Gateway

Specify the IP address of the SMTP gateway that is used to send email from the device.
Test the configured SMTP gateway to see if it is functional.

Send Setup menu
Administration > Initial Setup > Send Setup
Table 2-14 Send Setup menu
Menu item

Values

Description

Fax Number Confirmation

Disable (default)

When fax number confirmation is enabled, you are prompted to enter
the fax number twice to verify that it has been typed correctly.

Enable

ENWW

Initial Setup menu

Device Behavior menu
Administration > Device Behavior
Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Language

Select the language
from the list.

Select a different language for control-panel
messages. When you select a new language,
the keyboard layout might also change.

Key Press Sound

On (default)

Use this feature to specify whether you hear
a sound when you touch the screen or press
buttons on the control panel.

Off
Inactivity Timeout

Warning/Error
Behavior

Clearable Warnings

Type a value
between 10 and 300
seconds. The factory
default is 60
seconds.

Specify the amount of time that elapses
between any activity on the control panel and
the device resetting to the default settings.

Set the amount of time that a clearable
warning appears on the control panel.

Job (default)
Continuable Events

Auto continue (10
seconds) (default)

Configure the device behavior when the
device encounters certain errors.

Touch OK to
continue
Jam Recovery

Auto (default)

Configure how the device handles pages that
are lost during a jam.

Off
On

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Tray Behavior

Use Requested Tray

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Exclusively (default)

Control how the device handles jobs that
have specified a specific input tray.

First
Manually Feed
Prompt

Always (default)
Unless Loaded

PS Defer Media

Enabled (default)

Specify how a prompt should appear when
the type or size for a job does not match the
specified tray and the device pulls from the
multipurpose tray instead.
Select either the PostScript (PS) or HP
paper-handling model.

Disabled
Use Another Tray

Enabled (default)
Disabled

Size/Type Prompt

Display (default)
Do not display

Duplex Blank Pages

Auto (default)

Turn on or off the control-panel prompt to
select another tray when the specified tray is
empty.
Control whether the tray configuration
message appears whenever a tray is opened
or closed.
Control how the device handles two-sided
jobs (duplexing).

Yes
Image Rotation

Left to Right
Right to Left
Alternate

Image rotation allows users to put paper in
the input tray using the same orientation
regardless of whether there is a finisher
installed.
NOTE: The image rotation set in this menu
will be applied any time a job does not
request stapling or when the requested
stapling could not be applied because of
unsupported media or when the stapler is
unavailable.
Select Left to Right to rotate the image as if it
were going to be bound on the left. This
setting is appropriate for print jobs where
reading from left to right is the cultural norm.
This is the default setting.
Select Right to Left to rotate the image as if it
were going to be bound on the right. This
setting is usually appropriate for print jobs
where reading from right to left is the cultural
norm.
Select Alternate to use a different loading
orientation that might work better with
preprinted forms that are used on legacy
products.

Multifunc Finisher

Operation Mode

Mailbox

Stacker

MBM-3 Bin Stapler

Function Separator

ENWW

This menu appears when the HP 3-bin
Stapler/Stacker Accessory or the HP Booklet
Maker/Finisher Accessory is attached.
Allows you to set the default operation mode.
Mailbox assigns a user or group of users to
each output bin. Stacker treats all of the
output bins as a single large bin. When one
bin gets full, jobs are automatically routed to
the next bin. Function Separator specifies a

Device Behavior menu

Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description
default bin for specific types of jobs such as
faxes or copies (stapler/stacker only).

Staples

None
One Left Angled

Sets the default staple selection for
documents sent to the device when no staple
value is specified.

One Right Angled
Two Left
Two Right
Two Top
Staples Out

Stop
Continue

Offset

Off
On

A4/Letter Staple

Normal
Alternate 1
Alternate 2

Sets the default behavior when a job
specifies stapling and the stapler is out of
staples. Stop stops printing if the stapler runs
out of staples. Continue allows a job to
continue printing even when the device is out
of staples.
Turns the job offset feature on or off. When
job offset is on, each copy of a job is shifted
to one side in the output bin in order to keep
each copy separate from the others.
Controls the speed of the print engine to
prevent paper jams by using the stapler
buffer.
NOTE: The stapler buffer may or may not
be used depending on the selected media
type or on the sensed media type, if
Autosense Mode is enabled.
If the Normal setting is enabled, the engine
speed will be normal by using the stapler
buffer whenever possible.
If the Alternate 1 setting is enabled, and the
engine is in Autosense Mode, the engine
slows down to prevent jams. If the product is
NOT in Autosense Mode, the engine
performs at normal speed, using the stapler
buffer whenever possible.
If the Alternate 2 setting is enabled, the
engine always slows down to prevent jams,
never using the stapler buffer.

Fold LTR-R & A4 - R

–4.0 mm

Adjusts the fold line for Letter and A4 size
paper (booklet maker only).

–3.5 mm
–3.0 mm
–2.5 mm
–2.0 mm
–1.5 mm
–1.0 mm

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

–0.5 mm
0.0 mm
0.5 mm
1.0 mm
1.5 mm
2.0 mm
2.5 mm
3.0 mm
3.5 mm
4.0 mm
Fold Legal & JISB4

–4.0 mm

Adjusts the fold line for Legal and JIS B4 size
paper (booklet maker only).

–3.5 mm
–3.0 mm
–2.5 mm
–2.0 mm
–1.5 mm
–1.0 mm
–0.5 mm
0.0 mm
0.5 mm
1.0 mm
1.5 mm
2.0 mm
2.5 mm
3.0 mm
3.5 mm
4.0 mm
Fold 11X17 & A3

–4.0 mm

Adjusts the fold line for Legal and 11x17 and
A3 size paper (booklet maker only).

–3.5 mm
–3.0 mm
–2.5 mm
–2.0 mm
–1.5 mm

ENWW

Device Behavior menu

Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

–1.0 mm
–0.5 mm
0.0 mm
0.5 mm
1.0 mm
1.5 mm
2.0 mm
2.5 mm
3.0 mm
3.5 mm
4.0 mm
General Copy
Behavior

Scan Ahead

Enabled (default)
Disabled

Auto Print Interrupt

Enabled
Disabled (default)

Turn on no-wait scanning. With Scan Ahead
enabled, the pages in the original document
are scanned to disk and held until the device
becomes available.
When this feature is enabled, copy jobs can
interrupt print jobs that are set to print multiple
copies.
The copy job is inserted into the print queue
at the end of one copy of the print job. After
the copy job is complete, the device
continues printing the remaining copies of the
print job.

Copy Interrupt

Enabled
Disabled (default)

Alternative
Letterhead Mode

Off (default)
On

Chapter 2 Control panel

When this feature is enabled, a copy job that
is currently printing can be interrupted when
a new copy job is started. You are prompted
to confirm that you want to interrupt the
current job.
This option allows loading of letterhead or
preprinted paper the same way for all copy
jobs, whether copying to one side of the
paper or to both sides of the paper.

ENWW

Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

General Printing
Behavior

Override A4/Letter

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

When this feature is enabled, the job prints
on letter-size paper when an A4 job is sent
but no A4-size paper is loaded in the device
(or prints on A4 paper when a letter-size job
is sent but no letter-size paper is loaded).
This option also overrides A3 with ledger-size
paper and ledger with A3-size paper.

Yes (default)

Manual Feed

Enabled
Disabled (default)

Courier Font

Regular (default)

When this feature is enabled, the user can
select manual feed from the control panel as
the paper source for a job.
Select which version of the Courier font you
want to use.

Dark
Wide A4

Enabled
Disabled (default)

Print PS Errors

Enabled
Disabled (default)

Print PDF Errors

Enabled

Change the printable area of A4-size paper.
If you enable this option, eighty 10-pitch
characters can be printed on a single line of
A4 paper.
Select whether a PostScript (PS) error page
is printed when the device encounters a PS
error.
Select whether a PDF error page is printed
when the device encounters a PDF error.

Disabled (default)
Personality

Auto (default)

Select the printer language that the device
should use.

PCL
PDF
PS

ENWW

Normally, you should not change the
language. If you change the setting to a
specific language, the device does not
automatically switch from one language to
another unless specific software commands
are sent to the device.

Device Behavior menu

Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

PCL

Form Length

Type a value
between 5 and 128
lines. The factory
default is 60 lines.

PCL is a set of printer commands that
Hewlett-Packard developed to provide
access to printer features.

Orientation

Portrait (default)

Select the orientation that is most often used
for print jobs. Select Portrait if the short edge
is at the top or Landscape if the long edge is
at the top.

Landscape

Font Source

Select the source
from the list.

Select the font source for the user-soft default
font.

Font Number

Type the font
number. The range
is between 0 and
999. The factory
default is 0.

Specify the font number for the user soft
default font by using the source that is
specified in the Font Source menu item. The
device assigns a number to each font and
lists it on the PCL font list (available from the
Administration menu).

Font Pitch

Type a value
between 0.44 and
99.99. The factory
default is 10.00.

If Font Source and Font Number indicate a
contour font, use this feature to select a
default pitch (for a fixed-spaced font).

Symbol Set

PC-8 (default)

Select any one of several available symbol
sets from the control panel. A symbol set is a
unique grouping of all the characters in a font.

(50 additional
symbol sets from
which to choose)
Append CR to LF

No (default)
Yes

Suppress Blank
Pages

No (default)
Yes

Media Source
Mapping

Standard (default)
Classic

Chapter 2 Control panel

Configure whether a carriage return (CR) is
appended to each line feed (LF) encountered
in backwards-compatible PCL jobs (pure
text, no job control).
This option is for users who are generating
their own PCL, which could include extra
form feeds that cause blank pages to be
printed. When Yes is selected, form feeds are
ignored if the page is blank.
Select and maintain input trays by number
when you are not using the device driver, or
when the software program has no option for
tray selection.

ENWW

Print Quality menu
Administration > Print Quality
Table 2-16 Print Quality menu
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Adjust Color

Highlights

Cyan Density. Magenta
Density. Yellow Density.
Black Density

Adjust the darkness or lightness of highlights on a
printed page. Lower values represent lighter highlights
on a printed page, and higher values represent darker
highlights on a printed page.

+5 to –5. Default is 0.
Midtones

Cyan Density. Magenta
Density. Yellow Density.
Black Density

Adjust the darkness or lightness of midtones on a
printed page. Lower values represent lighter midtones
on a printed page, and higher values represent darker
midtones on a printed page.

+5 to –5. Default is 0.
Shadows

Cyan Density. Magenta
Density. Yellow Density.
Black Density

Adjust the darkness or lightness of shadows on a
printed page. Lower values represent lighter shadows
on a printed page, and higher values represent darker
shadows on a printed page.

+5 to –5. Default is 0.
Restore Color Values
Set Registration

Test Page

Sets all the density values back to the factory default
settings.
Print

Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the
page from top to bottom and from left to right. You can
also align the image on the front with the image printed
on the back.
Print a test page for setting the registration.

Source

All trays

Select the source input tray for printing the Set
Registration page.

Tray :
(choose a tray)
Adjust Tray

Shift from -20 to 20 along
the X or Y axes. 0 is the
default.
X1 Shift
X2 Shift
Y Shift

Print Modes

ENWW

Perform the alignment procedure for each tray.
When it creates an image, the device scans across the
page from side to side as the sheet feeds from top to
bottom into the device.
The scan direction is referred to as X. X1 is the scan
direction for the first side of a 2-sided page. X2 is the
scan direction for the second side of a 2-sided page.
The feed direction is referred to as Y.
Configure which mode is associated with which paper
type.

Print Quality menu

Table 2-16 Print Quality menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Auto Sense Mode

Tray 1 sensing

Full Sensing (default for
Tray 1)

When Full Sensing is selected, the product recognizes
light, plain, heavy, glossy, and tough paper and
overhead transparencies. When Expanded Sensing is
selected, the device recognizes normal paper,
overhead transparencies, glossy paper, and tough
paper. When Transparency Only is selected, the device
recognizes only overhead transparency and nonoverhead transparency types.

Expanded Sensing
(default for Trays 2-5)
Transparency Only

Tray 2-5 Sensing

Expanded Sensing
Transparency Only
(default)

Optimize

Paper Curl

Normal
Reduced

Pre-rotation

Off (default)
On

Fuser Temp

Normal (default)
Alternate 1
Alternate 2
Alternate 3

Tray 1

Normal (default)
Alternate

Gloss Mode

Normal (default)
High

Chapter 2 Control panel

When Expanded Sensing is selected, the device
recognizes normal paper, overhead transparencies,
glossy paper, and tough paper. When Transparency
Only is selected, the device recognizes only overhead
transparency and non-overhead transparency types.
To help reduce paper curl, set this option to Reduced.
This decreases full speed to 10 PPM (instead of 40
ppm) and 3/4 speed to 7.5 ppm (instead of 30 ppm).
Turn this feature On if horizontal streaks appear on
pages. Using this feature increases the warm-up time
for the device.
If you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated at
the bottom of the page or on the following page, you
should first make sure the Paper Type and Print Mode
settings are correct for the type of paper you are using.
If you continue to see ghost images on your print jobs,
set the Fuser Temp feature to one of the Alternate
settings . Try the Alternate 1 setting first and see if it
solves the problem. If you continue to see the problem,
try Alternate 2 and then Alternate 3. With the Alternate
2 and Alternate 3 settings you may see an extra delay
between jobs.
If you are seeing marks on the back side of the paper
when printing from Tray 1, set the mode to Alternate.
This increases the frequency of the cleaning cycle.
Chosen when stable high gloss is required. Set this
feature to High for glossy print jobs, such as photos, if
you notice the gloss finish decreasing after the first
page is printed. This setting reduces the performance
for all paper types.

ENWW

Table 2-16 Print Quality menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Light Media

Auto (default)

Prevents the fuser from wrapping with light paper. Set
this feature to On if you are frequently seeing Fuser
Delay Jam or Fuser Wrap Jam messages, especially
when printing on lightweight paper or on jobs with
heavy toner coverage.

Environment

Normal (default)
Low Temp

Line Voltage

Normal (default)
100V

Cleaning frequency

Normal (default)
Alternate

D-Blade bias

Normal (default)
Alternate

Waste Bin

Normal (default)
Alternate

Discharge Brush

Off (default)
On

Background

Off (default)
On

Heavy Mode

30 PPM (default)
24 PPM

Tracking Control

Off (default)

Optimizes performance in extreme low temperature
environments. Set this feature to Low Temp if the
product is operating in a low-temperature environment
and you are having problems with print quality such as
blisters in the printed image.
Optimizes performance in low-voltage conditions. Set
this feature to 100V if the product is operating in a lowvoltage environment and you are having problems with
print quality such as blisters in the printed image.
Set this feature to Alternate if you are seeing defects in
the printed output that repeat at 38 mm (1.5 inch)
intervals. This feature increases the frequency at which
the C roller is cleaned. Setting this feature to
Alternate might also reduce printing speed and
increase the frequency of consumable replacement.
Set this feature to Alternate if you are seeing short white
vertical lines in the printed output. The Alternate setting
might also cause dark spots in the printed output, so be
sure to test this setting on a few print jobs.
Try setting this feature to Alternate if you are seeing
lengthwise toner streaks in your printed output,
especially in jobs with low toner coverage.
Enable this feature in low temperature and low humidity
environments if you are seeing specks of toner
scattered on double-sided jobs using light-weight paper
and longer than ten pages.
Turn this feature On if pages are printing with a shaded
background. Using this feature might reduce gloss
levels.
The default setting is 30 PPM. Select the 24 PPM option
to reduce the speed and improve fusing on heavy
paper.
Improves color stability by adjusting the bias voltage.
This setting should remain On.

Resolution

Restore Optimize

Select this setting to return all the settings in the
Optimize menu to the factory default settings.

Image REt 4800

Select Image REt 4800 to produces fast, high-quality
printing that is appropriate for most print jobs

1200X600dpi
Select 1200X600dpi to produce the highest-quality
printing available, but it may slow print speed. This
setting may be useful for jobs that contain very thin lines
or fine graphics.
Color REt

Enabled (default)
Disabled

ENWW

Enable or disable Resolution Enhancement technology
(REt), which produces print output with smooth angles,
curves, and edges.

Print Quality menu

Table 2-16 Print Quality menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Process Cleaning Page

Process

Use this feature to create and process a cleaning page
for cleaning excess toner off the pressure roller in the
fuser. The process takes up to 2.5 minutes.

Quick Calibration

Calibrate

Performs partial product calibrations.

Full Calibration

Calibrate

Performs all product calibrations.

Delay Calibration At
Wake/Power On

This menu controls the timing of the calibration when
the printer wakes up or is turned on.

Calibration/Cleaning

Yes (default)
●

Select No to have the printer calibrate immediately
when it wakes up or is turned on. The device will
not print any jobs until it finishes calibrating.

●

Select Yes to enable a device that is asleep to
accept print jobs before it calibrates. The device
only accepts new jobs for a short time. It may start
calibrating before it has printed all the jobs it has
received.

NOTE: For the best results, allow the device to
calibrate before printing. Print jobs performed before
calibration may not be of the highest quality.

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Troubleshooting menu
Administration > Troubleshooting
NOTE: Many of the menu items under the Troubleshooting menu are for advanced troubleshooting
purposes.
Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Event Log

This shows the event codes and their
corresponding engine cycles on the controlpanel display.

Calibrate Scanner

Calibrate

Use this feature to compensate for offsets in
the scanner imaging system (carriage head)
for ADF and flatbed scans.
You might need to calibrate the scanner if it
is not capturing the correct sections of
scanned documents.

PQ Troubleshooting
Fax T.30 Trace

Print
Print T.30 Report
When to Print Report

Never auto print
(default)

Print various diagnostic pages that help solve
print-quality problems.
Print or configure the fax T.30 trace report. T.
30 is the standard that specifies
handshaking, protocols, and error correction
between fax machines.

Print after any fax job
Print after fax send
jobs
Print after any fax
error
Print after send
errors only
Print after receive
errors only
Fax Transmit Signal
Loss

A value between 0
and 30. The default is
0.

Set loss levels to compensate for phone-line
signal loss. Do not modify this setting unless
requested to do so by an HP service
representative because it could cause the fax
to stop functioning.

Fax V.34

Normal (default)

Disable V.34 mode if several fax failures have
occurred or if phone line conditions require it.

Off
Fax Speaker Mode

Normal (default)
Diagnostic

Diagnostic Page
Disable Cartridge
Check

ENWW

A technician can use this feature technician
to evaluate and diagnose fax issues by
listening to the sounds of fax modulations.
Print a diagnostic page that includes color
swatches and the EP parameters table.
Use this item to enter a mode where a
cartridge (or color pair of cartridge and drum)
can be removed to determine which particular

Troubleshooting menu

Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description
color is the source of a problem. In this mode,
all consumable-related errors are ignored.

Paper Path Sensors
Paper Path Test

Initiate a test of the paper-path sensors.
Test Page

Generate a test page for testing the paperhandling features. Define the path for the test
in order to test specific paper paths.

Source

All trays

Specify whether the test page is printed from
all trays or from a specific tray.

Tray 1
Tray 2
(Additional trays are
shown, if applicable.)
Destination

All bins

Select the output option for the test page.
Send the test page to all output bins or only
to a specific bin.

Duplex

Off (default)

Select whether the duplexer should be
included in the test.

On
Copies

Chapter 2 Control panel

Range: 1-500,
Default is 1.

Select how many pages should be sent from
the specified source as part of the test.

ENWW

Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Finishing Paper Path
Test

Staples

Finishing Options

Choose from a list of
available options.

Test the paper-handling features on the
finisher.
Select the option that you want to test.

Destination Bin
Media Size

Letter

Select the paper size for the test.

A4
Media Type

Select from a list of
types.

Select the paper type for the test.

Copies

Range: 2-30,
Default=2

Select the number of copies to include in the
test.

Duplex

Off

Select whether to use the duplexer in the test.

Stack

Test Page

Print a test page to use for the test.

Destination Bin

Select from a list of
bins.

Select the options that you want to use to test
the stacker.

Media Size

Letter
Legal
A4
Executive (JIS)
8.5 x 13

Media Type

Select from a list of
bins.

Select the type of media to use for the
Finishing Paper Path Test.

Copies

Select the number of copies to include in the
Finishing Paper Path Test.

10
50
100
500
Duplex

Off

Select whether to use the duplexer in the
Finishing Paper Path Test.

On
Test Page

ENWW

Print a test page to use for the test.

Troubleshooting menu

Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

Booklet Maker

Media Size

Letter

Select the options that you want to use to test
the booklet maker.

Legal
A4
Executive (JIS)
8.5 x 13
Media Type

Select from a list of
bins.

Select the type of media to use for the
Finishing Paper Path Test.

Copies

Select the number of copies to include in the
Finishing Paper Path Test.

10
50
100
500
Duplex

Off

Select whether to use the duplexer in the
Finishing Paper Path Test.

On
Test Page

Manual Sensor Test

Component Test

Print a test page to use for the test.
This item performs tests to determine
whether the paper-path sensors are
operating correctly.

Transfer Motors
Belt Only
Image Drum Motors
Black Laser Scanner

Exercise individual parts independently to
isolate noise, leaking, or other issues. To start
the test, select one of the components. The
test runs the number of times specified in the
Repeat option. You might be prompted to
remove parts from the device during the test.
Press the Stop button to abort the test.

Cyan Laser Scanner
Magenta Laser
Scanner
Yellow Laser
Scanner
Fuser Motor
Fuser Pressure
Release Motor
Black Alienation
Motor
Cyan Alienation
Motor
Magenta Alienation
Motor
Yellow Alienation
Motor

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

ITB Contact/
Alienation
Tray 2 Pickup Motor
Tray 2 Pickup
Solenoid
Tray 3 Pickup Motor
Tray 3 Pickup
Solenoid
Tray 4 Pickup Motor
Tray 4 Pickup
Solenoid
Tray 5 Pickup Motor
Tray 5 Pickup
Solenoid
Duplexer Reverse
Motor
Duplexer Feed Motor
Duplexer ReFeed
Motor
Paper Transport
Motor
Repeat

Once (Default)

Determines the number of times the test runs.

Continuous
Print/Stop Test

Color Band Test

Continuous value
from 0 to 60,000
milliseconds.
Default: 0

Isolate faults by stopping the device during
the print cycle and observing where in the
process the image degrades. To run the test,
specify a stop time. The next job that is sent
to the device stops at the specified time in the
process.

Test Page

Prints a page that helps identify arcing in the
high-voltage power supplies.

Copies

Continuous value
from 1 to 30.

Specify the number of copies to print for the
Color Band test

Default: 1
Scanner Tests

Lower Lamp
Sensors

A service technician can use this menu item
to diagnose potential problems with the
device scanner.

ADF Input Motor
ADF Input Reverse
Flatbed Motor
ADF Read Motor

ENWW

Troubleshooting menu

Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Values

Description

ADF Read Motor
Reverse
ADF Duplex
Solenoid
ADF LED Indicator
Control Panel

LEDs
Display

Verify that the components of the control
panel are functioning correctly.

Buttons
Touchscreen
Finisher Tests

Manual Sensor Test
Component Test

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Resets menu
Administration > Resets
Table 2-18 Resets menu
Menu item

Values

Description

Clear Local Address Book

Clear

Use this feature to clear all addresses from the address books that
are stored on the device.

Clear Fax Activity Log

Yes

Use this feature to clear all events from the Fax Activity Log.

No (default)
Restore Factory Telecom Setting

Restore

Use this option to restore the following settings to their factory default
settings: Transmit Signal Loss, V34, Maximum Baud Rate, Speaker
Mode.

Restore Factory Settings

Restore

Use this feature to restore all device settings to their factory defaults.

Reset Supplies

New Document Feeder Kit (Yes/
No)

Notify the device that a new document-feeder kit has been
installed.

ENWW

Resets menu

Service menu
Administration > Service
The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized
service personnel.

Chapter 2 Control panel

ENWW

Paper and print media

●

Understand paper and print media use

●

Supported paper and print media sizes

●

Supported paper types

●

Special paper or print media guidelines

●

Load paper and print media

●

Configure trays

●

Choose an output location

Understand paper and print media use
This product supports a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in this
user guide. Paper or print media that does not meet these guidelines might cause the following problems:
●

Poor print quality

●

Increased jams

●

Premature wear on the product, requiring repair

For best results, use only HP-brand paper and print media designed for laserjets or multiuse. Do not
use paper or print media made for inkjet printers. Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the
use of other brands of media because HP cannot control their quality.
It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this user guide and still not produce satisfactory
results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and/or humidity levels,
or other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.
CAUTION: Using paper or print media that does not meet Hewlett-Packard's specifications might
cause problems for the product, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard
warranty or service agreements.

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

ENWW

Supported paper and print media sizes
NOTE: To obtain best print results, select the appropriate paper size and type in your print driver before
printing.
Table 3-1 Supported paper and print media sizes
Size

Dimensions

Tray 1

Tray 2

Trays 3, 4, 5

Letter

216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in)

Letter Rotated

279 x 216 mm (11 x 8.5 in)

Legal

216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)

210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 in)

A4 Rotated

297 x 210 mm (11.69 x 8.27 in)

Executive

184 x 267 mm (7.24 x 10.51 in)

Statement

139.7 x 215.9 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in)

8.5 x 13

216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)

297 x 420 mm (11.69 x 16.54 in)

148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in)

105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 in)

11 x 17

279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 in)

12 x 18

305 x 457 mm (12 x 18 in)

B4 (JIS)

257 x 364 mm (10.12 x 14.33 in)

RA3

305 x 430 mm (12 x 16.93 in)

SRA3

320 x 450 mm (12.6 x 17.7 in)

B5 (JIS)

182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 in)

270 x 390 mm (10.63 x 15.35 in)

16k

195 x 270 mm (7.68 x 10.63 in)

Custom

98.55 x 139.70 mm to 320 x 457.2 mm
(3.9 x 5.5 to 12.6 x 18 in)3

Custom

148 x 210 mm to 297 x 432 mm (5.8 x 8.2 to
11.7 x 17 in)2

Custom

148 x 210 mm to 320 x 457.2 mm (5.8 x 8.2 to
12.6 x 18 in)

Tray automatically detects paper size.

Standard sizes within the custom range for Tray 2 are: 8.5 x 13, RA4, SRA4, 8K (270 x 390), 16K (195 x 270)

Standard sizes within the custom range for Trays 3, 4, and 5 are: 8.5 x 13, RA4, SRA4, 8K (270 x 390), 16K (195 x 270), RA3,
SRA3 , and 12 x 18

Table 3-2 Supported envelopes and postcards

ENWW

Size

Dimensions

Envelope #9

98 x 225 mm (3.88 x 8.88 in)

Tray 1

Trays 2, 3, 4, 5

Supported paper and print media sizes

Table 3-2 Supported envelopes and postcards (continued)
Size

Dimensions

Envelope #10

105 x 241 mm (4.13 x 9.49 in)

Envelope DL

110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 in)

Envelope C5

162 x 229 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in)

Envelope B5

176 x 250 mm (6.7 x 9.8 in)

Envelope C6

162 x 114 mm (6.4 x 4.5 in)

Envelope
Monarch

98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in)

Double Post Card

148 x 200 mm (5.83 x 7.87 in)

US Index Cards

102 x 152 mm (4 x 6 in) and 127 x 203 mm (5 x 8 in)

Tray 1

Trays 2, 3, 4, 5

Weights greater than 160 g/m2 may not perform well, but will not harm the product.

The following paper sizes are supported with the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker and HP Booklet
Maker/Finisher accessories.
Table 3-3 Supported paper and print media sizes for the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker and HP Booklet Maker/
Finisher accessories
Size

Dimensions

Letter

216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in)

Letter Rotated

279 x 216 mm
(11 x 8.5 in)

Legal

216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in)

210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.69 in)

A4 Rotated

297 x 210 mm
(11.69 x 8.27 in)

Executive

184 x 267 mm
(7.24 x 10.51 in)

8.5 x 13

216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in)

297 x 420 mm
(11.69 x 16.54 in)

148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in)

105 x 148 mm
(4.13 x 5.83 in)

Statement

140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in)

11 x 17
(Ledger)

279 x 432 mm
(11 x 17 in)

Stacking2

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

Angled
staple (leftangled)

Angled
staple (rightangled)

Two staples
(top or side)

Folding

Saddle stitch

ENWW

Table 3-3 Supported paper and print media sizes for the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker and HP Booklet Maker/
Finisher accessories (continued)
Size

Dimensions

12 x 18

305 x 457 mm
(12 x 18 in)

B4 (JIS)

257 x 364 mm
(10.12 x 14.33 in)

RA3

305 x 430 mm
(12 x 16.93 in)

SRA3

320 x 450 mm
(12.6 x 17.7 in)

B5 (JIS)

257 x 182 mm
(10.12 x 7.17 in)

B6 (JIS)

128 x 182 mm
(5.04 x 7.2 in)

270 x 390 mm
(10.63 x 15.35 in)

16K

195 x 270 mm
(7.68 x 10.63 in)

Envelope 9#

98.4 x 225.4 mm
(3.88 x 8.88 in)

Envelope 10#

104.77 x 241.3 mm
(4.12 x 9.5 in)

Envelope DL

110 x 220 mm
(4.33 x 8.66 in)

Envelope C5

162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.02 in)

Envelope B5

176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in)

Envelope C6

114 x 162 mm
(4.49 x 6.38 in)

Envelope
Monarch

98.42 x 190.5 mm
(3.88 x 7.5 in)

Double Post
Card

148 x 200 mm
(5.83 x 7.87 in)

4 x 6 Index
Card

102 x 152 mm (4 x 6 in)

5 x 8 Index
Card

127 x 203 mm (5 x 8 in)

Custom Size

98.55 x 139.70 mm to
320 x 457.2 mm
(3.9 x 5.5 to
12.6 x 18 in)

ENWW

Stacking2

Angled
staple (leftangled)

Angled
staple (rightangled)

Two staples
(top or side)

Folding

Booklet maker only

Stacking uses bins 1, 2, and 3 in the stapler/stacker, or bins 1 and 2 in the booklet maker.

Saddle stitch

Supported paper and print media sizes

Supported paper types
Table 3-4 Tray 1 paper information
Type

Specifications

Quantity

Driver settings

Paper orientation

Paper and cardstock,
standard sizes

Range:

Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 in)

Plain or unspecified

Load preprinted or
prepunched paper
facing down, with the
top edge leading into
the tray, or toward the
back of the product

60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond

Equivalent to 100
sheets of 75 g/m2 (20
lb) bond.

Envelopes

Less than 60 g/m2 (16
lb) bond to 90 g/m2 (24
lb) bond

Up to 10 envelopes

Envelope

Short edge leading,
flap toward the front of
the product, facing up

Labels

Maximum 0.23 mm
(0.009 in) thick

Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 in)

Labels

Side to be printed on
facing down

Transparencies

Minimum 0.13 mm
(0.005 in) thick

Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 in)

Transparencies

Side to be printed on
facing down

Heavy

0.13 mm (0.005 in)
thick

Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 in)

Light glossy, glossy, or
heavy glossy

Side to be printed on
facing down

Glossy

Range:

Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 in)

Light glossy, glossy, or
heavy glossy

Side to be printed on
facing down

75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond
Photo media

60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond

Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 in)

Side to be printed on
facing down

Cut sheet paper

60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond

Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 in)

Side to be printed on
facing down

Tough paper

60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond

Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 in)

Side to be printed on
facing down

Table 3-5 Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 paper information
Type

Specifications

Quantity

Settings

Paper orientation

Paper and cardstock,
standard sizes

Range:

500 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb) bond.

Plain or unspecified

Load preprinted or
prepunched paper
facing up, with the top
toward the back of the
tray or toward the righthand side of the tray.

60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond

Labels

Maximum 0.13 mm
(0.005 in) thick

Maximum stack height:
54 mm (2.1 in)

Labels

Side to be printed on
facing up

Transparencies

Minimum 0.13 mm
(0.005 in) thick

Maximum stack height:
54 mm (2.1 in)

Transparencies

Side to be printed on
facing up

Heavy

0.13 mm (0.005 in) thick

Maximum stack height:
54 mm (2.1 in)

Light glossy, glossy, or
heavy glossy

Side to be printed on
facing up

Glossy

75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond

Maximum stack height:
54 mm (2.1 in)

Light glossy, glossy, or
heavy glossy

Side to be printed on
facing up

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

ENWW

Table 3-5 Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 paper information (continued)
Type

Specifications

Quantity

Settings

Paper orientation

Photo media

60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond

Maximum stack height:
54 mm (2.1 in)

Light glossy, glossy, or
heavy glossy

Side to be printed on
facing up

Cut sheet paper

60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond

Maximum stack height:
54 mm (2.1 in)

Plain or unspecified

Side to be printed on
facing up

Tough paper

60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond

Maximum stack height:
54 mm (2.1 in)

HP Tough Paper

Side to be printed on
facing up

Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 capacity: 54 mm (2.126 in) height or 500 sheets of paper, whichever is less.
Supported media types include: Cut sheet paper, labels, OHT, glossy paper, glossy film, photo media,
and tough paper. Basis Weight: 60-220 g/m2 (16-58 lb).
Duplex printing: Provides automatic two-sided printing (printing on both sides of the paper). The paper
size range for automatic duplex printing is 175 to 320 mm (7.2 to 12.6 in) x 210 to 457 mm (8.3 to 18
in). The media weight range is 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb)
NOTE: HP Color Laser Presentation Paper, Glossy (Q2546A) is not supported with this product. Using
this type of paper can cause a fuser jam that might require the replacement of the fuser. Two
recommended alternatives are HP Color LaserJet Presentation Paper, Soft Gloss (Q6541A) and HP
Color LaserJet Brochure Paper, Glossy (Q6611A, Q6610A).
NOTE: For a complete list of specific HP-brand paper that this product supports, go to www.hp.com/
sbso/product/supplies.

ENWW

Supported paper types

Special paper or print media guidelines
This product supports printing on special media. Use the following guidelines to obtain satisfactory
results. When using special paper or print media, be sure to set the type and size in your print driver to
obtain the best print results.
CAUTION: HP LaserJet printers use fusers to bond dry toner particles to the paper in very precise
dots. HP laser paper is designed to withstand this extreme heat. Using inkjet paper not designed for this
technology could damage your printer.
Media type

Envelopes

●

Store envelopes flat.

●

Use envelopes where the seam
extends all the way to the corner of
the envelope.
●

●

Use peel-off adhesive strips that
are approved for use in laser
printers.

●

Do not use envelopes that are
wrinkled, nicked, stuck together, or
otherwise damaged.
Do not use envelopes that have
clasps, snaps, windows, or coated
linings.

●

Do not use self-stick adhesives or
other synthetic materials.

●

Use only labels that have no
exposed backing between them.

●

Do not use labels that have wrinkles
or bubbles, or are damaged.

●

Use Labels that lie flat.

●

Do not print partial sheets of labels.

●

Use only full sheets of labels.

●

Use only transparencies that are
approved for use in laser printers.

●

Do not use transparent print media
not approved for laser printers.

●

Place transparencies on a flat
surface after removing them from
the product.

Letterhead or preprinted forms

●

Use only letterhead or forms
approved for use in laser printers.

●

Do not use raised or metallic
letterhead.

Heavy paper

●

Use only heavy paper that is
approved for use in laser printers
and meets the weight specifications
for this product.

●

Do not use paper that is heavier
than the recommended media
specification for this product unless
it is HP paper that has been
approved for use in this product.

Glossy or coated paper

●

Use only glossy or coated paper
that is approved for use in laser
printers.

●

Do not use glossy or coated paper
designed for use in inkjet products.

Labels

Transparencies

Do not

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

ENWW

Load paper and print media
You can load different media in the trays and then request media by type or size by using the control
panel.

Load Tray 1
CAUTION: To avoid jams, never add or remove paper from Tray 1 during printing.
1.

Open Tray 1.

Set the side guides to the correct width, and pull out the tray extensions to support paper.

Load paper in the tray with the side to be printed on face down and the top of the paper or nonpostage end facing the back of the printer.
NOTE: For Letter Rotated and A4 Rotated sizes, place the side to be printed on face down, with
the bottom of the page facing into the printer.

ENWW

Make sure the stack fits under the tabs on the guides and does not exceed the load-level indicators.

Adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack but do not bend it.

Load paper and print media

Print envelopes
If your software does not automatically format an envelope, specify Landscape for page orientation in
your software program or printer driver. Use the following guidelines to set margins for return and
destination addresses on Commercial #10 or DL envelopes:
Address type

Left margin

Top margin

Return

15 mm (0.6 in)

Destination

102 mm (4 in)

51 mm (2 in)

For envelopes of other sizes, adjust the margin settings accordingly.

Load trays 2, 3, 4, or 5
Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 each hold up to 500 sheets of standard paper or a 54 mm (2.13-inch) stack of labels
or other thick paper.

Load standard-sized media into trays 2, 3, 4, or 5
The product automatically detects the following standard sizes of media in these 500-sheet trays: Letter,
Letter rotated, Legal, Executive, 11x17, A3, A4, A4 rotated, A5, B4 (JIS), and B5 (JIS).
CAUTION: Do not print envelopes or unsupported sizes of paper from the 500-trays. Print on these
types of paper only from Tray 1.
1.

Slide the tray from the product.

NOTE: Do not open the input tray while it is in use. Doing so can cause jams in the product.

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

ENWW

Adjust the paper width guide by squeezing the adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size
of the paper being used.

Adjust the paper length guide by squeezing the adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size
of the paper being used.

Load paper and print media

Load paper into the tray face up. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack, but
do not bend it.
NOTE: To prevent jams, do not overfill the input tray. Be sure the top of the stack is below the
tray full indicator.

NOTE: For best performance, fill the tray completely without splitting the ream of paper. Splitting
the ream can cause a multifeed problem. The capacity of the paper tray can vary. For example, if
you are using 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper, the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets. If the media is heavier,
the tray will not hold a full ream. Do not overfill the tray.
NOTE: If the tray is not adjusted correctly, an error message might appear or the media might
jam.
5.

Slide the tray into the product. The control panel shows the tray’s paper type and size. If the
configuration is not correct, touch Modify on the control panel and select the correct configuration.
If the configuration is correct, touch OK.

Load undetectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3, 4, and 5
The following undetectable standard-sized media is supported in the 500-sheet trays:

●

Executive (JIS) (8.5 x 13)

●

12 x 18 (Trays 3, 4, or 5 only)

●

B4 (ISO)

●

RA3 (Trays 3, 4, or 5 only)

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

ENWW

●

SRA3 (Trays 3, 4, or 5 only)

●

B5 (ISO)

CAUTION: Do not print envelopes or unsupported sizes of paper from the 500-sheet trays. Print on
these types of paper only from Tray 1. Do not overfill the input tray or open it while it is in use. Doing so
can cause paper jams.

Load custom-size media into tray 2, 3, 4, or 5
To use custom media, change the size setting on the control panel to Custom and set the unit of
measure, X dimension, and Y dimension. See Configure a tray to match print job settings
on page 79 for more information.
1.

Slide open the tray from the product.

Load the print media as described in steps 2 through 4 of the “Load detectable (standard-size)
media into Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5” section. Then proceed to step 3 in this procedure.

Slide the tray into the product. The control panel shows the tray type and size configuration. To
specify specific custom dimensions, or if the type is not correct, touch Modify when the control
panel prompts to change the size or type.

ENWW

Select Custom, and then select the Unit of measure, X dimension and Y dimension for the custom
paper size.

Select the paper type and then touch Save.

If the configuration is correct, touch Save.

Load paper and print media

Load large size paper into Tray 3, 4, or 5
Use the following instructions if you are loading 11x17, RA3, SRA3, or 12 x 18-sized paper into Tray 3,
4, or 5.
1.

Slide open Tray 3, 4, or 5.

Adjust the paper width guide by squeezing the adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size
of the paper being used.

Load the paper into the tray.

Move the paper stop lever to the correct position for the paper being used.

●

For SRA3-sized paper, rotate the lever all the way to the left.

●

For A3- or 11x17-sized paper, rotate the lever down into the center position.

●

For RA3- or 12x18-sized paper, rotate the lever all the way to the right.

Slide the tray into the product. The control panel shows the tray’s media type and size. If the
configuration is not correct, touch Modify and configure the tray to the correct type and size. If the
configuration is correct, touch OK.

Load letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper
To correctly print or copy on letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper, you need to make sure you
load the paper correctly into the tray. You might also need to adjust the Image Rotation setting on the
product control panel. The Image Rotation setting is used to adjust for languages that read from left to
right (the default) or from right to left.
For more information regarding this subject see the Quick Reference Job Aids on the User CD that came
with the product, or visit www.hp.com/support/cljcm6030mfp/manuals or www.hp.com/support/
cljcm6040mfp/manuals

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

ENWW

Change the Image Rotation setting
1.

At the control panel home screen, scroll down and touch Administration.

Scroll down and touch Device Behavior.

Scroll down and touch Tray Behavior.

Scroll down and touch Image Rotation.

Touch the correct Image Rotation option. The default setting is Left to right.

Touch OK.

Choose the correct orientation for loading letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper
The tables below should be used as a guide for loading letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper.
The first table shows the tray-loading orientation when Image Rotation is set to Left to right, which
indicates that the language reads left to right. The second table shows the tray-loading orientation when
Image Rotation is set to Right to left, which indicates that the language reads right to left. The tables
also contain the following information:
●

The paper type: letterhead, pre-printed or pre-punched.

●

The paper tray: Tray 1 or Trays 2 through 5.

●

Image orientation: Portrait (1) or Landscape (2).

ENWW

●

One-sided or two-sided (duplex) printing.

●

Stapling: The optional stapler/stacker or booklet maker output accessory must be attached in order
to staple print or copy jobs. The staple location can be one left, one angled staple located in upper
left corner; or two left, two staples located on left long edge.

●

The arrow in the paper graphic indicates the direction the paper will feed into the printer. The paper
graphic indicates the direction the paper should be placed in the paper tray. The default is to load
the paper so that the long edge feeds first. This results in the most efficient printing and copying.

Load paper and print media

Table 3-6 Load letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper — Image Rotation = Left to right

Duplex mode

Staple location
options

Letterhead or Preprinted – Tray 1

Portrait

1- sided

One left, two left

Letterhead or Preprinted – Tray 1

Portrait

2-sided

One left, two left

Letterhead or Preprinted – Tray 1

Landscape

1-sided

One left, two left

Letterhead or Preprinted – Tray 1

Landscape

2-sided

One left, two left

Letterhead or Preprinted – Trays 2-5

Portrait

1-sided

One left, two left

Letterhead or Preprinted – Trays 2-5

Portrait

2-sided

One left, two left

Letterhead or Preprinted – Trays 2-5

Landscape

1-sided

One left, two left

Letterhead or Preprinted – Trays 2-5

Landscape

2-sided

One left, two left

How to load for
long-edge feed

HP Laserjet

How to load for
short-edge feed

HP Laserjet

Image orientation

HP Laserjet

Paper type and
tray

HP Laserjet

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

ENWW

Table 3-6 Load letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper — Image Rotation = Left to right (continued)
Paper type and
tray

Image orientation

Duplex mode

Staple location
options

Pre-punched –
Tray 1

Portrait

1-sided or 2-sided

One left, two left

Pre-punched –
Tray 1

Landscape

1-sided or 2-sided

One left, two left

Pre-punched –
Trays 2-5

Portrait

1-sided or 2-sided

One left, two left

Pre-punched –
Trays 2-5

Landscape

1-sided or 2-sided

One left, two left

How to load for
long-edge feed

How to load for
short-edge feed

Table 3-7 Load letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper — Image Rotation = Right to left
Duplex mode

Staple location
options

Letterhead or Preprinted – Tray 1

Portrait

1-sided

One right, two right

Letterhead or Preprinted – Tray 1

Landscape

2-sided

One right, two right

2-sided

One right, two right

Letterhead or Pre- Portrait
printed – Trays 2-5

ENWW

How to load for
long-edge feed

HP Laserjet

Image orientation

How to load for
short-edge feed

HP Laserjet

Paper type and
tray

Load paper and print media

Table 3-7 Load letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper — Image Rotation = Right to left (continued)
Duplex mode

Staple location
options

Letterhead or Preprinted – Trays 2-5

Landscape

1-sided

One right, two right

Pre-punched –
Tray 1

Portrait

1-sided or 2-sided

One right, two right

Pre-punched –
Tray 1

Landscape

1-sided or 2-sided

One right, two right

Pre-punched –
Trays 2-5

Portrait

1-sided or 2-sided

One right, two right

Pre-punched –
Trays 2-5

Landscape

1-sided or 2-sided

One right, two right

How to load for
long-edge feed

HP Laserjet

Image orientation

How to load for
short-edge feed

HP Laserjet

Paper type and
tray

NOTE: For more information regarding this subject see the Job Aids on the User CD that came with
the product, or visit www.hp.com/support/cljcm6030mfp/manuals or www.hp.com/support/
cljcm6040mfp/manuals

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

ENWW

Configure trays
The product automatically prompts you to configure a tray for type and size in the following situations:
●

When you load paper into the tray

●

When you specify a particular tray or media type for a print job through the printer driver or a
software program and the tray is not configured to match the print-job’s settings

The following message appears on the control panel:Tray [type] [size] To change size or type,
touch “Modify”. To accept, touch “OK”.
NOTE: The prompt does not appear if you are printing from Tray 1 and Tray 1 is configured for Any
Custom and Any Type.
NOTE: If you have used other HP LaserJet product models, you might be accustomed to configuring
Tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode. On HP Color LaserJet CM6040 Series, setting Tray 1 size to
Any Custom is equivalent to First mode. Setting size for Tray 1 to a setting other than Any Custom is
equivalent to Cassette mode.

Configure a tray when loading paper
1.

Load paper in the tray. Close the tray if you are using Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5.

The tray configuration message appears.

Touch OK to accept the detected size and type, or touch Modify to choose a different paper size
or type.

Select the correct size and type and then touch OK.
NOTE: The product automatically detects most paper sizes in Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5.

Configure a tray to match print job settings
1.

In the software program, specify the source tray, the paper size, and the paper type.

Send the job to the product.
If the tray needs to be configured, the Load Tray x message appears.

Load the tray with the specified type and size of paper, and then close the tray.
To specify a custom size, Modify.

When the Tray Size= message appears, touch OK to confirm the size.

When the Tray Type= message appears, touch OK to confirm the type and continue
with the job.

Automatic media type sensing (auto sense mode)
The automatic media type sensor functions only when that tray is configured to Any Type or Plain type.
Configuring a tray to any other type, such as Bond or Glossy, deactivates the media sensor in that tray.

ENWW

Configure trays

The HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP Series can automatically classify many paper types into one of
the following categories:
●

Plain

●

Transparency

●

Glossy

●

Extra-heavy glossy

●

Glossy film

●

Heavy

For more control, a specific type must be selected in the job or configured in a tray.

Auto sense settings
Full sensing (default for Tray 1)
●

The product recognizes light, plain, heavy, glossy, and tough paper and overhead transparencies.

●

Each time the product begins a print job, it stops the first page to sense the type.

●

This is the slowest mode.

Expanded sensing (default for Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5)
●

Each time the product begins a print job, it stops the first page to sense the type.

●

The product assumes that the second and all subsequent pages are of the same media type as
the first page.

●

This is the second-fastest mode, and is useful for using stacks of the same media type.

Transparency only
●

The product does not stop any pages for sensing but distinguishes between transparencies
(Transparency mode) and paper (Normal mode).

●

This is the fastest mode and is useful for high-volume printing in Normal mode.

For more information about setting these options, see Print Quality menu on page 49

Select the paper by source, type, or size
In the Microsoft Windows operating system, three settings affect how the printer driver tries to pull media
when you send a print job. Source, Type, and Size settings appear in the Page Setup, Print, or Print
Properties dialog boxes in most software programs. Unless you change these settings, the product
automatically selects a tray using the default settings.

Source
To print by Source select a specific tray for the product to pull from. If you select a tray that is configured
for a type or size that does not match your print job, the product prompts you to load the tray with the
type or size of print media for your print job before printing it. When you load the tray, the product begins
printing.

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

ENWW

Type and Size
Printing by Type or Size means that you want the product to pull from the tray that is loaded with the
correct type and size of media. Selecting media by type rather than source is similar to locking out trays
and helps protect special media from accidental use. For example, if a tray is configured for letterhead
and you select plain paper, the product will not pull the letterhead from that tray. Instead, it will pull from
a tray that has plain paper loaded and is configured for plain paper on the product control panel. Selecting
media by Type and Size results in significantly better print quality for heavy paper, glossy paper, and
transparencies. Using the wrong setting might result in unsatisfactory print quality. Always print by Type
for special print media, such as labels or transparencies. Print by Size for envelopes, if possible.

ENWW

●

To print by Type or Size, select the Type or Size from the Page Setup dialog box, the Print dialog
box, or the Print Properties dialog box, depending on the software program.

●

If you often print on a certain type or size of media, configure a tray for that type or size. Then,
when you select that type or size as you print a job, the product automatically pulls media from the
tray that is configured for that type or size.

Configure trays

Choose an output location
Standard output bins
The product has an ADF output bin and the standard output bin for printed pages.

2
1

Standard output bin

ADF output bin (for copy originals)

When you scan or copy documents by using the ADF, the originals are automatically delivered to the
ADF output bin. Copies made from the scanner glass are delivered to the standard output bin or the
output bin(s) on the stapler/stacker or the 3-bin mailbox.
When you send print jobs to the product from a computer, the output is to the standard output bin or the
output bin(s) on the stapler/stacker or the 3-bin mailbox.

Optional output accessories
An optional 3 bin stapler/stacker or booklet-maker finisher accessory can be installed with the product.
When an accessory is installed, an output accessory bridge is also added on top of the product in order
to route the print jobs to the accessory output bins.

3-bin stapler/stacker features
Table 3-8 3-bin stapler/stacker features
Job offset

Each copy of a job is shifted to one side in the output bin in order to keep each copy separate
from the others. (Supported paper sizes: A3, A4, A4 rotated, A5, B4, B5, Ledger, Legal, Letter,
Letter rotated, Statement.)

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

ENWW

Table 3-8 3-bin stapler/stacker features (continued)
Three operation modes

Mailbox Mode assigns each bin to a user or group of users. Stacker Mode uses all three output
bins for all print jobs — when one bin is full, jobs are routed to the next bin. Function Separator
Mode sends copies to bin 1, faxes to bin 2, and print jobs to bin 3.

Stapler

Built-in stapler staples jobs up to 50 sheets in size or 30 stapled jobs. Pages can be stapled
in one position at the front, in one position at the back, or at two positions at the side or top.

Large-capacity output bins

The stacker has three bins: a 100-sheet bin, a 500-sheet bin, and a 1000-sheet bin.

Booklet maker finisher features
Table 3-9 Booklet-maker finisher features
Booklet-making

The booklet-making feature staples and folds print jobs of 2 to 15 pages into a booklet.

Folding

Single-sheet print jobs can be automatically folded in the center.

Job offset

Two operation modes

Mailbox Mode assigns each bin to a user or group of users, and Stacker Mode uses both
output bins for all print jobs — when the top bin is full, jobs are routed to the next bin.

Stapler

Built-in stapler staples jobs up to 50 sheets in size or 30 stapled jobs. Pages can be stapled
in one position at the front, in one position at the back, or at two positions at the side or top.

Large-capacity output bins

The stacker has three bins: two 1000-sheet bins and one bin that can hold up to 25 saddlestitched booklets.

Accessory walkaround
Figure 3-1 3-bin stapler/stacker accessory

ENWW

Output bins

Front door

Stapler unit

Top cover

Connection cable

Choose an output location

Figure 3-2 Booklet-maker finisher accessory

1
1

Booklet bin guide

Booklet output bin

Stacking output bins

Front door

Stapler units

Top cover

Connection cable

Use the booklet-making feature
You can create booklets from the print driver or by copying an original document.
Before creating a booklet, set the booklet bin guide for the size of paper being used:

●

Closed: 11x17, Legal, A3, or B4

●

Open: Letter Rotated, A4 Rotated

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

ENWW

Create a booklet from the print driver
1.

On the File menu of your software program, click Print.

Select HP Color LaserJet CM6030 or CM6040 MFP.

Click Properties, and then click Booklet Printing.

Set the Paper source, Paper sizes, Paper type, Orientation, Booklet Layout, Print document
on, andStaple settings, and then click OK.

Click OK to print.

Create a booklet from a copy
Documents can be copied from the automatic document feeder (ADF) or by placing the document on
the scanner glass.

ENWW

From the control panel, touch Copy.

Scroll to and touch Booklet Format.

Touch Booklet on.

For Original Sides touch 1-sided or 2-sided.

Touch OK and then touch Start.

Choose an output location

Configure the accessory operation mode
Select the operating mode at the control panel
You can set the operating mode for the stapler/stacker or the booklet maker at the product control panel.
1.

At the control panel, touch Administration, and then touch Device behavior.

Touch MBM-3 bin stapler or Multifunction finisher.

Touch Operation mode, and then select the operation mode that you want to use.
●

When Mailbox Mode is used, each bin is assigned to a user or group of users. Every time a
user sends a print job, the job is routed to the assigned bin.

●

When Stacker Mode is used and the optional 3-bin stapler/stacker is installed, the three bins
act as a single bigger bin. When one bin gets full, jobs are automatically routed to the next
bin. When Stacker Mode is used and the booklet maker finisher is installed, the two upper
bins act as a single bin, and the third bin is reserved for booklets.

●

When Function Separator (3-bin stapler/stacker only) mode is used, each bin is assigned to
a specific kind of job. Usually this designation is bin 1 for copies, bin 2 for fax, and bin 3 for
printing. These values can be modified in the Default Job Options menus for copy, fax, and
print.

NOTE: Use the product embedded Web server to assign output bins to users or groups of users.
For more information see Embedded Web server on page 95.

Select the operating mode in the printer driver
1.

Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers (for Windows 2000) or Printers
and Faxes (for Windows XP).
From your Vista computer click Start, click Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware
and Sound click Printer.

Right-click the HP product icon, and then click Properties or Printing Preferences.

Click the Device Settings tab.

Perform one of the following actions:
For automatic configuration: under Installable Options, click Update Now in the Automatic
Configuration list.
-orFor manual configuration: under Installable Options, select the appropriate operation mode in the
Accessory Output Bin list.

Click Apply to save the settings.

Select the operating mode in the printer driver (Mac OS X)

In the Apple menu, click System Preferences.

In the System Preferences box, click Print and Fax.

Click Set Up Printers. A Printer List displays.

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

ENWW

Select the HP product, and then click Show Info on the Printers menu.

Select the Installable Options panel.

In the Accessory Output Bins list, select correct accessory.

In the Mailbox Mode list, select the appropriate operational mode, and then click Apply
Changes.

Choose an output location

Chapter 3 Paper and print media

ENWW

Manage and maintain the product

●

Information pages

●

HP Easy Printer Care

●

Embedded Web server

●

Use HP Web Jetadmin software

●

Security features

●

Manage supplies

●

Replace supplies

●

Clean the product

●

ADF maintenance kit

●

Calibrate the scanner

●

Upgrade the firmware

●

Set the real-time clock

Information pages
Information pages provide details about the device and its current configuration. The following table
provides the instructions for printing the information pages.
Page description

How to print the page from the product control panel

Menu map

From the Home screen, touch Administration.

Shows the control-panel menus and
available settings.

Touch Information.

Touch Configuration/status Pages.

Touch Administration Menu Map.

Touch Print.

The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in
the device.
For a complete list of control panel menus and possible values, see Use the control
panel on page 14.
Configuration page

From the Home screen, touch Administration.

Shows device settings and installed
accessories.

Touch Information.

Touch Configuration/Status Pages.

Touch Configuration Page.

Touch Print.

NOTE: If the device contains an HP Jetdirect print server or an optional hard disk
drive, additional configuration pages print that provide information about those
devices.
Supplies status page

From the Home screen, touch Administration.

Shows print-cartridge toner levels.

Touch Information.

Touch Configuration/status Pages.

Touch Supplies Status Page.

Touch Print.

NOTE: If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page might not show
the remaining life for those supplies.
Usage page

From the Home screen, touch Administration.

Shows a page count for each size of
paper printed, the number of one-sided
(simplexed) or two-sided (duplexed)
pages, and the average percentage of
coverage.

Touch Information.

Touch Configuration/status Pages.

Touch Usage Page.

Touch Print.

From the Home screen, touch Administration

Touch Information

Touch Configuration/status Pages

Color usage job log

Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Page description

How to print the page from the product control panel
4.

Touch Color Usage Job Log

Touch Print

File directory

From the Home screen, touch Administration.

Contains information for any mass
storage devices, such as flash drives,
memory cards, or hard disks, that are
installed in the device.

Touch Information.

Touch Configuration/status Pages.

Touch File Directory.

Touch Print.

Fax reports

From the Home screen, touch Administration.

Five reports show fax activity, fax calls,
billing codes, blocked fax numbers, and
speed-dial numbers.

Touch Information.

Touch Fax Reports.

NOTE: Fax reports are available only
on device models that have fax
capabilities.

Touch one of the following buttons to print the corresponding report:

◦

Fax Activity Log

◦

Fax Call Report

◦

Billing Codes Report

◦

Blocked Fax List

◦

Speed Dial List

Touch Print.

For more information, see the fax guide that came with the device.
Font lists

From the Home screen, touch Administration.

Shows which fonts are currently
installed in the device.

Touch Information.

Touch Sample Pages/Fonts.

Touch one of the following buttons to print the corresponding report:

◦

Demonstration Page

◦

RGB Samples

◦

CMYK Samples

◦

PCL Font List

◦

PS Font List

Touch Print.

NOTE:
DIMM.

ENWW

The font lists also show which fonts reside on a hard disk accessory or

Information pages

HP Easy Printer Care
Open the HP Easy Printer Care software
Use one of the following methods to open the HP Easy Printer Care software:
●

On the Start menu, select Programs, select Hewlett-Packard, select HP Easy Printer Care, and
then click Start HP Easy Printer Care.

●

In the Windows system tray (in the lower-right corner of the desktop), double-click the HP Easy
Printer Care icon.

●

Double-click the desktop icon.

HP Easy Printer Care software sections
HP Easy Printer Care software can provide information about multiple HP products that are on your
network as well as any products that are directly connected to your computer. Some of the items that
are in the following table might not be available for every product.
The Help button (?) in the upper-right corner of each page provides more detailed information about the
options on that page.
Section

Options

Device List tab

●

When you open the software, this is the
first page that appears.

NOTE: The product information appears either in list form or as icons,
depending on the setting for the View as option.

NOTE: To return to this page from any
tab, click My HP Printers in the left side
of the window.

●

The information on this tab includes current alerts for the product.

●

If you click a product in the list, the HP Easy Printer Care opens the
Overview tab for that product.

Compatible Printers

Provides a list of all the HP products that support HP Easy Printer Care software.

Find Other Printers window
Add more products to the
My HP Printers list

Click the Find Other Printers link in the Devices list to open the Find Other
Printers window. The Find Other Printers window provides a utility that detects
other network printers so that you can add them to the My HP Printers list and then
monitor those products from your computer.

Overview tab

●

Device Status section: This section shows product-identification information
and the product status. It indicates product-alert conditions, such as an empty
print cartridge. After you correct a problem with the product, click the refresh
button
in the upper-right corner of the window to update the status.

●

Supplies Status section: Shows detailed supplies status, such as the
percentage of toner remaining in the print cartridge and the status of the paper
that is loaded in each tray.

●

Supplies Details link: Opens the supplies status page to view more detailed
information about product supplies, ordering information, and recycling
information.

Contains basic status information for the
device

Devices list: Shows the products that you can select.

Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Section

Options

Support tab

●

Device Management section: Provides links to information about HP Easy
Printer Care, to advanced product settings, and to product usage reports.

●

Troubleshooting and Help: Provides links to tools that you can use to resolve
problems, to online product support information, and to online HP experts.

Settings tab

●

About: Provides general information about this tab.

Configure product settings, adjust printquality settings, and find information
about specific product features

●

General: Provides information about the product, such as the model number,
serial number, and the settings for date and time, if they are available.

●

Information Pages: Provides links to print the information pages that are
available for the product.

●

Capabilities: Provides information about product features, such as duplexing,
the available memory, and the available printing personalities. Click Change
to adjust the settings.

●

Print Quality: Provides information about print-quality settings. Click
Change to adjust the settings.

●

Trays / Paper: Provides information about the trays and how they are
configured. Click Change to adjust the settings.

●

Restore Defaults: Provides a way to restore the product settings to the factory
defaults. Click Restore to restore the settings to the defaults.

Provides links to support information

NOTE: This tab is not available for
some products.

HP Proactive Support
NOTE: This item is available from the
Overview and Support tabs.

When enabled, HP Proactive Support routinely scans your printing system to identify
potential problems. Click the more info link to configure how frequently the scans
occur. This page also provides information about available updates for product
software, firmware, and HP printer drivers. You can accept or decline each
recommended update.

Supplies Ordering button

●

Ordering list: Shows the supplies that you can order for each product. To order
a certain item, click the Order check box for that item in the supplies list. You
can sort the list by product, or by the supplies that need to be ordered the
soonest. The list contains supplies information for every product that is in the
My HP Printers list.

●

Shop Online for Supplies button: Opens the HP SureSupply Web site in a
new browser window. If you have checked the Order check box for any items,
the information about those items can be transferred to the Web site, where
you will receive information on options for purchasing your selected supplies.

●

Print Shopping List button: Prints the information for the supplies that have
the Order check box selected.

Click the Supplies Ordering button on
any tab to open the Supplies Ordering
window, which provides access to online
supplies ordering.
NOTE: This item is available from the
Overview and Support tabs.

Alert Settings link
NOTE: This item is available from the
Overview and Support tabs.

Color Access Control

ENWW

Click Alert Settings to open the Alert Settings window, in which you can configure
alerts for each product.
●

Alerting is on or off: Activates or deactivates the alerts feature.

●

Printer Alerts: Select the option to receive alerts for critical errors only, or for
any error.

●

Job Alerts: For products that support it, you can receive alerts for specific print
jobs.

Use this feature to permit or restrict color printing.

HP Easy Printer Care

Section

Options

NOTE: This item is available only for
HP color products that support Color
Access Control.
NOTE: This item is available from the
Overview and Support tabs.

Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Embedded Web server
Use the embedded Web server to view product and network status and to manage printing functions
from your computer instead of from the product control panel. The following are examples of what you
can do using the embedded Web server:
NOTE: When the printer is directly connected to a computer, use the HP Easy Printer Care to view
the printer status.
●

View product status information.

●

Set the type of media that is loaded in each tray.

●

Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones.

●

View and change tray configurations.

●

View and change the product control-panel menu configuration.

●

View and print internal pages.

●

Receive notification of product and supplies events.

●

View and change network configuration.

To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later or Netscape
6.2 or later for Windows, Mac OS, and Linux (Netscape only). Netscape Navigator 4.7 is required for
HP-UX 10 and HP-UX 11. The embedded Web server works when the product is connected to an IPbased network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based product connections. You do
not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server.
When the product is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available.
NOTE: For complete information about using the embedded Web server, see the Embedded Web
Server User Guide, which is on the product Administrator CD.

Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection
1.

In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the device IP address or host name in the
address/URL field. To find the IP address or host name, print a configuration page. See Information
pages on page 90.
NOTE: After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the
future.

The embedded Web server has four tabs that contain settings and information about the device:
the Information tab, the Settings tab, the Networking tab, and the Digital Sending tab. Click the
tab that you want to view.
See Embedded Web server sections on page 96 for more information about each tab.

ENWW

Embedded Web server

Embedded Web server sections
Tab or section

Options

Information tab

●

Device Status: Shows the device status and shows the life remaining of HP supplies,
with 0% indicating that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of
print paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click Change
Settings.

●

Configuration Page: Shows the information found on the configuration page.

●

Supplies Status: Shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0 percent indicating
that a supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers. To order new
supplies, click Shop for Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the
window.

●

Event log: Shows a list of all device events and errors.

●

Usage page: Shows a summary of the number of pages the device has printed,
grouped by size and type.

●

Device Information: Shows the device network name, address, and model
information. To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab.

●

Control Panel: Shows messages from the device control panel, such as Ready or
Sleep mode on.

●

Print: Allows you to send print jobs to the device.

Settings tab

●

Configure Device: Allows you to configure device settings. This page contains the
traditional menus found on devices using a control-panel display.

Provides the ability to configure the
device from your computer

●

E-mail Server: Network only. Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up
incoming and outgoing e-mail, as well as to set e-mail alerts.

●

Alerts: Network only. Allows you to set up to receive e-mail alerts for various device
and supplies events.

●

AutoSend: Allows you to configure the device to send automated e-mails regarding
device configuration and supplies to specific e-mail addresses.

●

Security: Allows you to set a password that must be entered to gain access to the
Settings and Networking tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the
embedded Web server.

●

Authentication Manager: Allows you to determine which device functions will
require a user to provide log-in information in order to use those functions.

●

LDAP Authentication: Allows you to configure a Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol (LDAP) server to limit device access to certain users. The LDAP server will
require a user to provide log-in information in order to gain access to the device.

●

Edit Other Links: Allows you to add or customize a link to another Web site. This
link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages.

●

Device Information: Allows you to name the device and assign an asset number to
it. Enter the name and e-mail address for the primary contact who will receive
information about the device.

●

Language: Allows you to determine the language in which to display the embedded
Web server information.

●

Date & Time: Allows time synchronization with a network time server.

●

Wake Time: Allows you to set or edit a wake time for the device.

Provides device, status, and
configuration information

Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Tab or section

Options
NOTE: The Settings tab can be password-protected. If this device is on a network,
always consult with the system administrator before changing settings on this tab.

Digital Sending tab

Use the pages on the Digital Sending tab to configure the digital-sending features.
NOTE: If the product is configured to use the optional HP Digital Sending Software, the
options on these tabs are not available. Instead, all digital-sending configuration is
performed by using the HP Digital Sending Software.

Fax tab

ENWW

●

General. Set up contact information for the system administrator.

●

Send to E-mail. Configure the e-mail settings for digital sending. You can specify
the SMTP server, the default "From" address, and the default subject. You can also
set the maximum file size that is allowed for attachments.

●

E-mail Address Book. The E-mail Address Book page enables you to add e-mail
addresses into the product one at a time, and to edit e-mail addresses that have
already been saved in the product. You can also use the Import/Export tab to load a
large list of frequently-used e-mail addresses on to the product all at once, rather
than adding them one at a time.

●

Import/Export. Use this tab to import or export .CSV files containing e-mail
addresses, fax numbers, or user records, so that they can be accessed on this
product. You can also export e-mail, fax, or user records from the device into a file
on your computer. You can then use this file as a data backup, or you can use it to
import the records onto another HP device.

●

Log. View the digital-sending activity log for the product. The log contains digitalsending job information, including any errors that occur.

●

Preferences. Configure digital-sending defaults such as the default page-size and
the default settings-reset delay. You can also configure these settings by using the
product control-panel menus.

The Fax tab contains options to configure and use the fax capabilities of the product. For
additional information about fax functions, see the Fax User Guide.
●

Use the Fax Settings screen to configure the send-to-fax features for the product.

●

The Fax Address Book page enables you to add fax numbers into the product one
at a time, and to edit fax numbers that have already been saved in the product. You
can also use the Import/Export feature on the Digital Sending tab to load a large list
of frequently-used fax numbers on to the device all at once, rather than adding them
one at a time.

●

Use the Fax Speed Dials screen to add, edit, or delete fax speed dial entries to and
from the product. You can use fax speed dials to store frequently used fax numbers
or lists of up to 100 fax numbers. Up to 100 speed dial entries can be configured.

Embedded Web server

Tab or section

Options

Networking tab

Network administrators can use this tab to control network-related settings for the device
when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not appear if the device is
directly connected to a computer, or if the device is connected to a network using anything
other than an HP Jetdirect print server.

Provides the ability to change
network settings from your
computer

NOTE: The Networking tab can be password-protected.
Other links

●

HP Instant Support™: Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions.
This service analyzes your device error log and configuration information to provide
diagnostic and support information specific to your device.

●

Shop for Supplies: Connects to the HP SureSupply Web site, where you will receive
information on options for purchasing original HP supplies, such as print cartridges
and paper.

●

Product Support: Connects to the support site for the device, from which you can
search for help regarding general topics.

Contains links that connect you to
the Internet

NOTE: You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links. If you use a
dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server,
you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that you
close the embedded Web server and reopen it.

Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Use HP Web Jetadmin software
HP Web Jetadmin is a Web-based software solution for remotely installing, monitoring, and
troubleshooting network-connected peripherals. The intuitive browser interface simplifies cross-platform
management of a wide range of devices, including HP and non-HP devices. Management is proactive,
allowing network administrators the ability to resolve issues before users are affected. Download this
free, enhanced-management software at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_software.
To obtain plug-ins to HP Web Jetadmin, click plug-ins, and then click the download link that is next to
the name of the plug-in that you want. The HP Web Jetadmin software can automatically notify you
when new plug-ins are available. On the Product Update page, follow the directions to automatically
connect to the HP Web site.
If installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin is available to any client through a supported Web
browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows or Netscape Navigator 7.1 for Linux.
Browse to the HP Web Jetadmin host.
NOTE: Browsers must be Java-enabled. Browsing from an Apple PC is not supported.

ENWW

Use HP Web Jetadmin software

Security features
Secure the embedded Web server
Assign a password for access to the embedded Web server so that unauthorized users cannot change
the product settings.
1.

Open the embedded Web server. See Embedded Web server on page 95.

Click the Settings tab.

On the left side of the window, click Security.

Type the password next to New Password, and type it again next to Verify Password.

Click Apply. Make note of the password and store it in a safe place.

Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
The Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) provides a portal on the product. By using the FIH and third-party
equipment, you can track information about copies that are made on the product.

Requirements
●

Windows 2000 or Windows XP

●

Access to third-party accounting hardware solutions, such as Equitrac or Copitrak devices

Use the FIH
To use the FIH, you must download and install the FIH software. The software is available from
www.hp.com/go/cljcm6030mfp_software and www.hp.com/go/cljcm6040mfp_software. The software is
used to enable or disable the FIH portal. Use the software to set and change the administrator personal
identification number (PIN).
Administrators can use the PIN option to configure the FIH to prevent any unauthorized changes.
Changes can be made only with the correct PIN authentication.
NOTE: It is important to remember the PIN that is assigned to the FIH administration software. The
PIN is required to make any changes to the FIH.
Enable the FIH portal
1.

Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.

Click OK.

Click Enable.

If you have not entered a PIN before, click No. If you have entered a PIN before, click Yes. If you
click No, type and confirm the PIN, and then click OK. If you click Yes, type the PIN and click
OK.
NOTE: The PIN must be numeric.

Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network. If Direct is selected,
type the product port. If Network is selected, type the IP address and port for the product.

100 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

NOTE: The IP address for the product can be found on the Configuration page.
If you typed an incorrect IP address, you will receive an error message. Otherwise, the portal is enabled.
Disable the FIH portal
1.

Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.

Click OK.

Click Disable.

Type the PIN and click OK.

Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network. If Direct is selected,
type the product port and click OK. If Network is selected, type the IP address and port for the
product, and then click OK. The portal is disabled.

NOTE: If you lose the PIN number and the portal needs to be disabled, try using the default PIN that
is listed to disable it. For assistance, use the HP Instant Support service, which is available through the
embedded Web server or at www.hp.com/go/instantsupport. See Embedded Web server on page 95.

Secure Disk Erase
To protect deleted data from unauthorized access on the product hard drive, use the Secure Disk Erase
feature. This feature can securely erase print and copy jobs from the hard drive.
Secure Disk Erase offers the following levels of disk security:
●

Non-Secure Fast Erase. This is a simple file-table erase function. Access to the file is removed,
but actual data is retained on the disk until it is overwritten by subsequent data-storage operations.
This is the fastest mode. Non-Secure Fast Erase is the default erase mode.

●

Secure Fast Erase. Access to the file is removed, and the data is overwritten with a fixed identical
character pattern. This is slower than Non-Secure Fast Erase, but all data is overwritten. Secure
Fast Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M requirements for the clearing of disk
media.

●

Secure Sanitizing Erase. This level is similar to the Secure Fast Erase mode. In addition, data is
repetitively overwritten by using an algorithm that prevents any residual data persistence. This
mode will impact performance. Secure Sanitizing Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense
5220-22.M requirements for the sanitization of disk media.

Data affected
Data affected (covered) by the Secure Disk Erase feature includes temporary files that are created
during the print and copying process, stored jobs, proof and hold jobs, disk-based fonts, disk-based
macros (forms), stored fax files, address books, and HP and third-party applications.
NOTE: Stored jobs will be securely overwritten only when they have been deleted through the
Retrieve Job menu on the product after the appropriate erase mode has been set.
This feature will not impact data that is stored on flash-based product non-volatile RAM (NVRAM) that
is used to store default settings, page counts, and similar data. This feature does not affect data that is
stored on a system RAM disk (if one is used). This feature does not impact data that is stored on the
flash-based system boot RAM.

ENWW

Security features 101

Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode does not overwrite previous data on the disk, nor does it
immediately perform a full-disk sanitization. Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode changes how the
product cleans up temporary data for jobs after the erase mode has been changed.

Gain access to Secure Disk Erase
Use HP Web Jetadmin to gain access to and set the Secure Disk Erase feature.

Additional Information
For additional information about the HP Secure Disk Erase feature, see the HP support flyer or go to
www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin/.

DSS authentication
Optional Digital Sending Software (DSS) for the product is available for purchase separately. The
software provides an advanced sending program that contains an authentication process. This process
requires users to type a user identification and a password before they can use any of the DSS features
that require authentication.

Lock the control-panel menus
To prevent someone from changing the product configuration, you can lock the control-panel menus.
This prevents unauthorized users from changing the configuration settings such as the SMTP server.
The following procedure describes how to restrict access to the control-panel menus by using the
HP Web Jetadmin software. (See Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 99.)
1.

Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.

Open the DEVICE MANAGEMENT folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate
to the DEVICE LISTS folder.

Select the product.

In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Configure.

Select Security from the Configuration Categories list.

Type a Device Password.

In the Control Panel Access section, select Maximum Lock. This prevents unauthorized users
from gaining access to configuration settings.

102 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Manage supplies
Use genuine HP print cartridges for the best printing results.

Print-cartridge storage
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes.

HP policy on non-HP print cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or
remanufactured.
CAUTION: Any damage caused by a non-HP print cartridge is not covered under the HP warranty
and service agreements.
To install a new HP print cartridge, see Change print cartridges on page 105. To recycle the used
cartridge, follow the instructions included with the new cartridge.

HP fraud hotline and Web site
Call the HP fraud hotline (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America) or go to www.hp.com/go/
anticounterfeit when you install an HP print cartridge and the control-panel message says the cartridge
is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.
Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following:

ENWW

●

You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge.

●

The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the orange pull tab is missing, or the
packaging differs from HP packaging).

Manage supplies 103

Replace supplies
When you use genuine HP supplies, the product automatically notifies you when supplies are nearly
depleted. The notification to order supplies allows ample time to order new supplies before they need
to be replaced.

Locate supplies
Supplies are identified by their labeling and their blue plastic handles.
The following figure illustrates the location of each supply item.
Figure 4-1 Supply item locations

4
5
6

Image drums

Print cartridges

Document feeder kit

Fuser

Transfer unit

Transfer roller

Supply replacement guidelines
To facilitate the replacement of supplies, keep the following guidelines in mind when setting up the
product.
●

Allow sufficient space in the front and on the right side of the product for removing supplies.

●

The product should be located on a flat, sturdy surface.

For instructions on installing supplies, see the installation guides provided with each supply item or see
more information at www.hp.com/go/cljcm6030mfp_software or www.hp.com/go/
cljcm6040mfp_software. When you connect, select Solve a Problem.

104 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

CAUTION: Hewlett-Packard recommends the use of genuine HP products in this product. Use of nonHP products may cause problems requiring service that is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard extended
warranty or service agreements.

Approximate replacement intervals for supplies
The following table lists the estimated replacement intervals for supplies and the control panel messages
that prompt when to replace each item. Usage conditions and print patterns may cause results to vary.

Item

Printer message

Page count

Approximate time period

Print cartridges

Replace Cartridge

17,000 pages1 for color

4 months for color

20,000 pages for black

5 months for black

Image drums

Replace Drum

35,000 pages1

Image transfer kit

Replace Transfer Kit

150,000 pages2

37 months

Image fuser kit

Replace Fuser Kit

100,000 pages

25 months

Roller kit

Replace Roller Kit

100,000 pages

25 months

Stapler cartridge

Replace Stapler Cartridge

5000 staples

Booklet maker staple
cartridges

Replace Staple Cartridges 2
and 3

2,000 booklets

Document feeder kit

Replace Document Feeder
Kit

60,000 pages

50 months

Approximate average A4-/letter-size page count based on 2-page jobs printed from Tray 2, with 5% coverage of individual
colors.

Approximate life is based on 4,000 pages per month.

Change print cartridges
When a print cartridge approaches the end of its useful life, the control panel displays a message
recommending that you order a replacement. The product can continue to print using the current print
cartridge until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the cartridge.
The product uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color: black (K), magenta (M),
cyan (C), and yellow (Y).
Replace a print cartridge when the control panel displays a Replace Cartridge message. The
control panel display will also indicate the color that should be replaced (if a genuine HP cartridge is
currently installed). Replacement instructions are included in the print-cartridge box.
CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot
water sets toner into fabric.
NOTE: Information about recycling used print cartridges is on the print-cartridge box.

ENWW

Replace supplies 105

Replace print cartridges
1.

Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and pull down to open.

Grasp the handle of the used print cartridge and pull out to remove.

Store the used print cartridge in a protective bag. Information about recycling used print cartridges
is on the print-cartridge box.

Remove additional print cartridges in the same manner.

106 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Remove the new print cartridge from its protective bag.

NOTE: Store the protective bag in a secure place for future use.

ENWW

Hold both sides of the cartridge and shake up and down 5-6 times.

Align the print cartridge with its slot and insert the print cartridge until it clicks into place.

Insert additional print cartridges in the same manner.

Replace supplies 107

Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and lift up to close.

To recycle the used print cartridge, follow the instructions included with the new print cartridge.

Change image drums
When an image drum approaches the end of its useful life, the control panel displays a message
recommending that you order a replacement. The product can continue to print using the current image
drum until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the image drum.
The product uses four colors and has a different image drums for each color: black (K), magenta (M),
cyan (C), and yellow (Y).
Replace an image drum when the control panel displays Replace Drum message. The controlpanel display also indicates the color that should be replaced (if a genuine HP cartridge is currently
installed). Replacement instructions are included in the image drum box.
CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot
water sets toner into fabric.
NOTE: Information about recycling used image drums is on the image drum box.

108 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Replace image drums
1.

Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and pull down to open.

With one hand, lift and slowly pull the used image drum out of the product, while supporting the
image drum with your other hand.

CAUTION: If reusing the same image drum, do not touch the green cylinder on the bottom of the
drum because it can damage the drum.

ENWW

Store the used image drum in a protective bag. Information about recycling used image drums is
on the image drum box.

Remove additional image drums in the same manner.

Replace supplies 109

Remove the new image drum from its protective bag.

NOTE: Store protective bag in a secure place for future use.
NOTE: Do not shake the image drum.
CAUTION: Do not touch the green cylinder on the bottom of the image drum because it can
damage the drum.
6.

Align the image drum with the correct slot and insert the image drum until it clicks into place. The
gray protective cover on the bottom of the drum automatically slides off as the image drum is
inserted. You can discard this cover.

Insert additional image drums in the same manner.

Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and lift up to close.

110 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

To recycle the used image drum, follow the instructions included with the new image drum.

Install memory
You can install more memory for the product.
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic
wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal
on the product.

Install DDR memory DIMMs

ENWW

Turn the product off.

Disconnect all power and interface cables.

Replace supplies 111

Locate the black formatter pressure release tabs on the formatter board in the rear of the product.

Gently press the black tabs toward each other.

Gently pull on the black tabs to pull the formatter board from the product. Place the formatter board
on a clean, flat, grounded surface.

112 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

To replace a DIMM that is currently installed, spread the latches apart on each side of the DIMM
slot, lift the DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out.

XOX
OXO
XOX
O

OXO
XOX

XOX

OXO
XOX

XOX

XO
XO
XO
XO
XO

OXO
XOX

XOX
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO

XOXOXOXOXOXO

XOXOXO

XOXOXOXOXOXO

XOXOXOXO

XO
XO
XO

XOXOXO

XO
XO
XO
XO
XO

XOXO

XOXOXO

XOXOXO
XOXOXO

XOXOXO XOXOXO

Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package. Locate the alignment notch on the bottom
edge of the DIMM.

Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an
angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated. When installed correctly, the
metal contacts are not visible.

OXO
XOX

XOX

OXO
XOX

XOX

OXO
XOX

XOX

XO
XO
XO
XO
XO

OXO
XOX

XOX
XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO

XOXOXOXOXOXO

XOXOXO

XOXOXOXOXOXO

XOXOXOXO

XO
XO
XO

XOXOXO

XO
XO
XO
XO
XO

XOXO

XOXOXO

XOXOXO
XOXOXO

XOXOXO XOXOXO

Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM.

OX
IO

OX
IO
XI

OX
IO

IO
XI

OX
IO

OX
IX

OX
IO
XI

OX
IO

XO
XO
XO
XO
XO

IO
XI

OX
IX

XO
XO
XO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO
XOXOXO

XOXOXO

XO
XO
XO

XOXOXOXO

XOXOXO

XO
XO
XO
XO
XO

XOXOXO
XOXOXO

XOXOXOXOXOXO
XOXOXOXOXOXO
XOXO
XOXOXO

XOXOXO

XOXOXO XOXOXO

NOTE: If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM, make sure the notch on the bottom of the DIMM
is aligned with the bar in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure you are using the
correct type of DIMM.

ENWW

Replace supplies 113

10. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the bottom of the slot, and then slide the board back into
the product.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the formatter board, ensure the formatter board is aligned in
the tracks.

11. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the product on.

12. To enable the new memory, go to Enable memory on page 114.

Enable memory
If you installed a memory DIMM, set the product driver to recognize the newly added memory.
Enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP
1.

On the Start menu, point to Settings, and click Printers or Printers and Faxes.

Right-click the product and select Properties.

On the Device Settings tab, click Printer Memory (in the Installable Options section).

Select the total amount of memory that is now installed.

Click OK.

114 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Install an HP Jetdirect or EIO print server card or EIO hard disk
The HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP Series are equipped with an embedded print server port. If desired,
you can install an additional I/O card in the available EIO slot.

ENWW

Turn the product off.

Disconnect all power and interface cables.

Replace supplies 115

Locate an open EIO slot. Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the
EIO slot, and then remove the cover. You will not need these screws and the cover again. They
can be discarded.

Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot.

Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card.

116 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Reconnect the power cable and remaining interface cables, and turn the product on.

Print a configuration page. In addition to a product configuration page and a Supplies Status page,
an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information
should also print.
If it does not print, turn the power to the device off and uninstall and reinstall the print server card
to ensure that it is completely seated in the slot.

Perform one of these steps:
●

Choose the correct port. See the computer or operating system documentation for
instructions.

●

Reinstall the software, choosing the network installation this time.

Replace the staple cartridge
If the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker Accessory or HP Booklet Maker/Finisher Accessory runs out of
staples while it is stapling a print job, the product automatically stops, if set to stop when out. If the
product is set to continue when out, the product will continue to print without stapling.
NOTE: Only replace the staple cartridge unit when the stapler/stacker or booklet maker has run out
of staples. Removing the staple cartridge at other times can cause an error to occur.
NOTE: When the stapler/stacker or booklet maker runs out of staples, the stapler unit will return to its
default position automatically.
Replace the staple cartridge
1.

ENWW

Open the front door of the booklet maker or stapler/stacker.

Replace supplies 117

Push up to on the staple cartridge to remove it from the booklet maker or stapler/stacker.

Insert the replacement staple cartridge unit into the stapler unit.

Push the staple cartridge unit into the stapler unit until it clicks into position.

Close the front door.

118 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Replace saddle stitch staple cartridges in the booklet maker
1.

Open the front door of the booklet maker.

Grasp the blue handle and pull the staple carriage out of the booklet maker.

Grasp the small blue handle on the staple cartridge unit and pull it toward you, then swing the staple
cartridge unit into an upright position.

2
1

ENWW

Grasp the edges of each staple cartridge and pull up firmly to remove the staple cartridges from
the staple cartridge unit.

Replace supplies 119

Unpack the new cartridges and remove the plastic packing lock from each one.

Hold the new cartridges so that the arrows on the cartridges align with the arrows on the staple
cartridge unit and insert them into the unit.

Pull the handle of the staple cartridge unit toward you and rotate it downward to its original position.
Lock it into position by pushing in the handle.

1
2
8.

Push the staple carriage back into the booklet maker finisher.

120 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Close the front door of the booklet maker.

Replace supplies 121

Clean the product
To maintain print quality, clean the product thoroughly every time you replace the print cartridge and
whenever print-quality problems occur.
WARNING! Avoid touching the fusing area when cleaning the product. It can be hot.
CAUTION: To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners
on or around the product except as directed.

Clean the outside of the product
●

Clean the outside of the product if it is visibly marked.

●

Use a soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water, or water and a mild detergent.

Clean the product interior
Component

Cleaning method

Guide for media path

Wipe with a lint-free cloth. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen
the lint-free cloth with alcohol.

Pickup roller, separation roller, feed roller, MP tray pickup
roller, MP tray separation roller, registration roller

Wipe with a lint-free cloth. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen
the lint-free cloth with alcohol.

Static charge eliminator

Clean with the brush that is attached to the upper left of the
right cover inside.

NOTE: When the secondary transfer roller unit is opened, do not touch the ITB or media sensor unit
in the ITB unit, while cleaning the component.

122 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Figure 4-2 Location of product components that require cleaning

1
2
3
4

ENWW

10 9

Pressure roller

Fuser roller

Static charge eliminator

Secondary transfer roller

MP tray pickup roller

MP tray separation roller

Front registration roller

Correction plate

Separation roller

Feed roller

Pickup roller

Media sensor roller

ITB

Clean the product 123

Clean the 3X500 sheet input tray
Component

Cleaning method

Guide for the paper path

Wipe with a lint-free cloth. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen
the lint-free cloth with alcohol.

Cassette pickup roller, cassette separation roller, and cassette
feed roller

Wipe with a lint-free cloth. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen
the lint-free cloth with alcohol.

Figure 4-3 Location of components that require cleaning
1
2

3
1

Cassette feed roller

Cassette separation roller

Cassette pickup roller

124 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Clean the IPTU
Component

Cleaning method

Guide for the paper path

Wipe with a lint-free cloth. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen
the lint-free cloth with alcohol.

IPTU feed roller

Wipe with a lint-free cloth. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen
the lint-free cloth with alcohol.

Figure 4-4 Location of IPTU components that require cleaning

1
1

IPTU feed roller

Clean the touchscreen
Clean the touchscreen whenever it is necessary to remove fingerprints or dust. Wipe the touchscreen
gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION: Use water only. Solvents or cleaners can damage the touchscreen. Do not pour or spray
water directly onto the touchscreen.

Clean the scanner glass

ENWW

●

Clean the scanner glass only if dirt is visible, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality,
such as streaking.

●

Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Use an
ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the scanner
glass.

Clean the product 125

CAUTION: Do not pour or spray liquids directly onto the scanner glass. Do not press hard on the glass
surface. (You could break the glass).

Cleaning the ADF delivery system
Clean the ADF only if it is visibly marked or dirty, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality
(such as streaking).

Clean the ADF delivery system
1.

Open the scanner lid.

Locate the white, vinyl ADF backing.

Clean the ADF backing by wiping them with a clean, damp, lint-free cloth. Use an ammonia-based
surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the ADF components.

Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Use an
ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the scanner
glass.

126 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Close the scanner lid.

Clean the ADF rollers
You should clean the rollers in the ADF if you are experiencing misfeeds or if your originals show marks
as they exit the ADF.
CAUTION: Clean the rollers only if you experience misfeeds or marks on the originals, and you notice
dust on the rollers. Cleaning the rollers frequently could introduce dust into the device.
1.

Pull the release lever to open the ADF cover.

Locate the rollers.

Wipe the rollers with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION: Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the device.

ENWW

Clean the product 127

Locate the separation pad.

Wipe the pad with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.

Close the ADF cover.

128 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

ADF maintenance kit
After feeding 60,000 pages through the ADF, a Replace Document Feeder Kit message appears on
the control-panel display. This message appears approximately one month before the kit needs to be
replaced. Order a new kit when this message appears.
The ADF maintenance kit includes the following items:
●

One pick-up roller assembly

●

One separation pad

●

An instruction sheet

Follow the instructions that come with the kit to install it.
After replacing the kit, reset the ADF maintenance-kit count.
Reset the ADF maintenance-kit count

ENWW

On the control panel, scroll to and touch Administration.

Touch Resets.

Touch Reset Supplies.

Touch ADF Maintenance Kit.

Touch Yes.

Touch Save.

ADF maintenance kit 129

Calibrate the scanner
Calibrate the scanner to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system (carriage head) for ADF
and flatbed scans. Because of mechanical tolerances, the scanner's carriage head might not read the
position of the image accurately. During the calibration procedure, scanner offset values are calculated
and stored. The offset values are then used when producing scans so that the correct portion of the
document is captured.
Scanner calibration should be carried out only if you notice offset problems with the scanned images.
The scanner is calibrated before it leaves the factory. It needs to be calibrated again only rarely.
Before calibrating the scanner, print the calibration target.
1.

Place letter- or A4-size paper in tray 1, and adjust the side guides.

On the control-panel Home screen, scroll to and touch Administration.

Touch Troubleshooting.

Touch Calibrate Scanner.

Touch Calibrate to print the first pass of the calibration target.

Place the first pass of the calibration target face-down in tray 1 so that the arrows are facing into
the product.

Touch Start to print the second pass. The final calibration target must look like the following figure.

CAUTION: If the calibration target does not look like the figure shown here, the calibration
process will fail and the quality of scans will be degraded. The black areas must extend completely
to the short edges of the page. If they do not, use a black marker to extend the black areas to the
edge of the page. Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
8.

Place the calibration target face-up into the ADF, and adjust the side guides.

After the calibration target has passed through the ADF once, reposition it face down in the ADF
and touch Start.

10. Place the calibration target face-down on the scanner glass, touch Start, and scan the page. After
this pass, the calibration is complete.

130 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Upgrade the firmware
The product has remote firmware update (RFU) capability. Use the information in this section to upgrade
the product firmware.

Determine the current firmware version
1.

From the control panel Home screen, scroll to and touch Administration.

Touch Information.

Touch Configuration/status Pages.

Touch Configuration Page.

Touch Print.

The firmware datecode is listed on the Configuration page in the section called Device Information.
The firmware datecode has this format: YYYYMMDD XX.XXX.X. The first string of numbers is the date,
where YYYY represents the year, MM represents the month, and DD represents the date. For example,
a firmware datecode of that begins with 20061125 represents November 25, 2006.

Download new firmware from the HP Web site
To find the most recent firmware upgrade for the product, go to www.hp.com/go/
cljcm6030mfp_firmware or www.hp.com/go/cljcm6040mfp_firmware. This page provides instructions
for downloading the new firmware version.

Transfer the new firmware to the product
NOTE: The product can receive an .RFU file update when it is in a "ready" state.
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the
product to re-initialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the
host computer that is sending the update. If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before
the firmware is downloaded (while Receiving Upgrade appears on the control-panel display), the
firmware file must be sent again. If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while the Performing
Upgrade message appears on the control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message
Resend Upgrade appears (in English only) on the control-panel display. In this case, you must send
the upgrade by using the parallel port. Finally, any jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are
completed before the update is processed.

Use FTP to upload the firmware through a browser
NOTE: The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory
(NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to default settings
and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults.

ENWW

Print a configuration page and note the TCP/IP address shown on the EIO Jetdirect page.

Open a browser window.

In the address line of the browser, type ftp://, where is the address
of the product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp://
192.168.0.90.

Upgrade the firmware 131

Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product.

Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.

NOTE: The product turns off and then on automatically to activate the update. When the update
process is complete, a Ready message displays on the product control panel.

Use FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection
NOTE: The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory
(NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to default settings
and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults.
1.

Take note of the IP address on the HP Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second page
that prints when you print the configuration page.
NOTE: Before upgrading the firmware, make sure that the product is not in Sleep mode. Also
make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.

Open an MS-DOS command prompt on your computer.

Type: ftp TCP/IP ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp
192.168.0.90.

Go to the folder where the firmware file is stored.

Press Enter on the keyboard.

When prompted for the user name, press Enter.

When prompted for the password, press Enter.

Type bin at the command prompt.

Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in
the command window.

10. Type put and then the file name (for example, if the file name is CM6040mfp.efn, type put
CM6040mfp.efn).
11. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take
approximately five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or
computer.
NOTE: The product automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade.
12. At the command prompt, type: bye to exit the ftp command.
13. At the command prompt, type: exit to return to the Windows interface.

132 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware
This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on your computer. See
Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 99. Complete the following steps to update a single device
through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site.
1.

Start HP Web Jetadmin.

Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.

Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the product in the list of devices,
and then click to select it.
If you need to upgrade the firmware for multiple HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP Series products,
select all of them by pressing the Ctrl key as you click the name of each product.

Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select Update
Printer Firmware from the action list.

If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images box, click Browse in the
Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you
downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.

Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server. After the
upload is complete, the browser window refreshes.

Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.

Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the product. The control
panel shows messages that indicate the progress of the upgrade. At the end of the upgrade
process, the control panel shows the Ready message.

Use MS-DOS commands to upgrade the firmware
To update the firmware by using a network connection, follow these instructions.
1.

From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following: copy /B FILENAME> \
\COMPUTERNAME>\SHARENAME>, where is the name of the .RFU file (including the
path), is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared,
and is the product share name. For example: C:\>copy /b C:\9200fW.RFU
\\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER.
NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type: C:\>copy /b "C:\MY DOCUMENTS\3500FW.RFU" \
\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER.

Press Enter on the keyboard. The control panel shows a message that indicates the progress of
the firmware upgrade. At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel shows the Ready
message . The message One File Copied appears on the computer screen.

Use the HP Jetdirect firmware
The HP Jetdirect network interface in the product has firmware that can be upgraded separately from
the product firmware. This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on

ENWW

Upgrade the firmware 133

your computer. See Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 99. Complete the following steps to update
the HP Jetdirect firmware by using HP Web Jetadmin.
1.

Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.

Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.

Select the device that you want to update.

In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update.

Under Jetdirect firmware version the HP Jetdirect model number and current firmware version
are listed. Make a note of these.

Go to www.hp.com/go/wja_firmware.

Scroll down to the list of HP Jetdirect model numbers and find the model number you wrote down.

Look at the current firmware version for the model, and see if it is later than the version you wrote
down. If it is, right-click on the firmware link, and follow the instructions on the Web page to
download the new firmware file. The file must be saved into the :\PROGRAM FILES
\HP WEB JETADMIN\DOC\PLUGINS\HPWJA\FIRMWARE\JETDIRECT folder on the computer
that is running the HP Web Jetadmin software.

In HP Web Jetadmin, return to the main device list and select the digital sender again.

10. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update again.
11. On the HP Jetdirect firmware page, the new firmware version is listed under Jetdirect Firmware
Available on HP Web Jetadmin. Click the Update Firmware Now button to update the Jetdirect
firmware.

134 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Set the real-time clock
Use the real-time clock feature to set the date and time settings. The date and time information is
attached to stored print, fax, and digital-send jobs, so you can identify the most recent versions of stored
print jobs.

Set the date format
1.

On the control panel, scroll to and touch Administration.

Touch Time/Scheduling.

Touch Date/Time.

Touch Date Format.

Touch the desired format.

Touch Save.

Set the date
1.

On the control panel, scroll to and touch Administration.

Touch Time/Scheduling.

Touch Date/Time.

Touch Date.

Touch the appropriate options to set the correct month, date of the month, and the year.

Touch Save.

Set the time format
1.

On the control panel, scroll to and touch Administration.

Touch Time/Scheduling.

Touch Date/Time.

Touch Time Format.

Touch the appropriate format.

Touch Save.

Set the time

ENWW

On the control panel, scroll to and touch Administration.

Touch Time/Scheduling.

Touch Date/Time.

Touch Time.

Set the real-time clock 135

Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.

Touch Save.

136 Chapter 4 Manage and maintain the product

ENWW

Theory of operation

●

Basic operation

●

Formatter system

●

Engine-control system

●

Laser/scanner system

●

Image-formation system

●

Pickup, feed, and delivery system

●

Jam detection

●

Optional input trays

●

Scanner component

●

ADF

137

Basic operation
All high-level processes are routed through the formatter, which stores font information, processes the
print image, and communicates with the host computer.
Basic product operation can be divided into the following systems:
●

The engine-control system, which includes the power supply and the DC controller PCA

●

The laser/scanner system, which forms the latent image on the photosensitive drum

●

The image-formation system, which transfers a toner image onto the paper

●

The paper pickup and feed system, which uses a system of rollers and belts to transport the paper
through the product.

●

Scanner and ADF functions and operations

Figure 5-1 Relationship between the main product systems
LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM

IMAGE-FORMATION SYSTEM

ENGINE CONTROL
SYSTEM

PICKUP-AND-FEED SYSTEM

OPTION

SCANNER

Sequence of operation
The DC controller PCA controls the operating sequence, as described in the following table. For detailed
information about the timing of the processes, see General timing chart on page 634.
Table 5-1 Sequence of operation
Period

Duration

Description

Waiting

From the time the power is turned on or
when the product exits Sleep mode until
the product is ready for printing

●

Pressurizes the fuser pressure
roller

●

Detects the print cartridges and
imaging drums

138 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Table 5-1 Sequence of operation (continued)
Period

Standby

Initial rotation

Printing

Last rotation

ENWW

Duration

From the end of the waiting sequence or
the last rotation until the formatter
receives a print command or until the
product is turned off

From the time the formatter receives a
print command until the paper enters the
paper path.

From the time the first sheet of paper
enters the paper path until the last sheet
has passed through the fuser

From the time the last sheet of paper
exits the fuser until the motors stop
rotating

Description
●

Detects the home position for the
intermediate-transfer belt (ITB) and
the developing unit

●

Cleans waste toner from the ITB

●

The product is in the ready state

●

The product enters Sleep mode
after the specified length of time

●

The product calibrates if it is time for
an automatic calibration.

●

Activates the high-voltage power
supply

●

Prepares each laser/scanner unit

●

Warms the fuser to the appropriate
temperature

●

Forms the image on the
photosensitive drums

●

Transfers the toner to the paper

●

Fuses the toner image onto the
paper

●

Performs calibration after a
specified number of pages

●

Moves the last printed sheet into the
output bin

●

Stops each laser/scanner unit

●

Discharges the bias from the highvoltage power supply

Basic operation 139

Formatter system
The formatter is responsible for the following procedures:
●

Controlling Sleep mode

●

Receiving and processing print data from the various product interfaces

●

Monitoring control-panel functions and relaying product-status information (through the control
panel and the network or the bidirectional interface)

●

Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA

●

Storing font information

●

Communicating with the host computer through the network or the bidirectional interface

The formatter receives a print job from the network or the bidirectional interface and separates it into
image information and instructions that control the printing process. The DC controller PCA
synchronizes the image-formation system with the paper-input and -output systems, and then signals
the formatter to send the print-image data.
The formatter also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for one EIO cards and an
additional DIMM.

Sleep mode
This feature conserves power after the product has been idle for an adjustable period of time. When the
product is in Sleep mode, the control-panel backlight is turned off, but the product retains all settings,
downloaded fonts, and macros. The default setting is for Sleep mode to be enabled, and the product
enters the Sleep mode after a 60-minute idle time. Sleep mode can also be turned off from the Reset
menu on the control panel.
The product exits Sleep mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following events occurs:
●

A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received

●

A control-panel button is pressed

●

A cover is opened

●

A paper tray is opened

●

The engine-test switch is pressed

NOTE: Product error messages override the Sleep message. The product enters Sleep mode at the
appropriate time, but the error message continues to appear.

Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
The formatter contains circuitry for Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), which modifies the
standard video dot data on its way to the DC controller PCA to produce “smoothed” line edges. The REt
can be turned on or off from the control panel or from some software programs. The default setting is
medium.
NOTE: The REt settings that are sent from software programs or printer drivers override the controlpanel settings.

140 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Input/output
The product receives print data primarily from the embedded HP Jetdirect print server. The product also
has a USB 2.0 port for connecting directly to a computer.

CPU
The formatter incorporates a 533 MHz RISC processor.

Memory
The formatter system contains the product memory, which is divided into several components. This
section describes each memory component.
NOTE: If the product encounters a problem when managing available memory, a clearable warning
message appears on the control panel.

Hard disk
The product comes standard with a 50 GB hard disk. The hard disk can permanently store fonts and
forms. It can also be used for making multiple original prints and for job-storage features.

Random-access memory
The random-access memory (RAM) contains the page, I/O buffers, and the font storage area. It stores
printing and font information received from the host system, and can also serve to temporarily store a
full page of print-image data before the data is sent to the print engine. Memory capacity can be
increased by adding a DIMM to the formatter. Note that adding memory might also increase the print
speed for complex graphics.

DIMM slot
The DIMM slot can be used to add memory or fonts.

Nonvolatile memory
The product uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store I/O and print-environment-configuration
information. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the product is turned off or disconnected.

PJL overview
The printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in addition to the standard printer
command language (PCL). With standard cabling, the product can use PJL to perform a variety of
functions, such as these:

ENWW

●

Two-way communication with the host computer through a network connection or a USB
connection. The product can inform the host about such things as the control-panel settings, and
the control-panel settings can be changed from the host.

●

Dynamic I/O switching. The product uses this switching to be configured with a host on each I/O.
The product can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full.
This can occur even when the product is offline.

Formatter system 141

●

Context-sensitive switching. The product can automatically recognize the personality (PS or PCL)
of each job and configure itself to serve that personality.

●

Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print job is
sent to the product in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are
formatted for landscape printing.

PML
The printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration and status readback through the
I/O ports.

Control panel
The formatter sends and receives product status and command data to and from a control-panel PCA.

142 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Engine-control system
The engine-control system receives commands from the formatter and interacts with the other main
systems to coordinate all product functions. It consists of the following components:
●

DC controller

●

Low-voltage power supply

●

High-voltage power supply

●

Fuser control

Figure 5-2 Engine-control system
ENGINE CONTROL

SYSTEM

DC controlle r
LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM

Low-voltage power suppl y
Formatte r

IMAGE-FORMA TION SYSTEM
High-voltage power suppl y

PICKUP-AND-FEED SYSTEM
Fuser control

ENWW

Engine-control system 143

DC controller
The DC controller provides operational commands to each of the product components, and it interacts
with the other engine-control systems and product systems to control the product operational sequence.
Figure 5-3 DC controller block diagram
Fuser unit

Fuser control

Optional paper feeders

Solenoids
See Solenoids on page 620.

144 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Table 5-2 Solenoids
Component abbreviation

Component name

SL1

Cassette pickup solenoid

SL2

Multipurpose-tray pickup solenoid

SL4

Toner-feed solenoid (yellow)

SL5

Toner-feed solenoid (magenta)

SL6

Toner-feed solenoid (cyan)

SL7

Toner-feed solenoid (black)

SL301

Duplexing-flapper solenoid (duplex models only)

Switches
See Switches on page 622.
Table 5-3 Switches
Component abbreviation

Component name

SW1

Door-open detection switch

SW4

Cassette end-plate-position detection switch

SW5

Cassette side-plate-position detection switch

SW11

Main switch
Test print switch

ENWW

Engine-control system 145

Sensors
See Sensors on page 612.
Table 5-4 Sensors
Component abbreviation

Component name

CN1

Environment sensor

Color sensor (duplex models only)

Media sensor
Color misregistration/image density sensor
ITB sensor-mark detection sensor

SR0

Vertical synchronous-position sensor

SR1

Cassette media-presence sensor

SR2

Cassette media-stack surface sensor

SR4

Cassette media-level sensor

SR5

Cassette media-feed sensor

SR6

Multipurpose-tray (MP tray) media-presence sensor

SR7

MP tray media-feed sensor

SR8

MP tray last-media sensor

SR10

ITB home-position sensor

SR11

Right door-open-detection sensor

SR13

Loop sensor

SR15

Fuser-delivery media-feed sensor

SR16

Output-bin media-full sensor

SR17

Drum home-position sensor (yellow)

SR18

Drum home-position sensor (megenta)

SR19

Drum home-position sensor (cyan)

SR20

Drum home-position sensor (black)

SR21

Developing home-position sensor (yellow and magenta)

SR22

Developing home-position sensor (cyan and black)

SR23

Toner-feed-motor rotational-count sensor (yellow, magenta, and cyan)

SR24

Toner-feed-motor rotational-count sensor (black)

SR26

Fuser home-position sensor

SR31

ITB waste-toner-full sensor

SR32

Front door-open-detection sensor

SR33

Secondary-transfer-unit cover-open-detection sensor

SR34

Fuser cover-open-detection sensor

146 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Table 5-4 Sensors (continued)
Component abbreviation

Component name

SR301

Color-sensor-disengagement sensor (duplex models only)

SR302

Duplexing media re-pickup sensor (duplex models only)

SR303

Duplexing media-feed sensor (duplex models only)

SR304

Duplexing media-reverse sensor (duplex models only)

SCN-TH1

Laser/scanner temperature sensor 1

SCN-TH2

Laser/scanner temperature sensor 2
Print-cartridge presence sensor (yellow)
Print-cartridge presence sensor (magenta)
Print-cartridge presence sensor (cyan)
Print-cartridge presence sensor (black)
Imaging-drum waste-toner-full sensor (yellow)
Imaging-drum waste-toner-full sensor (magenta)
Imaging-drum waste-toner-full sensor (cyan)
Imaging-drum waste-toner-full sensor (black)
Imaging-drum toner-level sensor (yellow)
Imaging-drum toner-level sensor (magenta)
Imaging-drum toner-level sensor (cyan)
Imaging-drum toner-level sensor (black)

Motors and fans
The product has 17 motors that drive the components in the paper-feed and image-formation systems.
See Motors on page 617. It also has nine fans that cool the interior of the product. See Fans
on page 611.
The DC controller can sense failure for all the fans and several of the motors. When this occurs, the DC
controller notifies the formatter so it can halt the printing process and provide an alert on the controlpanel display.
Table 5-5 Motors

ENWW

Abbreviation

Name

Purpose

Type

Failure detection

Pickup motor

Drives the cassette
pickup roller, the
cassette feed roller,
and the MP tray pickup
roller

Stepping motor

Registration motor

Drives the registration
roller

Stepping motor

Cassette lifter motor

Drives the cassettelifter mechanism

DC motor

Engine-control system 147

Table 5-5 Motors (continued)
Abbreviation

Name

Purpose

Type

Failure detection

Primary-transfer-roller
disengagement motor

Engages or
disengages the primary
transfer roller

Stepping motor

M10

ITB motor

Drives the ITB and the
secondary transfer
roller

DC motor

Yes

M11

Fuser motor

Drives the fuser roller,
the delivery roller, and
the fuser pressure
roller

DC motor

Yes

M12

Drum motor (Y)

Drives the
photosensitive drum
and the primary
charging roller in the
yellow imaging drum

DC motor

Yes

M13

Drum motor (M)

Drives the
photosensitive drum
and the primary
charging roller in the
magenta imaging drum

DC motor

Yes

M14

Drum motor (C)

Drives the
photosensitive drum
and the primary
charging roller in the
cyan imaging drum

DC motor

Yes

M15

Drum motor (K)

Drives the
photosensitive drum
and the primary
charging roller in the
black imaging drum

DC motor

Yes

M16

Toner-feed motor (K)

Drives the black toner
feed screws and wastetoner feed screws

Stepping motor

M17

Toner-feed motor (C,
M, Y)

Drives the yellow,
magenta, and cyan
toner feed screws and
waste-toner feed
screws

Stepping motor

M18

Developing
disengagement motor
(C, K)

Engages and
disengages the
developing rollers in
the cyan- and blackimaging drums

Stepping motor

M19

Developing
disengagement motor
(Y, M)

Engages and
disengages the
developing rollers in
the yellow- and
magenta-imaging
drums

Stepping motor

M301

Duplexing feed motor

Drives the duplexing
paper-feed roller

Stepping motor

Duplex models only

148 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Table 5-5 Motors (continued)
Abbreviation

Name

Purpose

Type

Failure detection

M302

Duplexing reverse
motor

Drives the duplexing
paper-reverse roller

Stepping motor

Duplexing re-pickup
motor

Drives the duplexing
paper re-pickup roller
and engages or
disengages the color
sensor

Stepping motor

Abbreviation

Name

Cooling area

Type

Speed

FM1

Laser/scanner cooling
fan

Laser/scanner area
and formatter

Intake

Full/half

FM2

Fuser cooling fan

Fuser

Intake

Full/half

FM3

Cartridge-area cooling
fan

Print-cartridge and
imaging-drum area

Exhaust

Full

FM4

VOC fan

Fuser

Exhaust

Full/half

FM5

Low-voltage powersupply cooling fan

Low-voltage powersupply unit

Exhaust

Full/half

FM6

Cartridge front-area
cooling fan

Print-cartridge and
imaging-drum area

Intake

Full/half

FM7

Delivery unit cooling
fan

Delivery unit

Intake

Full

FM301

Duplexing unit cooling
fan 1

Duplexing driver PCA

Intake

Full

Duplexing unit cooling
fan 2

Output bin area

Exhaust

Full/half

Duplex models only
M303
Duplex models only

Table 5-6 Fans

Duplex models only
FM302
Duplex models only

Fuser control
The fuser-control circuit controls the fuser temperature. The heaters provide the high temperatures that
melt the toner to bond it to the paper. The thermistors and thermopiles monitor the temperature inside
the fuser. The thermoswitches control the current to the heaters. If the thermistors and thermopiles

ENWW

Engine-control system 149

detect abnormally high temperatures, the thermoswitches interrupt the power to the heaters to prevent
overheating.
Figure 5-4 Fuser components
Fuser roller

FUSER HEATER

Fuser heater

FUSER TEMPERATURE

Fuser heater

Fuser control
Table 5-7 Fuser components
Type of component

Abbreviation

Name

Function

Heaters

Fuser-roller main heater

Heats the center area of the fuser
roller

Fuser-roller sub heater

Heats both ends of the fuser roller

Pressure-roller heater

Heats the pressure roller

Thermistors

TH1

Fuser-roller end thermistor

(Contact type)

TH3

Each thermistor detects the
temperature on one end of the
fuser roller.

Pressure-roller end thermistor

Each thermistor detects the
temperature on one end of the
pressure roller.

TP1

Main thermopile

Detects the temperature at the
center of the fuser roller

TP2

Sub thermopile

Detects the temperature at the
center of the pressure roller

TH2
TH4
Thermopiles
(Non-contact type)

150 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Table 5-7 Fuser components (continued)
Type of component

Abbreviation

Name

Function

Thermoswitches

TS101

Fuser-roller main thermoswitch

Controls the fuser-roller main
heater

TS102

Fuser-roller sub thermoswitch

Controls the fuser-roller sub heater

TS103

Pressure-roller thermoswitch

Controls the pressure-roller heater

(Non-contact type)

Fuser temperature-control circuit
The temperatures of the two rollers in the fuser fluctuate according to the stage of the printing process.
The DC controller sends commands to the fuser-control circuit to adjust the temperatures accordingly.
Figure 5-5 Fuser temperature-control circuit

Fuser heater

Fuser unit identification circuit
Fuser unit

ENWW

Fuser control

Engine-control system 151

Fuser over-temperature protection
To protect the fuser from excessive temperatures, the product has four layers of protective functions. If
one function fails, the subsequent functions should detect the problem.
●

●

DC controller: When a thermistor or thermopile detects a temperature above a certain threshold,
the DC controller interrupts power to the appropriate heater. Following are the thresholds for each
component:
◦

TH1: 223° C (433° F) or higher

◦

TH2: 195° C (383° F) or higher

◦

TH3: 223° C (433° F) or higher

◦

TH4: 195° C (383° F) or higher

◦

TP1: 240° C (464° F) or higher

◦

TP2: 240° C (464° F) or higher

Fuser-heater safety circuit: If the DC controller fails to interrupt the power to the heaters at the
prescribed temperatures, the fuser-heater safety circuit deactivates the triac-drive circuit and
releases the relay, which causes the heaters to stop at slightly higher temperature thresholds.
◦

TH1: 230° C (446° F) or higher

◦

TH2: 200° C (392° F) or higher

◦

TH3: 230° C (446° F) or higher

◦

TH4: 200° C (392° F) or higher

◦

TP1: 250° C (482° F) or higher

◦

TP2: 250° C (482° F) or higher

●

Current-detection protection circuit: If current flowing in each triac exceeds a specific value, the
current-detection protection circuit deactivates the triac-drive circuit and releases the relay, which
interrupts the power supply to the heaters.

●

Thermoswitch: If the temperature in the heaters is abnormally high, and the temperature the
thermoswitches exceeds a pre-specified value, the contact to the thermoswitch is broken. Breaking
this contact deactivates the triac-drive circuit and releases the relay, which interrupts the power
supply to the heaters. Following are the thresholds for each thermoswitch:
◦

TS101: 200° C (392° F) or higher

◦

TS102: 200° C (392° F) or higher

◦

TS103: 200° C (392° F) or higher

NOTE: When the thermoswitches reach this temperature, the actual temperature on the fuser rollers
is approximately 370° C (698° F).

152 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Fuser-failure detection
When the DC controller detects any of the following conditions, it determines that the fuser has failed.
It then interrupts power to the fuser heaters and notifies the formatter.
●

●

Abnormally high temperatures: Temperatures are too high for any of the following components,
at any time:
◦

TH1: 223° C (433° F) or higher

◦

TH2: 195° C (383° F) or higher

◦

TH3: 223° C (433° F) or higher

◦

TH4: 195° C (383° F) or higher

◦

TP1: 240° C (464° F) or higher

◦

TP2: 240° C (464° F) or higher

Abnormally low temperatures: Temperatures are too low at any of the following components
after the product has initialized.
◦

TH1 or TH3: 120° C (248° F) or lower

◦

TP1 or TP2: 140° C (284° F) or lower

Or, the temperature drops in either of the thermopiles (TP1 and TP2) by 30° C (86° F) or more
within a specified length of time.
●

Abnormal temperature rise: The temperature-detection sensors do not reach a predefined
temperature within a specified length of time after the fuser heaters are turned on.

●

Temperature-detection-sensor failure 1: The converted analog-to-digital value of each
temperature detection sensor is abnormal.

●

Temperature-detection-sensor failure 2: The difference in temperature between pairs of
thermistors or thermopiles is greater than a predetermined amount. Following are the temperature
differences for each pair:
◦

Between TP1 and TP2: 20° C (68° F) or more

◦

Between TH1 and TH3 (fuser-roller ends): 30° C (86° F) or more

◦

Between TH2 and TH4 (pressure-roller ends): 25° C (70° F) or more

●

Drive-circuit failure: The power-supply frequency is out of the specified range when the product
is initializing or in standby mode. The specified range is between 40 and 70Hz.

●

Fuser discrepancy: The fuser-ID voltage does not match the power-supply voltage when the
product is turned on or when the right door is closed.

Fuser identification
Whenever the product is turned on or when the right door is closed, the DC controller detects whether
the fuser is present and whether the fuser is for a 110-volt model or a 220-volt model.

ENWW

Engine-control system 153

Fuser-life detection
The fuser is rated to print a certain number of pages. When a new fuser is installed, the DC controller
receives a signal and directs the formatter to set the fuser count to zero. As pages are printed, the
formatter increments the fuser count. When the page count reaches a certain threshold, the formatter
sends a message to the control panel to alert the customer to order a new fuser. When the maximum
number of pages has printed, the formatter sends a message to the control panel to prompt the customer
to replace the fuser.

Relay-failure detection
If a fuser relay fails, the DC controller detects the failure and notifies the formatter. The DC controller
checks for signals from the relays when the product is turned on or when it comes out of Sleep mode.

Low-voltage power supply
The low-voltage power-supply circuit converts the AC power from the wall receptacle into the DC voltage
that the product components use. This is a universal power supply that accepts 110 Volt or 220 Volt
input.
Figure 5-6 Low-voltage power-supply circuit

Fuser control
Fuser unit

154 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

The low-voltage power supply converts the AC power into three DC voltages, which are then subdivided,
as described in the following table.
Table 5-8 Converted DC voltages
Main DC voltage

Sub-voltage

Behavior

+24 V

+24VA

Constantly supplied

+24VB

Interrupted when the front door or right
door is opened
Stopped during Sleep (powersave)
mode

+5 V

+24VC

Stopped during Sleep (powersave)
mode

+5VA

Stopped during Sleep (powersave)
mode

+5VB

Interrupted when the front door or right
door is opened
Stopped during Sleep (powersave)
mode

+3.3 V

none

Constantly supplied

Overcurrent/overvoltage protection
The low-voltage power supply stops supplying the DC voltage to the product components whenever it
detects excessive current or abnormal voltage from the power source.

Safety
For personal safety, the low-voltage power supply interrupts power to the fuser, the high-voltage power
supply, and the motors whenever the front door or right door is opened.

Voltage detection
The DC controller monitors the input voltage from the power source so it can control the voltage to the
fuser. If the input voltage is out of range, the DC controller notifies the formatter that the low-voltage
power supply has failed.

Sleep (powersave) mode
Sleep mode conserves energy by stopping the power to several components when the product is idle.
If the DC controller detects voltage that is too high when the product is in Sleep mode, it determines
that the low-voltage power supply has failed, and it notifies the formatter.

High-voltage power supply
The high-voltage power supply delivers the high-voltage biases to the following components that are
used to transfer toner during the image-formation process:

ENWW

●

Primary-charging roller

●

Developing roller

Engine-control system 155

●

Primary-transfer roller

●

Secondary-transfer roller

●

Fuser roller

●

Static-charge eliminator

Figure 5-7 High-voltage power supply circuits
DC controller

High-voltage power supply A

DEV1

DEV2

DEV4

PRI1

PRI3
PRI2

PRI4

DEV3

Developing highvoltage
generation circuit

Primary charging
high-voltage
generation circuit

Fuser roller

Pressure roller

Imaging drum

Photosensitive drum

Static charge eliminator

Primary transfer roller

Primary transfer
high-voltage
generation circuit

Secondary transfer
high-voltage
generation circuit

Static charge
eliminator
high-voltage
generation circuit

FSR

DIS

Secondary
transfer
roller

2TR

1TR1

1TR2

1TR3

1TR4

ITB

Fuser roller
high-voltage
generation circuit

High-voltage power supply B

The high-voltage power supply contains several separate circuits.
Table 5-9 High-voltage power supply circuits
Circuit

Description

Primary-charging-bias generation

DC negative bias is applied to the surface of the photosensitive drum in each imaging
drum to prepare it for image formation.

Developing-bias generation

DC negative bias is used to adhere the toner to each photosensitive drum during the
image-formation process.

Primary-transfer-bias generation

DC positive bias is used to transfer the latent toner image from each photosensitive
drum onto the ITB.

156 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Table 5-9 High-voltage power supply circuits (continued)

ENWW

Circuit

Description

Secondary-transfer-bias generation

Two DC biases, one positive and one negative, are used to transfer the toner from
the ITB onto the paper.

Static-charge-eliminator-bias generation

DC negative bias is used to reduce the electrical charge on the paper after the
secondary-transfer process.

Fuser-roller-bias generation

DC negative bias is applied to the fuser roller to remove any toner that adheres to
the roller after fusing.

Engine-control system 157

Laser/scanner system
The laser/scanner system forms the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drums inside each
of the imaging drums. The product has two laser/scanners: one for yellow and magenta and the other
for cyan and black.
The DC controller receives instructions from the formatter regarding the image of the page to be printed.
The DC controller signals the lasers to emit light, and the laser beams pass through lenses and onto
the scanner mirror, which rotates at a constant speed. The mirror reflects the beam onto the
photosensitive drum in the pattern required for the image, exposing the surface of the drum so it can
receive toner.
Figure 5-8 Laser/scanner system

Scanner mirror

BD sensor

Scanner motor unit
Laser driver

Black laser

BD INPUT signal

LASER CONTROL signal

VIDEO signal

SCANNER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL signal

Cyan laser

Photosensitive drum (C)
Photosensitive drum (Bk)
DC controller

Formatter

158 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

The DC controller determines that a laser/scanner has failed when any of the following conditions
occurs:

ENWW

●

Laser failure: The detected laser intensity does not match a specified value when the product
initializes.

●

Beam-detect (BD) failure: The BD interval is outside of a specified range during printing.

●

Scanner-motor failure: The scanner motor does not reach a specified rotation speed within a
certain time after it begins rotating.

Laser/scanner system 159

Image-formation system
The image-formation system creates the printed image on the paper. It consists of the laser/scanners,
print cartridges, imaging drums, ITB, and fuser.
Figure 5-9 Image-formation system

Laser beam
Photosensitive drum

Laser/scanner unit

Fuser roller
Pressure roller

Print cartridge

Primary transfer roller
Imaging drum
K

ITB

DC controller

160 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

Secondary transfer roller

High-voltage power supply A/B

ENWW

Image-formation process
The image formation system consists of ten steps that are divided into six functional blocks.
Figure 5-10 Image-formation process
Media path
Delivery

Direction of the drum rotation
Block

Fuser

Latent image formation
Step

8. Fuser

3. Laser beam exposure
2. Primary charging
4. Development

1. Pre-exposure

M
C Drum cleaning
10. Drum cleaning

Development
Transfer
7. Separation

5. Primary transfer
6. Secondary transfer
9. ITB cleaning
ITB cleaning

Registration

Pickup
Functional block

Steps

Description

Latent image formation

1. Pre-exposure

An invisible latent image is formed on the
surface of the photosensitive drums.

2. Primary charging
3. Laser-beam exposure
Development

4. Development

Toner adheres to the electrostatic latent
image on the photosensitive drums.

Transfer

5. Primary transfer

The toner image is transferred to the ITB
and subsequently to the paper.

6. Secondary transfer
7. Separation

ENWW

Fusing

8. Fusing

The toner is fused to the paper to make
a permanent image.

ITB cleaning

9. ITB cleaning

Residual toner is removed from the ITB.

Drum cleaning

10. Drum cleaning

Residual toner is removed from the
photosensitive drums.

Image-formation system 161

Step 1: Pre-exposure
Light from the pre-exposure LED strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum to remove any residual
electrical charges from the drum surface.
Figure 5-11 Pre-exposure
LED

Photosensitive drum

Step 2: Primary charging
The primary-charging roller contacts the photosensitive drum and charges the drum with negative
potential.
Figure 5-12 Primary charging
Primary charging roller

DC bias
Photosensitive drum

162 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Step 3: Laser-beam exposure
The laser beam strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum in the areas where the image will be
formed. The negative charge is neutralized in those areas, which are then ready to accept toner.
Figure 5-13 Laser-beam exposure
Laser beam

Unexposed area

Exposed area

Step 4: Development
Toner inside the print cartridge acquires a negative charge as the developing cylinder contacts the
developing blade. Because the negatively charged surface of the photosensitive drums have been
neutralized where they have been struck by the laser beam, the toner adheres to those areas on the
drums. The latent image becomes visible on the surface of each drum.
Figure 5-14 Development
Blade

Developing cylinder

Unexposed area

Exposed area

DC bias
Unexposed area

Exposed area

Photosensitive drum

ENWW

Image-formation system 163

Step 5: Primary transfer
The positively charged primary-transfer rollers contact the ITB, giving the ITB a positive charge. The
ITB attracts the negatively charged toner from the surface of each photosensitive drum, and the
complete toner image is transferred onto the ITB, beginning with yellow, then magenta, cyan, and black.
Figure 5-15 Primary transfer

Photosensitive
drum

ITB
Primary transfer roller
DC bias

Step 6: Secondary transfer
The paper acquires a positive charge from the secondary transfer roller, and so it attracts the negatively
charged toner from the surface of the ITB. The complete toner image is transferred onto the paper.
Figure 5-16 Secondary transfer
Media
ITB

Secondary transfer opposed roller

Secondary transfer roller

DC bias

164 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Step 7: Separation
The stiffness of the paper causes it to separate from the ITB as the ITB bends. The static charge
eliminator removes excess charge from the paper to ensure that the toner is fused correctly.
Figure 5-17 Separation
Media
Static charge eliminator

ITB

Secondary transfer opposed roller

DC bias
Secondary transfer roller

Step 8: Fusing
To create the permanent image, the paper passes through a set of heated, pressurized rollers to melt
the toner onto the page. The fuser roller has a negative DC bias to prevent the negatively-charged toner
from being attracted to the roller, which would decrease print quality.
Figure 5-18 Fusing

Fuser rolle r
Pressure roller

Halogen heater

Toner
Media
DC bias

ENWW

Image-formation system 165

Step 9: ITB cleaning
After the paper separates from the ITB, the cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner from the surface
of the ITB, preparing it for the next image. The waste toner feed screw picks up the residual toner and
deposits it in the waste toner container inside the imaging drum.
Figure 5-19 ITB cleaning
Cleaning blade

Waste toner feed screw

ITB
Sweeper strip

Step 10: Drum cleaning
Inside the imaging drum, the cleaning blade removes the residual toner from the surface of the
photosensitive drum to prepare it for the next image. The waste toner feed screw picks up the residual
toner and deposits it in the waste toner container inside the imaging drum.
Figure 5-20 Drum cleaning
Waste toner feed screw

Sweeper strip

Cleaning blade

Photosensitive
drum

166 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Print cartridge
The product has four print cartridges, one for each color. Each print cartridge contains a reservoir of
toner and the following components:
●

Toner feed screw

●

Toner stirrer

●

Memory tag

Figure 5-21 Print-cartridge system

Print cartridge

The toner feed screw rotates, picks up the toner particles, and transports them into the imaging drum.
The toner stirrer rotates at the same time as the toner feed screw to keep the toner particles from sticking
to each other.
The memory tag is a non-volatile memory chip that stores information about the usage for the print
cartridge.

ENWW

Image-formation system 167

The DC controller notifies the formatter of an error if any of the following conditions exist:
●

If the memory tag fails to either read to or write from the DC controller

●

If any of the print-cartridge presence sensors do not detect the presence of the print cartridge

●

If the toner level in any of the print cartridges drops below a certain level

●

If the toner feed motor is rotating but the rotational-count sensor does not increment the rotation
count after a specified length of time. This condition indicates a failure in the toner-feed motor.

Imaging drum
The product has four imaging drums, one for each color. Each imaging drum contains the following
components:
●

Photosensitive drum

●

Primary charging roller

●

Developing roller

●

Toner feed roller

168 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

●

Toner feed screw

●

Waste toner feed screw

DRUM HOME-POSITION signal

DEVELOPING HOME-POSITION signal

Figure 5-22 Imaging-drum system

Developing home-position sensor

Drum home-position sensor

Print cartridge

The drum motor causes the photosensitive drum to rotate. That rotation cause the primary charging
roller to rotate. The drum motor also drives the toner feed screw, the toner feed roller, and the developing
roller to transfer toner from the print cartridge into the imaging drum.
The toner feed motor drives the waste toner feed screw, which removes the waste toner and transports
it to the waste toner container.
The memory tag is a non-volatile memory chip that stores information about the usage for the imaging
drum.

ENWW

Image-formation system 169

The DC controller notifies the formatter of an error if any of the following conditions exist:
●

If the memory tag fails to either read to or write from the DC controller

●

If the toner level in any of the waste toner containers reaches a certain level

●

If any of the drum-presence sensors do not detect the presence of the imaging drum

●

If any of the imaging drums are installed incorrectly.

●

If the number of pages printed with the current imaging drum reaches a predetermined level

●

If the level of toner in the imaging drum is not at a predetermined level while the print cartridge is
feeding toner to the imaging drum. This indicates a toner feed failure.

●

If the toner-level sensor detects a level of toner that is outside of a certain range during the print
operation. This indicates a toner-level sensor failure.

Developing roller engagement and disengagement
The product can print in full-color mode or in black-only mode. To print in black only, the developing
rollers in the cyan, magenta, and yellow imaging drums are disengaged. This maximizes the life of those
three imaging drums.
Figure 5-23 Developing roller engagement and disengagement control
Developing disengagement motor (C, Bk)

Developing disengagement motor (Y, M)

SR22:
Developing home-position sensor (C, Bk)

M18

SR21:
Developing home-position sensor (Y, M)

M19

Developing roller

Developing roller
disengagement cam

Photosensitive drum
Bk

Engaged

Disengaged

Y
Disengaged

The DC controller rotates the developing disengagement motor and changes the direction of the cam
according to the instructions from the formatter for each print job.
When the product is turned on and at the end of each print job, all four of the developing rollers disengage
from the photosensitive drums. If the next print job is full-color, then each of the developing rollers
engage. If the next print job is black only, then only the black developing roller engages.
If the DC controller does not detect any output from the developing home-position sensor, it determines
that the developing disengagement motor has failed.

170 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit
The ITB unit accepts the toner images from the photosensitive drums and transfers the completed image
to the paper. The ITB unit has these main components:
●

ITB

●

ITB feed roller

●

ITB-driven roller

●

Primary transfer rollers

The ITB motor drives the ITB feed roller, which rotates the ITB. The motion of the ITB causes the primary
transfer rollers to rotate.
Figure 5-24 ITB unit

NEW ITB UNIT signal

ITB MOTOR DRIVE signal

ITB sensor mark

ITB UNIT PRESENCE signal

WASTE TONER FULL
signal

ITB SENSOR MARK DETECTION signal

DC controller

ITB

M10
ITB motor

ITB feed roller

ITB sensor mark detection sensor

Primary transfer roller

ITB driven roller

Primary-transfer-roller engagement and disengagement
Depending on the requirements of the print job, the primary transfer rollers engage with the ITB so it
can receive toner from the photosensitive drums. There are three states of roller engagement.

ENWW

Image-formation system 171

Table 5-10 Primary-transfer-roller engagement states
All rollers disengaged

This is the home position for the ITB unit.

Black roller engaged

This is the state for a black-only print job.

All rollers engaged

This is the state for a full-color print job.

The primary-transfer-roller disengagement motor rotates or reverses to place the primary-transfer-roller
disengagement cam into one of three positions. The cam causes the transfer roller slide plate to move
to the right or left, which causes the primary transfer rollers to move up to engage the ITB with the
photosensitive drum or down to disengage it.
If the DC controller does not receive the expected signal from the ITB home-position sensor during the
primary-transfer-roller engagement or disengagement operation, but the primary-transfer-roller

172 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

disengagement motor is rotating, it determines that the primary-transfer-disengagement mechanism
has failed, and it notifies the formatter.
Figure 5-25 Three states of primary-transfer-roller engagement and disengagement
DC controller
TRANSFER ROLLER DISENGAGEMENT
MOTOR CONTROL signal

ITB HOME-POSITION signal

<4 colors are disengaged>
Photosensitive drum

Primary transfer roller
disengagement motor

SR10:
ITB home-position sensor

ITB

Transfer roller disengagement cam

Transfer roller slide plate

Primary transfer roller

<4 colors are engaged>

ITB unit detection
The DC controller monitors several signals from the ITB unit to detect status.
Table 5-11 ITB unit detection
ITB unit life detection

When a specified number of pages have been printed since an ITB unit was installed,
the DC controller alerts the formatter that the ITB unit is at the end of its life.

ITB unit waste toner full detection

When any of the waste-toner containers collect a specified level of toner, the DC
controller alerts the formatter that the imaging drum needs to be replaced.

ITB unit presence detection

ENWW

Image-formation system 173

Table 5-11 ITB unit detection (continued)
ITB perimeter detection

To ensure that the toner image is placed correctly on each page, the DC controller
uses the ITB sensor marks on the surface of the ITB. It adjusts the paper re-pickup
timing based on this position.

ITB sensor-mark detection-sensorfailure detection

If the DC controller cannot detect the ITB sensor marks, it determines that the ITB
sensor-mark detection-sensor has failed, and it notifies the formatter.

174 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Secondary-transfer-roller unit
The secondary-transfer-roller unit transfers the toner image from the ITB surface onto the paper. The
ITB motor drives the secondary transfer roller, and the registration motor drives the registration roller.
To ensure that the toner image is placed correctly on each page, the DC controller stops the registration
motor when the leading edge of the paper passes the vertical synchronous position sensor. It holds the
paper in this position until the ITB is in the correct position, according to the ITB perimeter detection, to
align the toner image with the paper.
When the product is turned on, when it is coming out of Sleep mode, or after a door has been closed,
DC bias is applied to the secondary transfer roller. If no current is detected, the DC controller determines
that the secondary-transfer-roller unit is not present, and it notifies the formatter.
The DC controller can detect when a new secondary-transfer-roller unit has been installed. After a
specified number of pages have been printed since a new secondary-transfer-roller unit has been
installed, the DC controller notifies the formatter that the secondary-transfer-roller unit is reaching the
end of its life.
Figure 5-26 Secondary-transfer-roller unit

Calibration
The product calibrates itself to maintain excellent print quality. It correct color misregistration and colordensity variation.

ENWW

Image-formation system 175

During calibration, the product places a specific pattern of toner on the surface of the ITB. Sensors at
the end of the ITB read the toner pattern to determine if adjustments are necessary.
Figure 5-27 Toner patterns for calibration
Color misregistration/image density sensor

ITB

Pattern image

Color-misregistration contol
Internal variations in the imaging drums or the laser/scanners can cause the toner images to become
misaligned. The color misregistration control corrects the following problems:
●

Horizontal scanning start position

●

Horizontal scanning magnification

●

Vertical scanning start position

This calibration occurs at these times:
●

The product is turned on, or the front door is closed, after replacing an imaging drum.

●

The product is turned on, or the right door is closed, after replacing the ITB.

●

A specified number of pages have been printed.

●

The temperature in the laser/scanner unit area changes, which is a predictor of color
misregistration.

●

The user requests a calibration by using the control-panel menus

If data from the color misregistration and image-density sensors is outside a specified range when the
product is turned on or when it is beginning the calibration sequence, the DC controller determines that
these sensors have failed, and it notifies the formatter.

176 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Image stabilization control
Environmental changes or deterioration of the photosensitive drums and toner can cause variations in
the image density. The image stabilization control reduces these fluctuations. There are three kinds of
image stabilization controls.
Table 5-12 Image stabilization controls
Environment change control

Image density control (DMAX)

Image halftone control (DHALF)

ENWW

The DC controller monitors environmental information from internal and external
temperature and humidity sensors. It adjusts the high-voltage bias to accommodate
environmental changes. This control is performed under the following
circumstances:
●

The product is turned on.

●

The imaging drum is replaced.

●

A change in environmental conditions occurs.

This control corrects variations in image density that are related to deterioration of
the photosensitive drum or the toner. The DC controller adjusts the high-voltage
biases to correct the problem under the following conditions:
●

The thermistor detects a temperature that is too low when the product is turned
on.

●

The product is turned on, or the front door is closed, after replacing an imaging
drum.

●

The product is turned on, or the right door is closed, after replacing the ITB.

●

A specified number of pages have been printed.

The formatter performs this control to calibrate the halftone, based on the halftonedensity measurements, under the following conditions:
●

The thermistor detects a temperature that is too low when the product is turned
on.

●

The product is turned on, or the front door is closed, after replacing an imaging
drum.

●

The product is turned on, or the right door is closed, after replacing the ITB.

●

A specified number of pages have been printed.

Image-formation system 177

Pickup, feed, and delivery system
The pickup, feed, and delivery system uses a series of rollers to move the paper through the product.
The duplexing flapper solenoid (SL301) controls the position of the duplexing flapper to feed the paper
into the duplexing unit.
Figure 5-28 Switches and sensors for the pickup, feed, and delivery system

Fuser roller

Table 5-13 Switches and sensors for the pickup, feed, and delivery system
Abbreviation

Component

SR0

Vertical synchronous position sensor

SR1

Cassette paper-presence sensor

SR2

Cassette paper-stack surface sensor

SR4

Cassette paper-level sensor

SR5

Cassette paper-feed sensor

SR6

Multipurpose tray paper-presence sensor

SR7

Multipurpose tray paper-feed sensor

SR8

Multipurpose tray last paper sensor

SR13

Loop sensor

178 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Table 5-13 Switches and sensors for the pickup, feed, and delivery system (continued)

ENWW

Abbreviation

Component

SR15

Fuser delivery paper-feed sensor

SR16

Output-bin full sensor

SR302

Duplexing paper re-pickup sensor

SR303

Duplexing paper-feed sensor

SR304

Duplexing paper-reverse sensor

SW4

Cassette end-plate position switch

SW5

Cassette side-plate position switch

Paper sensor

Pickup, feed, and delivery system 179

Figure 5-29 Motors and solenoids for the pickup, feed, and delivery system

K
K

C
M

Table 5-14 Motors and solenoids for the pickup, feed, and delivery system
Abbreviation

Component

Pickup motor

Registration motor

Cassette lifter motor

M10

ITB motor

M11

Fuser motor

M301

Duplexing re-pickup motor

M302

Duplexing feed motor

M303

Duplexing reverse motor

SL1

Cassette pickup solenoid

180 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Table 5-14 Motors and solenoids for the pickup, feed, and delivery system (continued)
Abbreviation

Component

SL2

Multipurpose tray pickup solenoid

SL301

Duplexing flapper solenoid

The pickup, feed, and delivery system can be divided into three units:
●

Pickup-and-feed unit

●

Fuser and delivery unit

●

Duplexing unit

Figure 5-30 Three main units of the pickup, feed, and delivery system

Fuser/delivery unit

Duplexing unit

ITB

Pickup/feed unit

Pickup-and-feed unit
The pickup-and-feed unit picks an individual sheet of paper from the multipurpose tray or the cassettes,
carries it through the secondary-transfer unit, and feeds it into the fuser.

ENWW

Pickup, feed, and delivery system 181

Table 5-15 Main operations within the pickup-and-feed system
Operation

Steps

Cassette pickup

Paper-size and cassette-presence detection

Lift operation

Paper-level and paper-presence detection

Multiple-feed prevention

Paper-presence detection

Last paper detection

Skew-feed prevention

Paper detection

Feed-speed control

Multipurpose tray pickup

Paper feed

182 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Cassette pickup
The sequence of steps for the cassette tray pickup operation is the following:
1.

When the product is turned on or the tray is pushed closed, the lifting mechanism lifts the paper
stack so it is ready.

After receiving a print command from the formatter, the DC controller rotates the pickup motor,
which causes the cassette pickup roller, cassette feed roller, and cassette separation roller to
rotate.

The DC controller drives the cassette pickup solenoid, which rotates the cassette pickup cam. As
the pickup cam rotates, the pickup arm moves down, the cassette pickup roller touches the surface
of the paper stack, and it picks up one sheet of paper.

Figure 5-31 Cassette-pickup mechanism

PICKUP MOTOR
CONTROL signal

CASSETTE PICKUP
SOLENOID DRIVE signal

DC controller

Pickup motor

1. The pickup cam rotates
2. The pickup arm goes down

Cassette feed roller

SL1
Cassette pickup
solenoid

Cassette pickup arm

Cassette pickup roller

Cassette separation roller

Cassette pickup cam

3. The cassette pickup roller
picks one sheet of paper

Cassette paper-size and cassette-presence detection
The cassette end-plate detection switch and the cassette side-plate detection switch detect the size of
the paper that is loaded in the cassette. Each of these switches contains three sub-switches.
The DC controller compares the paper length that is detected by the vertical-synchronous-position
sensor to the detected size and to the size that is specified for the print job. If they do not match, the
DC controller notifies the formatter.

ENWW

Pickup, feed, and delivery system 183

The cassette end-plate detection switch also detects whether the cassette is present. If all three of its
switches are off, the DC controller determines that the cassette is absent.
Figure 5-32 Cassette paper-size detection switches

Top switch (CSTOUT)

Center switch (CSTW0)

Bottom switch (CSTW1)

Bottom switch (CSTL0)

Center switch (CSTL1)

Top switch (CSTL2)

DC controller

SW5

SW4

Table 5-16 Switch states for paper-size detection
Cassette end-plate detection switch (SW4)

Cassette side-plate detection switch (SW5)

Paper size
Top switch

Center switch

Bottom switch

Top switch1

Center switch

Bottom switch

Off

On or off

Off

On or off

Off

Letter

Off

On or off

Off

On or off

Off

Executive

Off

On or off

Off

Letter-R

Off

On or off

Off

A4-R

Off

On or off

Off

Legal

Off

On or off

Off

184 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Table 5-16 Switch states for paper-size detection (continued)
B4

Off

On or off

Off

On or off

Off

Ledger

Off

On or off

Off

Cassette
absence

Off

The top side-plate detection switch controls the lifter mechanism. When the switch is on, the lifting plate moves up. When it
is off, the lifting plate moves down. Its position has no effect on paper-size detection.

Cassette lift operation
When the product is turned on, when the cassette is inserted, or as the paper level in the cassette
decreases, the cassette lift mechanism raises the plate to keep the surface of the stack high enough so
the pickup roller can reach it.

ENWW

The DC controller rotates the cassette-lifter motor to raise the lift plate.

When the paper-stack surface sensor detects the paper surface, the DC controller stops rotating
the cassette-lifter motor. If the sensor no longer detects paper, the DC controller begins rotating
the motor again.

Pickup, feed, and delivery system 185

If the paper-stack surface sensor does not detect the paper within a specified time after the lifter motor
begins rotating, the DC controller notifies the formatter that the lifter motor has failed.
Figure 5-33 Cassette lift mechanism

SR2:
Cassette media stack surface sensor

CASSETTE MEDIA
PRESENCE signal

CASSETTE MEDIA
STACK SURFACE
signal

CASSETTE LIFTER
MOTOR CONTROL signal

DC controller

SR1:
Cassette media presence sensor

M7:
Cassette lifter motor
Cassette media presence sensor lever
Cassette media stack surface sensor lever
Lifting plate
Lifter

Cassette paper-level and paper-presence detection
The height of the paper-lift plate in the cassette indicates the paper level. The paper-level sensor, which
is at the end of the lifter motor, monitors the rotations of the motor and calculates the paper level. It
reports the paper level to the DC controller in the following increments:
●

No paper

●

Less than 10%

●

Between 10% and 20%

●

Between 20% and 40%

●

More than 40%

186 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

The cassette media-presence sensor detects whether paper is in the cassette.
Figure 5-34 Paper-level-detection mechanism

CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR
CONTROL signal

CASSETTE MEDIA LEVEL signal

DC controller

SR4:
Cassette media level sensor

M7:
Cassette lifter motor

Lifting plate

Multifeed prevention
In each of the cassettes and in the multipurpose tray, a separation roller prevents multiple sheets of
paper from entering the paper path. The separation roller is driven by the rotation of the feed roller, but

ENWW

Pickup, feed, and delivery system 187

it is equipped with a torque limiter that counteracts this rotation when more than one sheet of paper is
between the two rollers.
Figure 5-35 Multifeed prevention
Cassette feed roller
Cassette pickup roller
Rotational force transmitted from
the cassette feed roller

Media
Cassette separation roller

Rotational force transmitted from
the cassette pickup motor through
the torque limiter

Multipurpose tray pickup
The multipurpose tray paper-presence sensor detects whether paper is in the tray. If no paper is present,
the DC controller notifies the formatter. The print operation is not performed until paper is in the tray.
The sequence of steps for the multipurpose tray pickup operation as follows:
1.

After receiving a print command from the formatter, the DC controller reverses the pickup motor,
which causes the multipurpose tray separation roller to rotate.

The DC controller turns on the multipurpose tray pickup solenoid, causing the multipurpose tray
pickup roller to rotate.

188 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

The lifting plate rises to meet the rotating pickup roller, and paper is picked from the stack.

The multipurpose tray separation roller isolates a single sheet of paper in case more than one sheet
was picked. The single sheet of paper is fed into the product. This mechanism is the same as for
the cassette pickup operation.

Figure 5-36 Multipurpose tray pickup mechanism

MP TRAY MEDIA
PRESENCE signal

PICKUP MOTOR
CONTROL signal

MP TRAY PICKUP SOLENOID
DRIVE signal

DC controller

Media

Pickup motor
MP tray pickup solenoid
SL2

SR6
MP tray pickup roller
Lifting plate

MP tray separation roller

SR6: MP tray media presence sensor

Multipurpose tray last-paper detection
Because the paper path between the multipurpose tray paper-presence sensor and the registration roller
is short, the product attempts to form the next image before the DC controller detects that the tray is
empty. To prevent the image from being formed on the photosensitive drum and wasting toner, the
multipurpose tray last-paper sensor detects the empty tray before the image-formation process begins.
As the last sheet of paper is picked up, the multipurpose tray last-paper detection roller rotates. It does
not rotate if two or more sheets are in the tray. The multipurpose tray last-paper sensor detects the

ENWW

Pickup, feed, and delivery system 189

moving roller, and it sends a signal to the DC controller. The DC controller notifies the formatter so it
can temporarily disable the image-formation process.
Figure 5-37 Multipurpose tray last-paper detection

Paper feed
After the pickup operation, the paper is fed through the product and into the fuser.
1.

The paper passes through the feed rollers. The registration shutter aligns the paper correctly to
prevent skewed printing.

When the vertical synchronous position sensor detects the leading edge of the paper, the
registration motor stops, and the paper movement pauses while the image on the ITB is timed to
align with the leading edge of the paper.

190 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

While the paper is paused, the media sensor detects the type of paper.

When the timing is correct, the registration motor begins rotating again to feed the paper through
the secondary transfer unit and into the fuser.

Figure 5-38 Paper-feed mechanism

Fuser unit

ENWW

Pickup, feed, and delivery system 191

Skew-feed prevention
The product can straighten the paper without slowing the feed operation.
1.

As the paper enters the paper path, the leading edge strikes the registration shutter, but the paper
does not pass through the shutter, so it is straightened.

The feed rollers keep pushing the paper, creating a force on the leading edge against the
registration shutter.

When the force is great enough, the registration shutter opens and the paper passes through.

Figure 5-39 Skew-feed prevention
1
Registration shutter

dia

192 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Paper-type detection
The product can detect the type of paper in the paper path, and it adjusts the print mode accordingly.
The product uses two types of media sensors:
●

Reflection: Detects the glossiness of the paper

●

Transmission: Detects the thickness of the paper

Figure 5-40 Media sensor unit

Media sensor (reflection type)

Media sensor (transmission type)

Registration shutter

The DC controller uses the information from the media sensors to determine the paper type, and it
notifies the formatter. The DC controller notifies the formatter of a paper-type mismatch if any of the
following conditions exist:
●

●

Simplex printing:
◦

The mode specified for the print job is Transparency, but the media sensor detects another
type.

◦

The mode specified for the print job is something other than Auto or Transparency, but the
media sensor detects a transparency.

Duplex printing: The mode specified for the print job is compatible with duplex printing, but the
media sensor detects a transparency.

When the product is turned on or when it comes out of Sleep mode, it tests the media sensor by turning
on the LED. If the intensity of the light does not match the specified value, the DC controller determines
that the sensor has failed.
Feed-speed control
Depending on the type of paper, the product adjusts the feed speed to obtain the best print quality. For
paper types that the media sensor cannot detect, the product adjusts the feed speed according to the
print mode specified by the formatter for the print job.

ENWW

Pickup, feed, and delivery system 193

Paper type (Control panel)

Print mode

Recommended
paper weight
range

Feed speed

Media-sensor
detection

BOND

Normal

75–90 g/m2

Full

Yes

Heavy 1

91–120 g/m2

3/4

Yes

Heavy 2

121–163 g/m2

1/2

Yes

Heavy 3

164–220 g/m2

1/3

Yes

LIGHT 60-74g

Light 1

60–74 g/m2

Full

HP GLOSSY 120g

Glossy 1

90–120 g/m2

3/4

Yes

Glossy 2

121–150 g/m2

1/2

Yes

Glossy 3

151–220 g/m2

1/3

Yes

Glossy film

5 mil

1/10

Yes

Envelope

Full

Transparency

5 mil

1/10

Yes

Label

1/2

COLORED
HP MATTE 90g
INTERMEDIATE 85-95g
LETTERHEAD
PLAIN
PREPRINTED
PREPUNCHED
RECYCLED
HEAVY 111–125g
HP MATTE 105g
HP MATTE 120g
MID-WEIGHT 96-110g
EXTRA HEAVY 126-175
HP MATTE 160g
CARDSTOCK 176-220g
HP MATTE 200g
HP MATTE 220g

HP SOFT GLOSS 120g
HVY GLOSSY 111g-125g
MID-WTGLOSSY 96g-110g
HP GLOSSY 160g
XHVYGLOSSY 126-175g
CARD GLOSSY 176-220
HP GLOSSY 220g
HP TOUGH PAPER
OPAQUE FILM

COLOR TRANSPARENCY

194 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Fusing and delivery unit
The fusing and delivery unit fuses the toner onto the paper and delivers the printed page into the output
bin. It has the following controls to ensure optimum print quality:
●

Loop control

●

Pressure roller pressurization/depressurization control

A sensor detects when the output bin is full, and the DC controller notifies the formatter.

Loop control
The loop control maintains even tension on the paper while it is moving through the fuser to prevent
print-quality defects and paper-handling defects.
●

If the fuser rollers rotate more slowly than the secondary transfer rollers, the paper warp increases
and an image defect or paper crease occurs.

●

If the fuser rollers rotate faster than the secondary transfer rollers, the paper warp decreases and
the toner image is not transferred to the paper correctly, causing color misregistration.

To prevent these problems, the loop sensor, located between the secondary transfer rollers and the
fuser rollers, detects whether the paper is sagging or is too taut. The DC controller adjusts the speed of
the fuser motor accordingly.
Figure 5-41 Loop-control mechanism

Pressure roller

Fuser rolle r

Loop sensor lever

SR13: Loop sensor

ITB

Secondary transfer roller

Media

ENWW

When the fuser roller and the pressure
roller rotate slower than the secondary
transfer roller,

When the fuser roller and the pressure
roller rotate faster than the secondary
transfer roller,

Loop sensor: off

Loop sensor: on

Pickup, feed, and delivery system 195

Pressure-roller pressurization control
To prevent excessive wear on the pressure roller and to facilitate jam-clearing procedures, the pressure
roller is not pressurized except during printing. The DC controller reverses the fuser motor, which rotates
the fuser pressure-release cam.
Figure 5-42 Pressure-roller pressurization control

FUSER MOTOR CONTROL signal

FUSER UNIT HOMEPOSITION signal

DC controller

M11

Fuser motor

SR26:
Fuser unit
home-position sensor

Fuser pressure release cam

Fuser rolle r
Pressure roller

The pressure roller is depressurized under the following conditions:
●

The product is turned off with the on/off switch.

●

After a specific time period from entering the standby period

●

During powersave mode

●

When a paper jam is detected.

NOTE: The fuser remains pressurized if the power is interrupted by removing the power cord or turning
off a surge protector, or if the fuser is removed without turning off the product.

196 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Duplexing unit
For supported models, the duplexing unit reverses the paper and feeds it through the paper path to print
the second side. It consists of the following components:
●

Duplexing-reverse unit: Installed on top of the product

●

Duplexing-feed unit: Inside the product, along the right side

Figure 5-43 Duplexing unit

Table 5-17 Duplexing-unit components

ENWW

Abbreviation

Component

M301

Duplexing re-pickup motor

M302

Duplexing feed motor

M303

Duplexing reverse motor

SL301

Duplexing flapper solenoid

SR302

Duplexing paper re-pickup sensor

SR303

Duplexing paper-feed sensor

SR304

Duplexing paper-reverse sensor

Pickup, feed, and delivery system 197

All these components are driven by the duplexing driver, according to signals from the DC controller. If
the DC controller cannot communicate with the duplexing driver, it notifies the formatter that the
duplexing unit has failed.

Duplexing reverse and feed control
The duplexing reverse procedure pulls the paper into the duplexing unit after it exits the fuser, and the
duplexing feed procedure moves the paper through the duplexer so it can enter the product paper path
to print the second side of the page.
1.

After the first side has printed, the duplexing flapper solenoid is opened, which creates a paper
path into the duplexing-reverse unit.

After the paper has fully entered the duplexing-reverse unit, the duplexing-reverse motor reverses
and directs the paper into the duplexing-feed unit.

The duplexing re-pickup motor and duplexing feed motor move the paper into the duplexing repickup unit.

To align the paper with the toner image on the ITB, the duplexing re-pickup motor stops and the
paper pauses until the specified time.

The paper re-enters the paper path, and the second side is printed.

198 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Jam detection
The product uses the following sensors to detect the paper as it moves through the paper path and to
report to the DC controller if the paper has jammed.
●

Vertical synchronous position sensor

●

Cassette paper-feed sensor

●

Multipurpose tray paper-feed sensor

●

Loop sensor

●

Fuser delivery paper-feed sensor

●

Output-bin full sensor

●

Duplexing paper re-pickup sensor

●

Duplexing paper-feed sensor

●

Duplexing paper-reverse sensor

●

Media sensor

The product determines that a jam has occurred if one of these sensors detects paper at an inappropriate
time. The DC controller stops the print operation and notifies the formatter.
Table 5-18 Jams that the product detects
Jam

Description

Pickup delay jam 1

Cassette pickup: The cassette paper-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of the
paper within a specified period after the cassette pickup solenoid has turned on.
Multipurpose tray pickup: The multipurpose tray paper-feed sensor does not detect the
leading edge of the paper within a specified period after the multipurpose tray solenoid has
turned on.

ENWW

Pickup delay jam 2

The vertical synchronous position sensor does not detect the leading edge of the paper within
a specified period after the paper-feed sensor (for either the cassette or the multipurpose tray)
detects the leading edge.

Pickup stationary jam

The media sensor does not detect the trailing edge of the paper within a specified period after
the registration motor begins rotating to re-feed the paper.

Fuser delivery delay jam

The fuser delivery paper-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of the paper within a
specified period after the registration motor begins rotating to re-feed the paper.

Fuser delivery stationary jam

The fuser delivery paper-feed sensor does not detect the trailing edge of the paper within a
specified period after it detects the leading edge.

Wrapping jam

After it has detected the leading edge of the paper, the fuser delivery paper-feed sensor detects
the absence of paper, and it has not yet detected the trailing edge.

Delivery delay jam 3

The output bin full sensor does not detect the leading edge of the paper within a specified period
after the fuser delivery paper-feed sensor has detected the leading edge.

Jam detection 199

Table 5-18 Jams that the product detects (continued)
Jam

Description

Residual paper jam

One of the following sensors detects paper presence during the initialization sequence:
●

Fuser delivery paper-feed sensor

●

Loop sensor

●

Duplexing paper-reverse sensor

Door open jam

A door is open while paper is moving through the product.

Duplexing reverse jam 1

The duplexing paper-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of the paper within a
specified period after the paper-reverse operation starts.

Duplexing reverse jam 2

The duplexing paper-reverse sensor does not detect the trailing edge of the paper within a
specified period after it detects the leading edge.

Duplexing re-pickup jam 1

The vertical synchronous position sensor does not detect the leading edge of the paper within
a specified period after the paper is re-picked up from the duplexing pickup position.

Duplexing re-pickup jam 2

The duplexing paper re-pickup sensor does not detect the leading edge of the paper within a
specified period after the paper-reverse operation starts.

After a jam, some sheets of paper might remain inside the product. If the DC controller detects residual
paper after a door is closed or after the product is turned on, the product automatically clears itself of
those residual sheets.

200 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Optional input trays
The product is configured with either the additional 1x500-sheet input tray or 3x500-sheet input tray
depending on which bundle was purchased.
●

The 1x500-sheet input tray has one tray (Tray 3) and a storage compartment.

●

The 3x500-sheet input tray has three trays (Trays 3, 4, and 5).

NOTE: These optional trays are not identical to the main cassette (Tray 2).
Figure 5-44 Optional input trays

1x500-sheet input tray

3x500-sheet input tray

These additional trays are each controlled by paper-deck drivers, which contain a microcomputer. The
paper-deck drivers receive commands from the DC controller. If the DC controller is unable to
communicate with a paper-deck driver, it notifies the formatter that the optional input tray is not
connected correctly.

ENWW

Optional input trays 201

Figure 5-45 Signals for the input trays
Upper PD cassette

Motor

+3.3V
+24V
DC controller

Solenoid
Paper deck driver
Switch

Sensor

Only for the 3x500-sheet
paper deck

Middle PD cassette
Paper deck
driver

Each load same as the upper
cassette except for the door open
detection switch

Lower PD cassette
Paper deck
driver

Each load same as the upper
cassette except for the door open
detection switch

The input trays contain several motors, solenoids, sensors, and switches, as described in the following
table.
Table 5-19 Electrical components for the optional input trays
Component
type

Abbreviation

Component name

Motors

M101

Upper paper-feeder cassette pickup motor

M102

Upper paper-feeder lifter cassette motor

M111

Middle paper-feeder cassette pickup motor (3x500-sheet input tray only)

M112

Middle paper-feeder cassette lifter motor (3x500-sheet input tray only)

M121

Lower paper-feeder cassette pickup motor (3x500-sheet input tray only)

M122

Lower paper-feeder cassette lifter motor (3x500-sheet input tray only)

202 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Table 5-19 Electrical components for the optional input trays (continued)
Component
type

Abbreviation

Component name

Solenoids

SL101

Upper paper-feeder cassette pickup solenoid

SL111

Middle paper-feeder cassette pickup solenoid (3x500-sheet input tray only)

SL121

Lower paper-feeder cassette pickup solenoid (3x500-sheet input tray only)

SR101

Upper paper-feeder cassette paper-level sensor

SR102

Upper paper-feeder cassette paper-feed sensor

SR104

Upper paper-feeder cassette paper-presence sensor

SR105

Upper paper-feeder cassette paper-stack surface sensor

SR111

Middle paper-feeder cassette paper-level sensor (3x500-sheet input tray only)

SR112

Middle paper-feeder cassette paper-feed sensor (3x500-sheet input tray only)

SR114

Middle paper-feeder cassette paper-presence sensor (3x500-sheet input tray only)

SR115

Middle paper-feeder cassette paper-stack surface sensor (3x500-sheet input tray only)

SR121

Lower paper-feeder cassette paper-level sensor (3x500-sheet input tray only)

SR122

Lower paper-feeder cassette paper-feed sensor (3x500-sheet input tray only)

SR124

Lower paper-feeder cassette paper-presence sensor (3x500-sheet input tray only)

SR125

Lower paper-feeder cassette paper-stack surface sensor (3x500-sheet input tray only)

SW101

Upper paper-feeder cassette end-plate position switch

SW102

Upper paper-feeder cassette side-plate position switch

SW103

Door open detection switch

SW111

Middle paper-feeder cassette end-plate position switch (3x500-sheet input tray only)

SW112

Middle paper-feeder cassette side-plate position switch (3x500-sheet input tray only)

SW121

Lower paper-feeder cassette end-plate position switch (3x500-sheet input tray only)

SW122

Lower paper-feeder cassette side-plate position switch (3x500-sheet input tray only)

Sensors

Switches

ENWW

Optional input trays 203

SW101

204 Chapter 5 Theory of operation
Lifter

SR101

SW102
DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal

UPPER PD CASSETTE MEDIA FEED signal

UPPER PD CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE signal

UPPER PD CASSETTE MEDIA PRESENCE signal

UPPER PD CASSETTE MEDIA LEVEL signal

UPPER PD CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL
signal

UPPER PD CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID DRIVE
signal

UPPER PD CASSETTE PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL
signal

UPPER PD CASSETTE SIDE PLATE POSITION signal

UPPER PD CASSETTE END PLATE POSITION signal

Paper-feeder pickup and feed operation
The pickup and feed operation is the same for each of the trays.

Figure 5-46 Paper-feeder pickup and feed operation
DC controller

Paper deck driver

PD pickup
roller
SR102

SR104
SW103
PD feed roller

SR105
PD separation roller
PD pickup cam

M102
SL101

M101

ENWW

The methods for all the following operations are the same as for the main cassette (Tray 2):

ENWW

●

Paper-size detection and cassette-presence detection

●

Lift operation

●

Paper-level and paper-presence detection

●

Multiple feed prevention

●

Jam detection

Optional input trays 205

Scanner component
The bright and dark areas of a scanned document reflect different light values from the light source
(CCFL), and the light emits through the lens in the scan head. When the CCD sensors receive the light,
photoelectricity is produced according to the light strength. The CCD and CCB/B change the light into
electricity, and then the CCD/B transmits the analog electrical signal through the R, G, B channels. The
analog signal (R,G,B) is sent to the to the A/D converter, which converts the analog signals to digital
signals. The ASIC reads the digital data produced by the A/D converter and then processes the read
data in the inner ASIC.
NOTE: The same optical system is used for the glass and ADF scans.
Figure 5-47 Scanner components (1 of 2)
scanned document

AFE(A/D)

ASIC

(Mirror)
light source

Interface chip

Printer engine

Figure 5-48 Scanner components (2 of 3)
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER

ADF Feeder

ADF Motor
Control Board

ADF Media
Size Sensors

Input Tray
Sensor

Scan Carriage

Scanning
Lamp

CCD Driver
and Analog
Processor

Carriage Drive
System
Optical Path
(Mirrors and Lens )

Copy Processor Board
and Formatter

Scanner Controller Board

Flatbed Cover
Sensor
Scan command

Flatbed Media
Size Sensors

Sensor signal

SCANNER SYSTEM
Image Data
x

DOCUMENT

206 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Figure 5-49 Scanner components (3 of 3)
Scan Engine

Scanner Controller Board

Control
Panel
Copy Processor Board
and Formatter

Computer

Image Data

DC Controller
Scan Command

Print Engine

ENWW

Scanner component 207

Product boards
The scanner includes two major parts: structure and scanner. The scanner includes the copy-processor
board (CPB), scanner-control board (SCB), and PCI-e cable, which are embedded in the structure and
scanner bodies. The scanner controls the ADF.
Figure 5-50 Scanner

Scanner system block diagram
The scanner has its own power supply, which can accept the universal ac input range provided by the
product power supply. The print engine controls the scanner power supply via a PSON signal. However,
the PSON signal does not control the STBY_3.3 V power source from the print engine. STBY_3.3 V
provides power for certain sensors during sleep mode.
The scanner system has three cooling fans. The control-panel fan and scanner cooling fan are
connected to the scanner power supply directly. The lamp fan is connected to the SCB and controlled
by the SCB firmware. All three fans have a fan-lock detection mechanism. The lamp fan only operates
during ADF scanning, while the other two fans operate when the scanner is on. The light source system

208 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

includes one inverter and one Xe-lamp. The inverter is located on the scanner structure. The Xe-lamp
is located on the scanner carriage.
CAUTION: The inverter output voltage is 1.8 KV high voltage. Do not touch both the inverter and
carriage when the scanner is on.
Two FFC cables connect the CCD board on the carriage and the SCB. The board-to-board connectors
connect the SCB and CPB and CPB and SDC. The black PCI-e cable connects the SDC and print engine
(formatter board).
Figure 5-51 Scanner system block diagram

Scanner image-data path
For input signals, ZR ASIC generates the SH signal of each line. This SH transfers to the AFE chip
through the FPGA chip. The AFE then sends the SH signal to the CCD. The clock signal of the AFE
chip is provided from the FPGA. The AFE sends the CCD clock/control signals to the CCD.
For output signals, the CCD analog video signals can be decoded as digital data by the AFE (ADC).
The AFE sends back the image data using LVDS signals. Two LVDS receiver chips deserialize image

ENWW

Scanner component 209

data and send it to the FPGA. The FPGA combines even and odd pixel data and converts it to the HP
video interface. The LVDS transmitter chip serializes data as the LVDS format and sends it to the CPB.
Figure 5-52 Scanner system image-data path

Scanner power topology
The scanner power-supply input range is universal ac (100 to 240 Vac). It is controlled by the PSON
signal, which is provided by the print engine. There is one standby power (STBY_3.3 V) provided for
sensors during sleep mode. Total power consumption of the scanner power supply is 139.7 W.
Figure 5-53 Scanner power topology

210 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Scanner power states
The scanner has three power states:
●

Standby: Scanner is ready to scan.

●

Sleep: Scanner is in low-power state. Some components are off.

●

Deep Sleep: Scanner is in the lowest power state. Most of the components are off, and the power
to the processor (U10) of the scanner-controller board is off.

Table 5-20 Scanner power states
Mode

Scanner system

Printer system

RDY

Standby

Sleep1

Sleep

Reduced power

Sleep2

Deep sleep

Lowest product state

Figure 5-54 Sleep-state power topology

During sleep state, the scanner shuts down most of its peripherals including the CCD, AFE, LVDS, FB/
ADF motors, lamp, and inverter. The scanner stops the FPGA oscillator to reduce FPGA (U6) power
consumption. Only the CPB sensor signals (cover lid, ADF media presence, and nWake) allow the CPB
to send a command to wake up the scanner.

ENWW

Scanner component 211

Figure 5-55 Deep-sleep-state power topology

During deep-sleep state, the CPB disables the SCB_PWR_EN signal, which disables the scanner-logic
power source. The power to the processor of the SCB is off. 24 V from the scanner power supply is
provided to the CPB.

Sensor topology
Each fan has a lock signal that informs the system if a fan-rotation function has failed. The lid sensor
triggers the detection of the FB paper-size sensors. The ADF has eight sensors. The CCD board has a
home sensor. The status of these sensors is reported to the CPB by the SCB. The lid sensor,

212 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

media_presence, and nWake signals are directly connected to the CPB and powered by STBY_3.3 V.
STBY_3.3 V is provided continuously when PSON is enabled.
Figure 5-56 Sensor topology

Table 5-21 Sensors
Location

Name

Description

ADF

Media_Presence

Media presence: H
Media empty: L

Deskew

Skew: H
No skew: L

Top_of_Page

Top of page: H
Not top of page: L

EXIT_SENSOR

Not available

Door_Open (Hatch)

Door close: H
Door open: L

Long_Media

Long media: H
Not long media : L

Paper_Width_Adjust

Wide media: H
Not wide media: L

Pick_Success_Sensor

ENWW

If the ADF module is attached, this signal
will always be H.

Scanner component 213

Table 5-21 Sensors (continued)
Carriage

Home Sensor

At home: H
Not at home: L

SCB

Lid

FB cover open: H
FB cover close: L

Paper (wide)

Wide paper: H
Not wide paper: L

Paper (wide)

Long paper: H
Not long paper: L

nWake

Wake up status: H
Idle status: L

214 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Boards I/Os
Figure 5-57 SCB map

The main board of the scanner is the SCB. The connectors are external I/O ports of the SCB. The LEDs
(D5-D8, D18) are SCB LED indicators. The jumpers (J3, J5, USB) are reserved for debugging and the
manufacturer.

ENWW

Scanner component 215

Table 5-22 SCB connectors
Item number

Connector

Pin number

Connects to

Remark

CON1

CCDB

CON2

CCDB

CON4

Lid sensor

CON3

Paper sensors

CON13

Lamp fan

CON6

ADF module

CON7

FB motor

CON12

Xe-lamp inverter

24V

CON10

Power supply

ADF and Xe-lamp
power (24 V)

CON11

Power Supply

SCB 24 V, 5 V and
STBY_3.3 V

CON8

CPB

1284C metal connector

LVDS

The CCD board connects to the SCB using two 28-pin FFC cables. The CCD board and the home sensor
are located on the carriage. There are only three connectors on the CCD board.
Figure 5-58 CCD map

Table 5-23 CCD map
Item number

Connector

Pin number

Connects to

CON1

CCDB

CON2

CCDB

CON3

Home

216 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

Remark

LVDS

ENWW

Scanner operation flow
Figure 5-59 Power-on initialization-operation flow (1 of 2)

ENWW

Scanner component 217

Figure 5-60 Power-on initialization-operation flow (2 of 2)

218 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Figure 5-61 FB scan-operation flow

ENWW

Scanner component 219

Figure 5-62 ADF scan-operation flow

220 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

ADF
Input tray
The wide-media sensor (S1) and the long-media sensor (S2) are positioned at the input-tray assembly.
These sensors allow firmware to detect how A4 and letter media sizes are positioned (in portrait or
landscape mode).
Figure 5-63 ADF operation

Separation
Roller

Pick Roller
Input Tray

Deskew

S1
S4

S6
Exit
Prescan
Drive Roller Duplex Path

Postscan
Drive Roller

Diverter
Part

ADF simplex-printing operation sequence
1. The jam-cover sensor (S3) is interrupted when the jam cover is closed, and the media-presence
sensor (S4) is interrupted when media is loaded on the input tray. 2. The feed motor rotates clockwise,
lowering the pick roller. A cutout on the gears on the side of the lid ensures the proper rotation distance.
3. The pick motor rotates counterclockwise, driving the pick roller to pick media. 4. The deskew sensor
(S5) is interrupted when the leading edge of the media is driven past it, and the firmware registers the
position of the leading edge of the media. 5. The leading edge of the media is driven into the nip point
of the deskew drive roller and deskew pinch rollers. A preset amount of overdrive of media into this nip
point is carried to create a buckle of media for pick-skew correction.
6. The pick motor rotates clockwise, rotating the deskew drive roller to pull media into the prescan drive
roller. 7. Transmission gears for the pick and separator rollers disengage from the gear train, allowing
the pick and separator rollers to free-wheel while media is pulled in by the deskew drive roller. 8. The
feed motor rotates counterclockwise, driving the media into the prescan sensor (S6). 9. The firmware
registers the position of the leading edge of the media while the prescan sensor (S6) is activated. 10.
The feed motor continues rotating counterclockwise, driving the leading edge of the media through the
preset distance from the prescan sensor (S6) to the scan zone.
11. When the media arrives, the scanner scans and retrieves data. 12. The prescan sensor (S6) is not
interrupted when the trailing edge of the media passes it. 13. The firmware sequence registers the trailing
edge of the media position. 14. The feed motor continues rotating counterclockwise, driving the media
trailing edge through the preset distance from the prescan sensor (S6) to the scan zone. 15. The scanner
finishes scanning and retrieving data. 16. The feed motor continues rotating counterclockwise, driving
the trailing edge of the media past the scan zone. 17. The solenoid clamps the exit pinch rollers with

ENWW

ADF 221

the exit drive rollers before the trailing edge of the media leaves the post-scan drive roller and exit pinch
rollers. 18. The feed motor continues rotating counterclockwise, driving the media out of the ADF paper
path via the exit pinch roller and exit drive roller.
Figure 5-64 Simplex scanning document path

P a p er I n

P a p er O u t

S c a n L in e

ADF duplex-printing operation sequence
1. The jam-cover sensor (S3) is interrupted when the jam cover is closed. The media-presence sensor
(S4) is interrupted when media is loaded on the input tray. 2. The feed motor rotates clockwise, lowering
the pick roller. A cutout on the gears on the side of the lid ensures the proper rotation distance. 3. The
pick motor rotates counterclockwise, driving the pick roller to pick media. 4. The deskew sensor (S5) is
interrupted when the leading edge of the media is driven past it, and the firmware registers the position
of the leading edge of the media. 5. The leading edge of the media is driven into the nip point of the
deskew drive roller and deskew pinch rollers. A preset amount of overdrive of media into this nip point
is carried to create a buckle of media for pick skew correction.
6. The pick motor rotates clockwise, rotating the deskew drive roller to pull media into the prescan drive
roller. 7. The pick- and separator-rollers-transmission gears disengage from the gear train, allowing the
pick and separator rollers to free-wheel while media is pulled in by the deskew drive roller. 8. The feed
motor rotates counterclockwise, driving media into the prescan sensor (S6). 9. The firmware registers
the position of the leading edge of the media while S6 is activated. 10. The feed motor continues rotating
counterclockwise, driving the leading edge of the media through the preset distance from S6 to the scan
zone.
11. When the media arrives, the scanner scans and retrieves data. 12. S6 is not interrupted when the
trailing edge of the media passes it. 13. The firmware sequence registers the trailing edge of the media

222 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

position. 14. The feed motor continues rotating counterclockwise, driving the media trailing edge through
the preset distance from S6 to the scan zone. 15. The scanner finishes scanning and retrieving data.
16. The solenoid activates when the trailing edge of the media passes the scan zone by a predetermined,
constant distance from the prescan sensor. This allows the exit pinch rollers to clamp the exit drive roller,
driving the remaining media out of the scan zone and past the diverter. 17. The feed motor rotates
clockwise, driving the media in a reverse direction. This moves the media into the duplex path, the
deskew drive roller, and the deskew pinch rollers. 18. A preset amount of overdrive of media into the
nip point is carried out to create a buckle for pick-skew correction. 19. The solenoid activates when the
trailing edge of the media passes the scan zone. This allows the exit pinch rollers to clamp the exit drive
roller, driving the remaining media out of the scan zone and past the diverter.
Figure 5-65 Duplex scanning document path

P a p er I n

P a p er O u t

Sc a n L i n e

1st Pass
2nd Pass
3rd Pass

Multifeed operation
1. The jam-cover sensor (S3) is interrupted when the jam cover is closed. The media-presence sensor
(S4) is interrupted when media is loaded on the input tray. 2. The feed motor rotates clockwise, lowering
the pick roller. A cutout on the gears on the side of the lid ensures the proper rotation distance. 3. The
pick motor rotates counterclockwise, driving the pick roller to pick media. 4. The deskew sensor (S5) is
interrupted when the leading edge of the media is driven past it, and the firmware registers the position
of the leading edge of the media. 5. The leading edge of the media is driven into the nip point of the
deskew drive roller and deskew pinch rollers. A preset amount of overdrive of media into this nip point
is carried to create a buckle of media for pick-skew correction.
6. The pick motor rotates clockwise, rotating the deskew drive roller to pull media into the prescan drive
roller. 7. The transmission gears for the pick and separator rollers disengage from the gear train, allowing
the pick and separator rollers to free-wheel while media is pulled in by the deskew drive roller. 8. The
feed motor rotates counterclockwise, driving the media into the prescan sensor (S6). 9. The firmware

ENWW

ADF 223

registers the position of the leading edge of the media while S6 is activated. 10. The feed motor continues
rotating counterclockwise, driving the leading edge of the media through the preset distance from S6 to
the scan zone.
11. When the media arrives, the scanner scans and retrieves data. 12. S6 is not interrupted when the
trailing edge of the media passes it. 13. The firmware sequence registers the trailing edge of the media
position. 14. The feed motor continues rotating counterclockwise, driving the media trailing edge through
the preset distance from S6 to the scan zone. 15. The scanner finishes scanning and retrieving data.
16. The solenoid activates when the trailing edge of the media passes the scan zone by a predetermined,
constant distance from the prescan sensor. This allows the exit pinch rollers to clamp the exit drive roller,
driving the remaining media out of the scan zone and past the diverter. 17. The feed motor rotates
clockwise, driving the media in a reverse direction. This moves the media into the duplex path, the
deskew drive roller, and the deskew pinch rollers. 18. A preset amount of overdrive of media into the
nip point is carried out to create a buckle for pick skew correction. 19. The solenoid activates when the
trailing edge of media passes the scan zone. This allows the exit pinch rollers to clamp the exit drive
roller, driving the remaining media out of the scan zone and past the diverter.
20. The continual triggering of the media-presence sensor (S4) allows the firmware to recognize that
there are pages on the input tray. 21. The S5 is uninterrupted when the trailing edge of the media passes
it. 22. The pick motor rotates counterclockwise, driving the pick roller to pick media.

End of a scan job operation
After performing the steps listed in the multifeed operation section, S4 is uninterrupted when no media
exists in the input tray. The motor feed rotates clockwise, raising the pick roller. When the pick-roller
assembly rises, the media-load stoppers crank down.

Paper pick and separation operation
The top sheet of media is picked by the pick roller, and an angled-ramp profile must function as a barrier
to prevent the remaining lower sheets from being picked together with the top sheet. If more than one

224 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

sheet of media is picked, the separator roller and separator pad work together to separate the lower
sheet of media, allowing only the top sheet into the ADF.
Figure 5-66 ADF paper pick and separation
S e par a t i on Roller
R a mp Pr of i le

Pi ck Roller

Sep ar a t io n Pad

Fr i c t i on Pa d

Se p a r a t i o n
Floor

Deskew
The input tray's operation-width adjustment ensures that the media is stacked neatly at the center of
the input tray. It also ensures that the media is located parallel to the direction of travel into the ADF
paper path. A deskew function is performed by buckling media, accumulating a media buffer to minimize
skew caused by improper loading of media on the input tray. The leading edge of the media is parallel
with the deskew drive rollers when entering the ADF paper path.

ENWW

ADF 225

226 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

ENWW

Removal and replacement

●

Removal and replacement strategy

●

User-replaceable parts

●

Service-replaceable parts

●

Optional input trays

●

Scanner

●

ADF

227

Removal and replacement strategy
Introduction
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of field-replaceable units (FRUs) only.
Replacing FRUs is generally the reverse of removal. Notes are included to provide directions for difficult
or critical replacement procedures.
HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or troubleshooting to the component level.
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the laser/scanner assembly.
The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.
The sheet-metal parts can have sharp edges. Be careful when handling sheet-metal parts.

CAUTION:
Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when removing
printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching
an ESD-sensitive part.
Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation.
NOTE: To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread
pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. If a self-tapping screw-hole
becomes stripped, repair the screw-hole or replace the affected assembly.

228 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Required tools
●

#2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152-mm (6-inch) shaft length
NOTE: For the best fit, use a JIS #2 Phillips screwdriver for the stapler/stacker.

●

Small, flat-blade screwdriver

●

Needle-nose pliers

●

ESD strap (if one is available)

●

Penlight

CAUTION: Always use a Phillips screwdriver (callout 1). Do not use a pozidrive screwdriver (callout 2)
or any motorized screwdriver. These can damage screws or screw threads.
Figure 6-1 Screwdrivers

Types of screws
Illustration

Description

Size

Use

Screw with washer

M3X8

Used to secure metal
components to metal
components (for example, a
ground wire to the frame)

Screw, RS

M3X6

Used to secure metal to metal

M3X10

ENWW

Screw, tapping

M3X6

Screw

M3X8

Removal and replacement strategy 229

Screw

P3X8

Screw, tapping, truss head

M4X10

Used to secure anything to
plastic

Service approach
The HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP Series use a field repair strategy. Defective parts are diagnosed
and replaced at the Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) assembly level. Printer repair normally begins by
using the printer internal diagnostics and the following two-step process:
1.

Isolate the problem to the major system (for example, the network or server, or the printer).

Troubleshoot the problem by using the procedures in the troubleshooting chapter.

After you locate a faulty part, the product can usually be repaired at the assembly level by replacing
FRUs. Some mechanical assemblies might need to be repaired at the subassembly level. HewlettPackard Company does not support replacement of components on the printed circuit assembles.

Before performing service
WARNING! Turn the product off, wait 5 seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting
to service the printer. If this warning is not followed, severe injury and damage to the device can
result.The power must be on for certain functional checks during troubleshooting. However, the power
supply should be disconnected during parts removal.
1.

Remove all media.

Place the product on an ESD mat (if available). If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground
yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Remove the print cartridges, image drums, and ITB.

Remove the trays.

After performing service
1.

Reinstall the print cartridges, image drums, and ITB.

Reinstall the trays.

Return all media to the trays.

Plug in the power cable and turn on the printer.

230 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Parts removal order
If multiple components must be removed to gain access to an assembly, the first step of the removal
procedure lists all of the components that must be removed to gain access to that assembly. Use these
lists to determine which parts must be removed before removing other parts.

ENWW

Removal and replacement strategy 231

User-replaceable parts
When you use genuine HP supplies, the product automatically notifies you when supplies are nearly
depleted. The notification to order supplies allows ample time to order new supplies before they need
to be replaced.

232 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Fuser
1.

Turn the power off.

Open the right door.

Pull the two blue fuser handles forward.

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before
handling it.

ENWW

User-replaceable parts 233

Rotate the fuser-release levers down to open them.

Grasp the fuser handles and pull straight out to remove the fuser. Recycle the used fuser following
the instructions included with the new fuser.

CAUTION: The fuser weighs 5 kg (11 lbs). Be careful not to drop it.

234 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove the new fuser from its protective bag. Make sure the fuser-release levers are in the down
and open position. Align the fuser with the arrows on the product. Push the fuser completely into
the printer.

Rotate the fuser-release levers up to lock the fuser into place.

Push the fuser handles back to close them.

Close the right door and turn the power on.

User-replaceable parts 235

Transfer roller
1.

Turn the power off, and then open the right door.

Lift the green handle on the transfer assembly, and then open the panel.

Remove the transfer roller, and then recycle it.

236 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Wipe roller area.

Remove the new transfer roller from its protective bag.
CAUTION: Do not touch the sponge part of the new transfer roller or clean the roller.
Contaminants or scratching may result in poor print quality.

ENWW

Align the transfer roller with the slots in the product and push until it clicks into place.

Close the transfer assembly.

Close the right door, and then turn the power on.

User-replaceable parts 237

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
1.

Turn the power off and open the right door.

Lift the green handle on the transfer assembly, and then open the panel.

Raise the ITB levers.

238 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove the ITB.

Wipe the ITB area.

Remove the new ITB from its protective bag.
CAUTION: Contaminants or scratching may result in poor print quality.

ENWW

User-replaceable parts 239

Install the new ITB.

6.8 kg.
14.99 lbs.

CAUTION: Only push on the side handles of the ITB as indicated. Do not push on the center
because it could scratch the ITB or leave fingerprints.
8.

Lower the ITB levers.

Close the transfer assembly.

10. Close the right door, and then turn the power on.

240 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Tray 1 pickup and separation rollers
1.

Turn the power off, and then open the right door.

Remove the paper-feed cover.

Remove the multipurpose upper feed guide.

1
3

ENWW

Remove one plastic clip.

User-replaceable parts 241

Remove the upper roller by sliding it to the right. Rotate the lower roller and then grasp the blue
plastic tab and pull the roller off the rod.

Recycle the used rollers, following the instructions included with the new roller.

Remove the new rollers from the protective bag and install.
CAUTION: Do not touch the rubber part of the new roller. Contaminants or scratching may result
in poor print quality.

Attach the multi-purpose upper feed guide and paper-feed cover, and then close the right door.

Turn the power on.

242 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Tray 2, 3, 4, and 5 pickup rollers
1.

Turn the power off, and then remove the paper tray.

Locate the rollers.

Turn the roller, and then grasp the plastic tab and pull the roller off the rod. Repeat the process for
the other rollers. Recycle the used rollers.

1
2
3

ENWW

Remove each roller from its protective bag. Do not touch the rubber part of the new roller.
Contaminants or scratching may result in poor print quality.

User-replaceable parts 243

Attach the new roller, sliding the new roller onto the rod until it clicks in place. Repeat the process
for the other rollers.

Reinstall the paper tray, and then turn the power on.

244 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Formatter
1.

Turn the product off, and then disconnect all power and interface cables.

NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder
when removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat.
If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
2.

Locate the black formatter pressure release tabs on the formatter board in the rear of the product,
and then gently press the black tabs (callout 1) toward each other. Gently pull on the black tabs
(callout 2) to pull the formatter board from the product (callout 3).

ENWW

Place the formatter board on a clean, flat, grounded surface.

Remove the DDR memory DIMM. See Install DDR memory DIMMs on page 111.

User-replaceable parts 245

Disconnect all connectors to the hard-drive, and then release the hard-drive cage.

Remove the hard-drive cage.

Remove the DDR memory DIMM and fax card if present.

Recycle the used formatter.

Remove the formatter from its protective bag, and then place it on a clean, flat, grounded surface.

10. Install the DDR memory DIMM and hard-drive cage to the new formatter and fax card.

246 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

11. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the bottom of the slot, and then slide the board back into
the product. Attach all power and interface cables, and then turn the power on.

ENWW

User-replaceable parts 247

Tray 2
1.

Pull the old tray completely out of the product by pulling and lifting it up slightly. Recycle the used
tray following the instructions included with the new tray.

Attach the front cover to the tray.

Reinsert the tray by aligning the side rollers and pushing it back into the product.

Trays 3, 4, and 5
1.

Pull the tray completely out of the product by pulling and lifting it up slightly.

Recycle the used tray following the instructions included with the new tray.

Reinsert the tray by aligning the side rollers and pushing it back into the product.

248 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts
Use the steps below to remove and replace field-replaceable units (FRUs).

Secondary transfer unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Transfer roller. See Transfer roller on page 236.

●

Intermediate transfer belt. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 238.

With a flatblade screwdriver, release two tabs along the bottom edge, and then remove the right
ITB guide.
Figure 6-2 Remove the secondary transfer unit (1 of 9)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 249

Close the secondary transfer unit. On the left side release one tab (callout 1), and then lift the
connector cover (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 6-3 Remove the secondary transfer unit (2 of 9)

1
2

Disconnect one connector (callout 1). To disconnect, push the front of the connector toward the
product, and then pull out.
Figure 6-4 Remove the secondary transfer unit (3 of 9)

250 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then lift the left ITB guide (callout
3) to remove it.
NOTE: When reinstalling the left ITB guide, place the top of the guide behind the sheet metal
(callout 4).
Figure 6-5 Remove the secondary transfer unit (4 of 9)

2
3

Release one wire retainer (callout 1), one connector (callout 2), and one c-clip (callout 3).
Figure 6-6 Remove the secondary transfer unit (5 of 9)

1
3

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 251

Slide the bushing (callout 1) out onto the rod.
Figure 6-7 Remove the secondary transfer unit (6 of 9)

While tilting the feed guide (callout 1) backward, grasp the secondary transfer unit (callout 2) and
slide it to the left. Release the right guide bar, and then remove the secondary transfer unit.
Figure 6-8 Remove the secondary transfer unit (7 of 9)

252 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

NOTE: When reassembling the secondary transfer unit, make sure to position it correctly.
●

Push down the secondary transfer unit stopper (callout 1). Place the gear unit (callout 2) under the
ITB rail (callout 3).
Figure 6-9 Remove the secondary transfer unit (8 of 9)

3
2

●

Lift and place the feed guide (callout 1) on the upper part of the secondary transfer unit (callout 2).
Figure 6-10 Remove the secondary transfer unit (9 of 9)

2
NOTE: Be sure to calibrate the media sensor from the Service menu on the control panel after the
secondary transfer unit has been replaced.

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 253

Multipurpose drive unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Fuser. See Fuser on page 233.

●

Secondary transfer unit. See Secondary transfer unit on page 249.

Remove one screw (callout 1) and release the door hinge (callout 2).
Figure 6-11 Remove the multipurpose drive unit (1 of 7)

1
2

Remove two screws (callout 1) and the handle.
Figure 6-12 Remove the multipurpose drive unit (2 of 7)

254 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove two screws (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the right inner cover.
Figure 6-13 Remove the multipurpose drive unit (3 of 7)

Lift the secondary transfer unit stopper (callout 1), and then pull it forward to remove it.
Figure 6-14 Remove the multipurpose drive unit (4 of 7)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 255

Release the two tabs (callout 1), and then slide the gear cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated
to remove it.
Figure 6-15 Remove the multipurpose drive unit (5 of 7)

Remove two connectors (callout 1), one wire retainer (callout 2), and one ground screw (callout 3).
Figure 6-16 Remove the multipurpose drive unit (6 of 7)

3
1

256 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove two screws (callout 1), two pins (callout 2), and then remove the multipurpose tray drive
unit (callout 3).
Figure 6-17 Remove the multipurpose drive unit (7 of 7)

3
2

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 257

Multipurpose-tray guide (Tray 1) unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Secondary transfer unit. See Secondary transfer unit on page 249.

●

Multipurpose drive unit. See Multipurpose drive unit on page 254.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release one wire retainer (callout 2), remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the multipurpose-tray guide (Tray 1) unit.
Figure 6-18 Remove the multipurpose tray guide unit

1
2

258 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Cassette (Tray 2) pickup unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Secondary transfer unit. See Secondary transfer unit on page 249.

●

Multipurpose drive unit. See Multipurpose drive unit on page 254.

●

Multipurpose-tray guide (Tray 1) unit. See Multipurpose-tray guide (Tray 1) unit
on page 258.

Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the Tray
2 pickup unit (callout 3).
Figure 6-19 Remove the cassette (Tray 2) pickup unit

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 259

Rear-left cover
Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2) and remove the rear left cover (callout
3).
Figure 6-20 Remove rear left cover

2
3

260 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Rear-right cover
Remove one screw (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2) and then remove the rear right cover
(callout 3).
Figure 6-21 Remove rear right cover

2
3

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 261

Rear cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 6-22 Remove rear cover (1 of 2)

Remove nine screws (callout 1) and then remove the rear cover (callout 2).
Figure 6-23 Remove rear cover (2 of 2)

262 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Low-voltage power-supply unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

Disconnect five connectors (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the lowvoltage power supply unit.
Figure 6-24 Remove the low-voltage power-supply unit

1
2

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 263

High-voltage power supply PCA (A)
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

●

Low-voltage power-supply unit. See Low-voltage power-supply unit on page 263.

Release the two tabs (callout 1), remove the two PCA holders (callout 2), and then remove one
connector (callout 3).
Figure 6-25 Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA (A) (1 of 3)

264 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove one screw (callout 1), release seven tabs (callout 2), and then remove the high-voltage
power supply PCA (A).
Figure 6-26 Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA (A) (2 of 3)

2
1
NOTE: When reassembling, set the bottom tab of the high-voltage power supply PCA (A) first. Ensure
that the contact spring (callout 1) can be seen from the twelve confirmation windows.
Figure 6-27 Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA (A) (3 of 3)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 265

Lifter-drive unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Tray 2. See Tray 2 on page 248.

●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

●

Low-voltage power-supply unit. See Low-voltage power-supply unit on page 263.

●

High-voltage power supply PCA (A). See High-voltage power supply PCA (A) on page 264.

Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then release two tabs
(callout 3).
Figure 6-28 Remove the lifter-drive unit (1 of 2)

2
1

266 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove the lifter-drive unit through the front of the product.
Figure 6-29 Remove the lifter-drive unit (2 of 2)

NOTE: When reassembling, ensure that the lifter-drive unit is unlocked (callout 1). If the lifter is locked
(callout 2), the lifter will not function correctly.
Figure 6-30 Unlocked position of the lifter-drive unit (correct)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 267

Figure 6-31 Locked position of the lifter-drive unit (incorrect)

268 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Fuser motor
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the fuser motor (callout 3).
Figure 6-32 Remove the fuser motor

1
3

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 269

Intermediate-transfer belt (ITB) motor
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1). Remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the ITB
motor (callout 3).
Figure 6-33 Remove the intermediate-transfer belt (ITB) motor

1
3

270 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Face-down output bin
Remove two screws (callout 1) and then the face-down output bin (callout 2).
Figure 6-34 Remove face-down output bin

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 271

Left cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

Remove one screw (callout 1) and then release one pin (callout 2).
Figure 6-35 Remove left cover (1 of 2)

1
2

Release one tab (callout 1). Flex the bottom corner (callout 2), and then slide the left cover (callout
3) in the direction indicated.
Figure 6-36 Remove left cover (2 of 2)

1
3

272 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Laser/scanner fan duct
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 272.

Remove five screws (callout 1), and then swing the formatter case to the right.
Figure 6-37 Remove the laser/scanner fan duct (1 of 3)

Disconnect the two connectors (callout 1), and then release two wire retainers (callout 2).
Figure 6-38 Remove the laser/scanner fan duct (2 of 3)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 273

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the laser/scanner fan duct (callout 2).
Figure 6-39 Remove the laser/scanner fan duct (3 of 3)

274 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Print-cartridge driver PCA
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 272.

Remove five screws (callout 1), and then swing the formatter case to the right.
Figure 6-40 Remove the print-cartridge driver PCA (1 of 3)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 275

Disconnect one connector from the DC controller (callout 1).
Figure 6-41 Remove the print-cartridge driver PCA (2 of 3)

Disconnect seven connectors (callout 1), four screws (callout 2), and the print-cartridge driver PCA
(callout 3).
Figure 6-42 Remove the print-cartridge driver PCA (3 of 3)

276 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

High-voltage power supply PCA (B)
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 272.

Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 6-43 Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA (B) (1 of 3)

2
1

Release six tabs (callout 1), and then remove the high-voltage power supply PCA (B).
Figure 6-44 Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA (B) (2 of 3)

NOTE: When reassembling, ensure that the contact springs (callout 1) can be seen from the five
confirmation windows. Failure to do so can cause print quality issues.

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 277

Figure 6-45 Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA (B) (3 of 3)

278 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Formatter case
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 272.

Remove the wire-harness holder (callout 1), and then disconnect the flat cable (callout 2) from the
formatter case.
Figure 6-46 Remove the formatter case (1 of 3)

1
2

Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release three wire retainers (callout 2), and then remove five
screws (callout 3).
Figure 6-47 Remove the formatter case (2 of 3)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 279

Rotate and lift the formatter case to remove it.
Figure 6-48 Remove the formatter case (3 of 3)

NOTE: When reassembling, insert the C-shaped hinge on the top of the formatter case into the round
hole.

280 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

DC controller PCA
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 272.

Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCA.
CAUTION: Use care when removing the flat cable that comes from the formatter case (callout
1). Gently lift the black latch to release the cable.
Figure 6-49 Remove the DC controller PCA (1 of 2)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 281

Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the DC controller PCA.
Figure 6-50 Remove the DC controller PCA (2 of 2)

282 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Environmental sensor
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 272.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1). Release three tabs (callout 2), and then remove the
environmental sensor (callout 3).
Figure 6-51 Remove the environmental sensors

3
2

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 283

Image-drum motor
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the cartridge driver PCA mount (callout 2).
Figure 6-52 Remove the image-drum motor (1 of 3)

Disconnect two wire retainers (callout 1).
Figure 6-53 Remove the image-drum motor (2 of 3)

284 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove one connector (callout 1) and four screws (callout 2) for the appropriate motor. Remove
the image-drum motor (callout 3). Removal of the magenta image drum is shown.
Figure 6-54 Remove the image-drum motor (3 of 3)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 285

Fuser fan
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

Remove one screw (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the fuser
fan.
Figure 6-55 Remove the fuser fan

286 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Print-cartridge feed motor (black)
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1). Remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the printcartridge feed motor (black) (callout 3).
Figure 6-56 Remove the print-cartridge feed motor (black)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 287

Print-cartridge feed motor (yellow, magenta, and cyan)
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1). Remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the printcartridge feed motor (yellow, magenta, and cyan) (callout 3).
Figure 6-57 Remove the print-cartridge feed motor (yellow, magenta, and cyan)

288 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Cartridge fan unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 6-58 Remove the cartridge fan unit (1 of 2)

Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the cartridge fan unit (callout 2).
Figure 6-59 Remove the cartridge fan unit (2 of 2)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 289

Laser/scanner fan unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 6-60 Remove the laser/scanner fan unit (1 of 2)

Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the laser/scanner fan unit (callout 2).
Figure 6-61 Remove the laser/scanner fan unit (2 of 2)

1
2

290 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Fuser power-supply unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

Disconnect six connectors (callout 1), and then remove one cable guide (callout 2).
Figure 6-62 Remove the fuser power-supply unit (1 of 2)

1
2

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the fuser power-supply unit.
Figure 6-63 Remove the fuser power-supply unit (2 of 2)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 291

Primary transfer-roller disengagement motor
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

●

Fuser power-supply unit. See Fuser power-supply unit on page 291.

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the motor cover (callout 2).
Figure 6-64 Remove the primary transfer-roller disengagement motor (1 of 2)

1
2

Disconnect one connector (callout 1). Remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the
primary-transfer roller disengagement motor (callout 3).
Figure 6-65 Remove the primary transfer-roller disengagement motor (2 of 2)

2
3

292 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Print-cartridge drive unit (yellow and magenta)
NOTE: Do not remove the print-cartridge drive unit (yellow and magenta) without having the alignment
pins required for reinstallation.
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 272.

●

Print-cartridge driver PCA. See Print-cartridge driver PCA on page 275.

●

Image-drum motors (yellow and magenta). See Image-drum motor on page 284.

Remove four screws (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the printcartridge drive unit (yellow and magenta) (callout 3).
Figure 6-66 Remove the print-cartridge drive unit (yellow and magenta)

1
NOTE: Follow the gear alignment procedures when reassembling the print-cartridge drive units and
main drive unit.

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 293

Gear alignment
1.

This procedure correctly aligns the gears of the main drive unit (callout 1) and the print-cartridge
drive unit(s) (callout 2). Use the four pins (callout 3) supplied with the replacement units to align
the gears.
Figure 6-67 Gear alignment (1 of 7)

Reinstall the main drive unit. Push the black locks (callout 3) to the left while rotating the top gears
(callout 1) on the main drive unit until they lock into position. The large holes (callout 2) should point
to the right (3 o'clock position).
Figure 6-68 Gear alignment (2 of 7)

2
3

294 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Insert the long alignment pins (callout 1) through the gears (callout 2) in the main drive unit.
NOTE: This step is not required. Gears can be held in position with the locks.
Figure 6-69 Gear alignment (3 of 7)

1
4.

On the print-cartridge drive unit, rotate the top gear (callout 1) clockwise until the arrows align
(callout 2). Insert the two short pins (callout 3).
Figure 6-70 Gear alignment (4 of 7)

2
5.

Install the print-cartridge drive unit (callout 1) over the long pins in the main drive unit. Remove all
pins (callout 2), disengage locks, and reinstall screws.
CAUTION: Ensure that the print-cartridge drive unit is installed correctly. The unit should be flush
against the product (callout 1). Incorrect installation (callout 2) will cause the product to function
incorrectly.

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 295

Ensure that the print-cartridge drive unit is installed correctly. The unit should be flush against the
product (callout 1). Incorrect installation (callout 2) will cause the product to function incorrectly.
Figure 6-71 Correct position of print-cartridge drive unit (5 of 7)

Figure 6-72 Incorrect position of print-cartridge drive unit (6 of 7)

CAUTION: Be sure to remove all pins (callout 1). Failure to do so can damage the product.

296 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Figure 6-73 Gear alignment (7 of 7)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 297

Print-cartridge drive unit (cyan and black)
NOTE: Do not remove the print-cartridge drive unit (cyan and black) without having the alignment pins
required for reinstallation.
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 272.

●

Print-cartridge driver PCA. See Print-cartridge driver PCA on page 275.

●

Image-drum motors (cyan and black). See Image-drum motor on page 284.

Remove four screws (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the printcartridge drive unit (cyan and black) (callout 3).
NOTE: Follow the gear alignment procedures for the drive unit when reassembling. See Gear
alignment on page 294.
Figure 6-74 Remove the print-cartridge drive unit (cyan and black)

2
3

298 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Print-cartridge interface PCA (cyan and black)
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 272.

●

Print-cartridge driver PCA. See Print-cartridge driver PCA on page 275.

●

Image-drum motors (cyan and black). See Image-drum motor on page 284.

●

Print-cartridge drive unit (cyan and black). See Print-cartridge drive unit (cyan and black)
on page 298.

Remove three screws (callout 1) and release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the printcartridge interface PCA (cyan and black) (callout 3).
Figure 6-75 Remove the print-cartridge interface PCA (cyan and black)

1
NOTE: When reassembling, some assemblies in this sequence require gear alignment. See Gear
alignment on page 294.

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 299

Print-cartridge interface PCA (yellow and magenta)
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 272.

●

Print-cartridge driver PCA. See Print-cartridge driver PCA on page 275.

●

Image-drum motors (yellow and magenta). See Image-drum motor on page 284.

●

Print-cartridge drive unit (yellow and magenta). See Print-cartridge drive unit (yellow and
magenta) on page 293.

Remove three screws (callout 1) and release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the PCA (yellow
and magenta) (callout 3).
Figure 6-76 Print-cartridge interface PCA (yellow and magenta)

1
NOTE: When reassembling, some assemblies in this sequence require gear alignment. See Gear
alignment on page 294.

300 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Main drive unit
NOTE: Do not remove the main drive unit without having the alignment pins required for reinstallation.
See Gear alignment on page 294.
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 272.

●

Print-cartridge driver PCA. See Print-cartridge driver PCA on page 275.

●

Image-drum motors. See Image-drum motor on page 284.

●

Print-cartridge drive unit (cyan and black). See Print-cartridge drive unit (cyan and black)
on page 298.

●

Print-cartridge drive unit (yellow and magenta). See Print-cartridge drive unit (yellow and
magenta) on page 293.

●

Print-cartridge interface PCA (yellow and magenta). See Print-cartridge interface PCA (cyan
and black) on page 299.

●

Print-cartridge interface PCA (cyan and black). See Print-cartridge interface PCA (yellow and
magenta) on page 300.

Disconnect five connectors (J113, J138, J139, J141, and J142) (callout 1) on the DC Controller
PCA, behind the formatter case.
Figure 6-77 Remove the main drive unit (1 of 3)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 301

Remove twelve screws (callout 1), and then the main drive unit (callout 2).
Figure 6-78 Remove the main drive unit (2 of 3)

CAUTION: Do not remove screws that hold the main drive unit together.
NOTE: Follow the gear adjustment procedures when reassembling the main drive unit. See Gear
alignment on page 294.

302 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Cartridge fan duct
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Left cover. See Left cover on page 272.

●

Print-cartridge driver PCA. See Print-cartridge driver PCA on page 275.

●

Image-drum motors (all). See Image-drum motor on page 284.

●

Print-cartridge drive unit (yellow and magenta). See Print-cartridge drive unit (yellow and
magenta) on page 293.

●

Print-cartridge drive unit (cyan and black). See Print-cartridge drive unit (cyan and black)
on page 298.

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the cartridge fan duct (callout 2).
Figure 6-79 Remove the cartridge fan duct

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 303

Duplex switchback tray
Press the release and remove the duplex switchback tray.

304 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Front lower cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

Face-down bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271

Remove one screw (callout 1) and one tab (callout 2).
Figure 6-80 Remove front lower cover (1 of 2)

2
1

Slide front lower cover (callout 1) to the left to remove.
Figure 6-81 Remove front lower cover (2 of 2)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 305

Inner cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

Face-down bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

The inner cover has four tabs (callout 1) that must be released. Ensure that the tabs are correctly
seated when reinstalling.
Figure 6-82 Remove inner cover (1 of 4)

Release one tab (callout 1).
Figure 6-83 Remove inner cover (2 of 4)

306 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Release two tabs (callout 1).
Figure 6-84 Remove inner cover (3 of 4)

Release one tab (callout 1), and them remove the inner cover.
Figure 6-85 Remove inner cover (4 of 4)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 307

Rear scanner cover
Remove four screws (callout 1) and then the rear cover.
Figure 6-86 Remove rear-scanner cover

308 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Right upper cover
1.

Open the right door.

Remove two screws (callout 1) and then the right upper cover (callout 2).
Figure 6-87 Remove right upper cover

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 309

Front door
1.

Open the front door, and then remove the print cartridges and image drums.

Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the two arms (callout 1), and then remove the front
door (callout 2).
Figure 6-88 Remove front door

310 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Front door assembly
1.

Remove the following:
●

Duplex switchback tray. See Duplex switchback tray on page 304.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

Open the front door.

Remove seven screws (callout 1), release the two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the front door
assembly (callout 3).
Figure 6-89 Remove front door assembly

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 311

Color-misregistration and image-density sensor unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Duplex switchback tray. See Duplex switchback tray on page 304.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Front door assembly. See Front door assembly on page 311.

Remove three screws (callout 1) and the print-cartridge guide (callout 2).
Figure 6-90 Remove the color-misregistration and image-density sensor unit (1 of 3)

2
1

312 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Disconnect two connectors (callout 1) and lift the color misregistration/image density sensor unit
to remove it.
Figure 6-91 Remove the color-misregistration and image-density sensor unit (2 of 3)

NOTE: When reassembling, snap the sensor on the rod (callout 1) and align the springs.
Figure 6-92 Remove the color-misregistration and image-density sensor unit (3 of 3)

Pressure-release sensor unit
1.

ENWW

Remove the following:
●

Duplex switchback tray. See Duplex switchback tray on page 304.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

Service-replaceable parts 313

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Front door assembly. See Front door assembly on page 311.

From the front of the product, disconnect the two connectors (callout 1).
Figure 6-93 Remove the pressure-release sensor unit (1 of 2)

From the right side of the product, remove one screw (callout 1), and then the pressure-release
sensor unit (callout 2).
Figure 6-94 Remove the pressure-release sensor unit (2 of 2)

314 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Scanner cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

Duplex switchback tray. See Duplex switchback tray on page 304.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Front door assembly. See Front door assembly on page 311.

●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

●

Right upper cover. See Right upper cover on page 309.

●

Optical scanner. See Optical scanner on page 358.

Remove eight screws (callout 1) and then remove the scanner cover (callout 2).

2
1

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 315

Laser/scanner assembly (yellow and magenta)
1.

Remove the following:
●

Duplex switchback tray. See Duplex switchback tray on page 304.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

●

Right upper cover. See Right upper cover on page 309.

●

Optical scanner. See Optical scanner on page 358.

●

Scanner cover. See Scanner cover on page 315.

Remove one cover (callout 1).
Figure 6-95 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (yellow and magenta) (1 of 3)

316 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).
Figure 6-96 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (yellow and magenta) (2 of 3)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 317

Unhook three springs (callout 1). Slide the laser/scanner assembly to the right, and then lift to
remove it.
Figure 6-97 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (yellow and magenta) (3 of 3)

CAUTION: Use care when replacing the cables for the laser/scanner assemblies. The traces on
the cable ends can be damaged when reinserted.
Figure 6-98 Replace cables

318 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Laser/scanner assembly (cyan and black)
1.

Remove the following:
●

Duplex switchback tray. See Duplex switchback tray on page 304.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

●

Right upper cover. See Right upper cover on page 309.

●

Optical scanner. See Optical scanner on page 358.

●

Scanner cover. See Scanner cover on page 315.

Push the tab (callout 1), and then slide the rod (callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove it.
Figure 6-99 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (cyan and black) (1 of 3)

1
2

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 319

Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).
Figure 6-100 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (cyan and black) (2 of 3)

320 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Unhook three springs (callout 2), and then remove the laser/scanner assembly (callout 3).
Figure 6-101 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (cyan and black) (3 of 3)

CAUTION: Use care when replacing the cables for the laser/scanner assemblies. The traces on
the cable ends can be damaged when reinserted.
Figure 6-102 Replace cables

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 321

VOC fan
1.

Remove the following:
●

Duplex switchback tray. See Duplex switchback tray on page 304.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

●

Right upper cover. See Right upper cover on page 309.

●

Optical scanner. See Optical scanner on page 358.

Remove one screw (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the VOC
fan (callout 3).
Figure 6-103 Remove the VOC fan

322 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Duplexing reverse unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Duplex switchback tray. See Duplex switchback tray on page 304.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

●

Right upper cover. See Right upper cover on page 309.

●

Optical scanner. See Optical scanner on page 358.

●

VOC fan. See VOC fan on page 322.

Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then the duplexing
reverse unit (callout 3).
Figure 6-104 Remove the duplexing reverse unit

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 323

Face-down delivery unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Duplex switchback tray. See Duplex switchback tray on page 304.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

●

Right upper cover. See Right upper cover on page 309.

●

Optical scanner. See Optical scanner on page 358.

●

VOC fan. See VOC fan on page 322.

●

Duplexing reverse unit. See Duplexing reverse unit on page 323.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove one screw (callout 2), and then move the inner cover
(callout 3) to the side.
Figure 6-105 Remove the face-down delivery unit (1 of 3)

3
1

324 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove two screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the gear cover (callout
3).
Figure 6-106 Remove the face-down delivery unit (2 of 3)

3
2

Remove three screws (callout 1), and then the face-down delivery unit (callout 2).
Figure 6-107 Remove the face-down delivery unit (3 of 3)

1
2

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 325

Face-down cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

Duplex switchback tray. See Duplex switchback tray on page 304.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

●

Right upper cover. See Right upper cover on page 309.

●

Optical scanner. See Optical scanner on page 358.

●

VOC fan. See VOC fan on page 322.

●

Duplexing reverse unit. See Duplexing reverse unit on page 323.

●

Face-down delivery unit. See Face-down delivery unit on page 324.

Remove three screws (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the facedown cover (callout 3).
Figure 6-108 Remove face-down cover

326 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Right-door assembly
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

Open the right door.

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then the handle.
Figure 6-109 Remove right-door assembly (1 of 4)

Remove one screw (callout 1). Slide the right door arm (callout 2) in the direction indicated to
remove it.
Figure 6-110 Remove right-door assembly (2 of 4)

1
2

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 327

Remove two screws (callout 1), release the two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the right inner
cover.
Figure 6-111 Remove right-door assembly (3 of 4)

Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then lift the
right-door assembly (callout 3) to remove it.
Figure 6-112 Remove right-door assembly (4 of 4)

328 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Duplexing feed unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

●

Right-door assembly. See Right-door assembly on page 327.

Lift the duplexing feed upper guide (callout 1) in the direction indicated to remove.
Figure 6-113 Remove the duplexing feed unit (1 of 3)

Remove two screws (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the cover (callout
3).
Figure 6-114 Remove the duplexing feed unit (2 of 3)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 329

Remove five screws (callout 1), one wire retainer (callout 2), one connector (callout 3), and then
remove the duplexing feed unit.
Figure 6-115 Remove the duplexing feed unit

3
2
1

330 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Multipurpose-tray (Tray 1) pickup unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear-left cover. See Rear-left cover on page 260.

●

Rear-right cover. See Rear-right cover on page 261.

●

Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 262.

●

Right-door assembly. See Right-door assembly on page 327.

●

Duplexing feed unit. See Duplexing feed unit on page 329.

Spread two tabs (callout 1) and remove the MP tray lower cover (callout 2). Close Tray 1.
NOTE: Close Tray 1 and push it flat.
Figure 6-116 Remove the multipurpose tray (1 of 5)

1
2

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 331

Remove five screws (callout 1), and then one grounding screw (callout 2).
Figure 6-117 Remove the multipurpose tray (2 of 5)

1
2

Remove the MP tray pickup unit and the MP tray together.
Figure 6-118 Remove the multipurpose tray (3 of 5)

332 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 6-119 Remove the multipurpose tray (4 of 5)

With the door closed, use a flat blade screw driver to pry the left side out. Pull the tray in the
directions indicated to remove.
Figure 6-120 Remove the multipurpose tray (5 of 5)

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 333

Thermopile unit
1.

Remove the following user replaceable parts:
●

Fuser. See Fuser on page 233.

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one tab (callout 2).
Figure 6-121 Remove the thermopile unit (1 of 2)

Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the thermopile unit (callout 2).
Figure 6-122 Remove the thermopile unit (2 of 2)

334 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Front-lower cover
1.

Remove the following user replaceable parts:
●

Tray 2. See Tray 2 on page 248.

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the front-lower cover (callout 2).
Figure 6-123 Remove front-lower cover

ENWW

Service-replaceable parts 335

ITB duct
1.

Remove the following user replaceable parts:
●

Fuser unit. See Fuser on page 233.

Release four tabs (callout 1).
Figure 6-124 Remove the ITB duct (1 of 2)

Remove the ITB duct.
Figure 6-125 Remove the ITB duct (2 of 2)

NOTE: Removal sequence 7 is complete. To reassemble, reverse the steps in this procedure and all
previous procedures of this sequence.

336 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Optional input trays
This section provides procedures for removal and replacement of field-replaceable units (FRUs) for
optional input trays.

1x500-sheet input tray
Right door
1.

Open the right door.

Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the arm (callout 2).
Figure 6-126 Remove the right door (1 of 2)

ENWW

Optional input trays 337

Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the stopper (callout 2). Lift the right door (callout 3)
to remove it.
Figure 6-127 Remove the right door (2 of 2)

338 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Lower-rear cover
1.

Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the lever (callout 2).
Figure 6-128 Remove the lower-rear cover (1 of 2)

Remove four screws (callout 1). Release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the rear cover (callout
3).
Figure 6-129 Remove the lower rear cover (2 of 2)

ENWW

Optional input trays 339

Front-right cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

Tray 3. See Trays 3, 4, and 5 on page 248.

Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 6-130 Remove the front-right cover (1 of 2)

1
3.

Open the right door. Remove one screw (callout 1). Lift the front-right cover (callout 2) to remove
it.
Figure 6-131 Remove the front-right cover (2 of 2)

340 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Right cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

Right door. See Right door on page 337.

●

Front-right cover. See Front-right cover on page 340.

●

Rear cover. See Lower-rear cover on page 339.

Remove three screws (callout 1) and then remove the right cover (callout 2).
Figure 6-132 Remove the right cover

ENWW

Optional input trays 341

Front-upper cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

Tray 2. See Tray 2 on page 248.

●

Tray 3. See Trays 3, 4, and 5 on page 248.

●

Front-right cover. See Front-right cover on page 340.

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the front-upper cover (callout 2).
Figure 6-133 Remove the front-upper cover

342 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Lower-left cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

Front-upper cover. See Front-upper cover on page 342.

Remove one screw (callout 1). Slide the left cover (callout 2) in the direction indicated to remove
it.
Figure 6-134 Remove the lower-left cover

ENWW

Optional input trays 343

Front-lower door
1.

Remove the following:
●

Tray 3. See Trays 3, 4, and 5 on page 248.

Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the arm (callout 2).
Figure 6-135 Remove the front-lower cover (1 of 2)

2
3.

Clear the bottom pin (callout 1), and then lift the front-lower door (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 6-136 Remove the front-lower cover (2 of 2)

344 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Box
1.

Remove the following:
●

Front-lower door. See Front-lower cover on page 335.

●

Front-right cover. See Front-right cover on page 340.

Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the box with the inner cover (callout 2).
Figure 6-137 Remove the box (1 of 2)

2
3.

Release the five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the box (callout 2).
Figure 6-138 Remove the box (2 of 2)

ENWW

Optional input trays 345

Pickup unit
The procedure varies depending on whether the input tray is attached to the product.
Remove the following:
●

Tray 3. See Trays 3, 4, and 5 on page 248.

●

Lower-rear cover. See Lower-rear cover on page 339.

●

Right cover. See Right cover on page 341.

Input tray is attached
Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the cassette guide rail (callout 2).
Figure 6-139 Remove the pickup unit

346 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Paper feeder is not attached
1.

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the feed guide (callout 2).
Figure 6-140 Remove the pickup unit (1 of 3)

1
2.

Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 6-141 Remove the pickup unit (2 of 3)

ENWW

Optional input trays 347

Remove one screw (callout 1). Grasp the pickup unit (callout 2), pull the left end off the sheet metal
tab, and then shift it left to release the right shaft. Pull the pickup unit forward to remove it.
Figure 6-142 Remove the pickup unit (2 of 3)

2
NOTE: If the pickup unit does not come out easily, gently slide a flat screwdriver over the top of
the pickup unit to clear any interference with the feed guide.

348 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Auto-close unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Tray 4. See Trays 3, 4, and 5 on page 248.

●

Lower rear cover. See Lower-rear cover on page 339.

Disconnect the two connectors (callout 1).
Figure 6-143 Remove the auto-close unit (1 of 2)

1
3.

Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the auto-close unit (callout 2).
Figure 6-144 Remove the auto-close unit (2 of 2)

ENWW

Optional input trays 349

Pickup motor
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear cover. See Lower-rear cover on page 339.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the pickup motor (callout 3).
Figure 6-145 Remove the pickup motor

350 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Paper-feeder driver PCA
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear cover. See Lower-rear cover on page 339.

Disconnect seven connectors on the paper-feeder driver PCA.

Remove two screws (callout 1), release two tabs (callout 2), and then remove the paper-feeder
driver PCA (callout 3).
Figure 6-146 Remove the paper-feeder driver PCA

ENWW

Optional input trays 351

3x500-sheet input tray
Right door
To remove use the same procedure as with the 1 x 500 input tray. See Right door on page 337.

Lower-rear cover
To remove use the same procedure as with the 1x500-sheet input tray. See Lower-rear cover
on page 339.

Front-right cover
To remove use the same procedure as with the 1x500-sheet input tray. See Front-right cover
on page 340.

Right cover
To remove use the same procedure as with the 1x500-sheet input tray. See Right cover on page 341.

Front-upper cover
To remove use the same procedure as with the 1x500-sheet input tray. See Front-upper cover
on page 342.

Left cover
To remove use the same procedure as that found with the 1x500-sheet input tray. See Lower-left cover
on page 343.

352 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Pickup unit (middle cassette)
1.

Remove the following:
●

Cassette. See Cassette (Tray 2) pickup unit on page 259.

●

Lower-rear cover. See Lower-rear cover on page 339.

●

Right cover. See Right cover on page 341.

Disconnect the three connectors (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 6-147 Remove the pickup unit (middle cassette) (1 of 2)

2
1

Remove one screw (callout 1). Grasp the pickup unit (callout 2), and then shift to the left to release
the right shaft. Pull the unit forward to remove it.
Figure 6-148 Remove the pickup unit (middle cassette) (2 of 2)

ENWW

Optional input trays 353

Pickup unit (lower cassette)
To remove use the same procedure as with the pickup unit (middle cassette). See Pickup unit (middle
cassette) on page 353.

Pickup unit (upper cassette)
The procedure varies depending on whether the input tray is attached to the product.
Remove the following:
●

Pickup unit (middle cassette). See Pickup unit (middle cassette) on page 353.

Paper feeder is attached
Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the cassette guide rail (callout 2).
Figure 6-149 Remove the pickup unit (upper cassette)

1
2

354 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Paper feeder is not attached
1.

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the feed guide (callout 2).
Figure 6-150 Remove the pickup unit (upper cassette) (1 of 3)

1
2.

Disconnect the three connectors (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 6-151 Remove the pickup unit (upper cassette) (2 of 3)

ENWW

Remove one screw (callout 1).

Optional input trays 355

Grasp the pickup unit (callout 2) and shift to the left to release the right shaft. Pull the unit forward
to remove it.
Figure 6-152 Remove the pickup unit (upper cassette) (3 of 3)

356 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Auto-close unit
To remove use the same procedure as with the 1x500-sheet input tray. See Auto-close unit
on page 349.

Pickup motor
To remove use the same procedure as with the 1x500-sheet input tray. See Pickup motor
on page 350.

Paper-feeder driver PCA
To remove use the same procedure as with the 1x500-sheet input tray. See Paper-feeder driver PCA
on page 351.

ENWW

Optional input trays 357

Scanner
Optical scanner
CAUTION: This procedure requires two people to lift the optical scanner.
NOTE: To reduce the weight of the optical scanner, remove the ADF. ADF assembly on page 397.
1.

Remove the following:
●

Duplex switchback tray. See Duplex switchback tray on page 304.

●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

●

Right upper cover. See Right upper cover on page 309.

Lock the wheels and scanner of the product and open the right door.

Open the front door and locate the small front internal cover (callout 1). To remove the cover,
release the tab (callout 2) upwards. Disconnect one connector (callout 3).
Figure 6-153 Remove optical scanner (1 of 7)

3
1
2

358 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

From the front of the scanner, remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove one large pin (callout
2).
Figure 6-154 Remove optical scanner (2 of 7)

2 1

From the left side of the scanner, remove two screws (screws are captive and stay with the pins)
(callout 1), remove two small pins (callout 2), and then remove one ground screw (callout 3).
Figure 6-155 Remove optical scanner (3 of 7)

1
2

ENWW

Scanner 359

From the rear of the scanner, remove one screw (callout 1), remove one large pin (callout 2), and
then disconnect two connectors (callout 3).
Figure 6-156 Remove optical scanner (4 of 7)

Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the two retainers (callout 2).
Figure 6-157 Remove optical scanner (5 of 7)

2
1

360 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Lift the optical scanner off the product.
Figure 6-158 Remove optical scanner (6 of 7)

NOTE: When replacing the optical scanner, you may need to add jumpers to the SCB and perform
a firmware update. The jumpers are included with the optical scanner. See Configure the SCB
when replacing the carriage unit, inverter, SCB, or optical scanner on page 378.
NOTE: When reinstalling, enter the calibration value into the control panel. The calibration value
is found on the back of the product as shown. See Calibrate the scanner on page 130.
Figure 6-159 Remove optical scanner (7 of 7)

ENWW

Scanner 361

Upper-left scanner cover
1.

Using a small flat-head screwdriver, remove three adhesive screw caps (callout 1).

Remove three screws (callout 1) and then the upper-left scanner cover (callout 2).
Figure 6-160 Upper-left scanner cover

362 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Upper-right scanner cover
1.

Using a small flat-head screwdriver, remove three adhesive screw caps (callout 1).

Remove three screws (callout 1) and then the upper-right scanner cover (callout 2).
Figure 6-161 Remove upper-right scanner cover

ENWW

Scanner 363

Control panel
1.

Open the ADF.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the ADF for this procedure.

Use a flat blade screw driver to remove the control panel overlays.
Figure 6-162 Remove control panel (1 of 3)

Figure 6-163 Remove control panel (2 of 3)

364 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove the control panel, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 6-164 Remove control panel (3 of 3)

ENWW

Scanner 365

Front scanner cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

Face-down bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 364

●

Upper-left scanner cover. See Upper-left scanner cover on page 362

●

Upper-right scanner cover. See Upper-right scanner cover on page 363

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306

Remove four screws (callout 1).
Figure 6-165 Remove front cover (1 of 2)

366 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove the front cover.
Figure 6-166 Remove front cover (2 of 2)

ENWW

Scanner 367

Lower-left scanner cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

Face-down bin. See Face-down cover on page 326.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 364.

●

Upper-left scanner cover. See Upper-left scanner cover on page 362.

●

Upper-right cover. See Upper-right scanner cover on page 363.

●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Front scanner cover. See Front scanner cover on page 366.

Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 6-167 Remove lower left cover (1 of 2)

368 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove one screw (callout 1) and then the lower left cover.
Figure 6-168 Remove lower left cover (2 of 2)

ENWW

Scanner 369

Lower-right scanner cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

Face-down bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 364.

●

Upper-right scanner cover. See Upper-right scanner cover on page 363.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Front scanner cover. See Front scanner cover on page 366.

●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

Remove three screws (callout 1), and then the lower-right cover (callout 2).
Figure 6-169 Remove lower right cover

1
2

370 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Top scanner cover
1.

Remove the following:
●

ADF. See ADF assembly on page 397.

Using a small flat-head screwdriver remove three adhesive screw caps (callout 1).
Figure 6-170 Remove top cover (1 of 2)

Remove three screws (callout 1) and then the top cover.
Figure 6-171 Remove top cover (2 of 2)

ENWW

Scanner 371

Glass assembly
CAUTION: Wear gloves to avoid dust and fingerprints on the glass.
1.

Remove the following:
●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 364.

●

Upper-left scanner cover. See Upper-left scanner cover on page 362.

●

Upper-right scanner cover. See Upper-right scanner cover on page 363

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Front scanner cover. See Front scanner cover on page 366.

●

Top scanner cover. See Top scanner cover on page 371.

Remover four screws (callout 1) and two retainers (callout 2).
Figure 6-172 Remove glass assembly

1
2

372 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Carriage unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 364.

●

Upper-left scanner cover. See Upper-left scanner cover on page 362.

●

Upper-right scanner cover. See Upper-right scanner cover on page 363.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Front scanner cover. See Front scanner cover on page 366.

●

Top scanner cover. See Top scanner cover on page 371.

●

Glass assembly. See Glass assembly on page 372.

NOTE: When replacing the carriage unit, you must also replace the inverter. See Inverter unit
on page 384.
NOTE: When replacing carriage unit, you may need to add jumpers to the SCB and to perform
a firmware update. See Configure the SCB when replacing the carriage unit, inverter, SCB, or
optical scanner on page 378.
2.

Remove two FFC-cables from the carriage unit (callout 1).
Figure 6-173 Remove carriage unit (1 of 8)

ENWW

Scanner 373

Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 6-174 Remove carriage unit (2 of 8)

Slide the rod (callout 1) half way out.
Figure 6-175 Remove carriage unit (3 of 8)

374 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Loosen one tension screw (callout 1).
Figure 6-176 Remove carriage unit (4 of 8)

Pull the tension spring to loosen the belt (callout 1).
Figure 6-177 Remove carriage unit (5 of 8)

ENWW

Scanner 375

Remove the belt from the guide.
Figure 6-178 Remove carriage unit (6 of 8)

Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 6-179 Remove carriage unit (7 of 8)

376 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove the carriage unit.
Figure 6-180 Remove carriage unit (8 of 8)

ENWW

Scanner 377

Configure the SCB when replacing the carriage unit, inverter, SCB, or optical
scanner
Two manufacturers have supplied the carriage unit and inverter for the scanner. When replacing either
FRU, you must replace both FRUs with replacements from the same manufacturer. You can determine
the manufacturer by the color the of lamp cable. When replacing the SCB or optical scanner, you must
verify that the SCB is configured correctly.
1.

Determine the color of the lamp cable (callout 1) on the carriage unit.
Figure 6-181 Lamp cable

If the cable is black, make sure there are two jumpers (callout 1) on the SCB. If the replacement
cable is white, make sure these jumpers (callout 1) are not on the SCB.
Figure 6-182 Jumpers on the SCB

NOTE: If replacing the SCB or optical scanner, make sure the SCB is correctly configured with
or without jumpers depending on the color of the lamp cable.

378 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Calibrate the product from the control panel.

Perform a remote firmware update.

Scanner 379

Pulley assembly and motor unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 364.

●

Upper-left scanner cover. See Upper-left scanner cover on page 362.

●

Upper-right scanner cover. See Upper-right scanner cover on page 363.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Front scanner cover. See Front scanner cover on page 366.

●

Top scanner cover. See Top scanner cover on page 371.

●

Glass assembly. See Glass assembly on page 372.

Remove one screw (callout 1) and then the carriage fan duct (callout 2).
Figure 6-183 Remove pulley assembly and motor unit (1 of 5)

1
2

380 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Loosen one screw (callout 1) on the pulley.
Figure 6-184 Remove pulley assembly and motor unit (2 of 5)

Loosen the belt and then remove it.
Figure 6-185 Remove pulley assembly and motor unit (3 of 5)

ENWW

Scanner 381

Remove three screws (callout 1), and them remove the pulley assembly.
Figure 6-186 Remove pulley assembly and motor unit (4 of 5)

1
6.

Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor.
Figure 6-187 Remove pulley assembly and motor unit (5 of 5)

382 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Rail
1.

Remove the following:
●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 364.

●

Upper-left scanner cover. See Upper-left scanner cover on page 362.

●

Upper-right scanner cover. See Upper-right scanner cover on page 363.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Front scanner cover. See Front scanner cover on page 366.

●

Top scanner cover. See Top scanner cover on page 371.

●

Glass assembly. See Glass assembly on page 372.

●

Carriage unit. See Carriage unit on page 373.

Release the three wire retainers (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the
rail (callout 3).
Figure 6-188 Remove rail

ENWW

Scanner 383

Inverter
Inverter unit
CAUTION: Wear gloves to avoid fingerprints on cage.
1.

Remove the following:
●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 364.

●

Upper-left scanner cover. See Upper-left scanner cover on page 362.

●

Upper-right scanner cover. See Upper-right scanner cover on page 363.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Front scanner cover. See Front scanner cover on page 366.

●

Top scanner cover. See Top scanner cover on page 371.

●

Glass assembly. See Glass assembly on page 372.

NOTE: When replacing the inverter, you must also replace the carriage unit. See Carriage unit
on page 373.
NOTE: When replacing the inverter, you may need to add jumpers to the SCB and perform a
firmware update. See Configure the SCB when replacing the carriage unit, inverter, SCB, or optical
scanner on page 378.
2.

Remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect two connectors (callout 2).
Figure 6-189 Remove inverter (1 of 3)

2
2

384 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove the top inverter cage (callout 1).
Figure 6-190 Remove inverter (2 of 3)

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the inverter (callout 2).
Figure 6-191 Remove inverter (3 of 3)

1
2

ENWW

Scanner 385

Lid sensor
1.

Remove the following:
●

Face-down output bin. See Face-down output bin on page 271.

●

Control panel. See Control panel on page 364.

●

Upper-left scanner cover. See Upper-left scanner cover on page 362.

●

Upper-right scanner cover. See Upper-right scanner cover on page 363.

●

Front lower cover. See Front lower cover on page 305.

●

Inner cover. See Inner cover on page 306.

●

Front scanner cover. See Front scanner cover on page 366.

●

Top scanner cover. See Top scanner cover on page 371.

●

Glass assembly. See Glass assembly on page 372.

Remove one screw (callout 1).
Figure 6-192 Remove lid sensor (1 of 3)

386 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove one connector (callout 1) and then remove the lid sensor (callout 2).
Figure 6-193 Remove lid sensor (2 of 3)

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the lid sensor (callout 2).
Figure 6-194 Remove lid sensor (3 of 3)

1
2

ENWW

Scanner 387

SCB, CPB, and SCUID
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

Remove the cage door.
Figure 6-195 Remove SCB and CPB (1 of 5)

Disconnect ten connectors (callout 1).
Figure 6-196 Remove SCB and CPB (2 of 5)

388 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then slide the cage assembly (callout 2) to the right to remove.
Figure 6-197 Remove SCB, CPB, and SCUID (3 of 5)

Remove one screw (callout 1), disconnect one cable (callout 2), and then remove the SCUID
(callout 3).
Figure 6-198 Remove SCB, CPB, and SCUID (4 of 5)

2
3

ENWW

Scanner 389

Remove two screws (callout 1) and then slide the SCB (callout 2) to the left to remove. Remove
five screws (callout 3), and then remove the CPB (callout 4).
Figure 6-199 Remove SCB, CPB, and SCUID (5 of 5)

NOTE: When replacing the SCB, you may need to add jumpers to the SCB and perform a firmware
update. See Configure the SCB when replacing the carriage unit, inverter, SCB, or optical scanner
on page 378.

390 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Power-supply unit
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

Open the PCA cage.

Remove four screws (callout 1), and then release two wire harnesses (callout 2).
Figure 6-200 Remove power supply unit (1 of 3)

1
2

Disconnect five connectors (callout 1), and then release two wire harnesses.
Figure 6-201 Remove power supply unit (2 of 3)

ENWW

Scanner 391

Remove the power supply unit (callout 1).
Figure 6-202 Remove power supply unit (3 of 3)

392 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Scanner fan
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

Remove one connector (callout 1), and then remove the fan (callout 2).
Figure 6-203 Remove scanner fan

1
2

ENWW

Scanner 393

SCB fan
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the fan (callout 2).
Figure 6-204 Remove the SCB fan

394 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Control panel fan
1.

Remove the following:
●

Front scanner cover. See Front scanner cover on page 366.

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the fan (callout 2).
Figure 6-205 Remove control panel fan

1
2

ENWW

Scanner 395

Fan filter
1.

Remove the following:
●

Rear scanner cover. See Rear scanner cover on page 308.

Remove two fan covers (callout 1), and then remove the fan filters (callout 2).
Figure 6-206 Remove fan filter

396 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

ADF
ADF assembly
1.

Remove four screws (callout 1) and four tabs, and then remove the SCB cover.
Figure 6-207 Remove the ADF assembly (1 of 4)

Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and release one wire retainer (callout 2).
Figure 6-208 Remove the ADF assembly (2 of 4)

ENWW

ADF 397

Remove one ground screw (callout 1).
Figure 6-209 Remove the ADF assembly (3 of 4)

Lift the ADF up and off of the product.
NOTE: Be careful not to catch the ADF wire harness on the sharp edges of the plastic scanner
covers.
Figure 6-210 Remove the ADF assembly (4 of 4)

398 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

ADF input tray sensors
1.

Open the ADF jam cover and raise the ADF input tray into the upright position. Remove two screws
(callout 1), and then carefully remove the input tray back plate (callout 2).
TIP: The grounding clip on the rear mounting screw is not captive. Do not lose this clip when the
screw is removed.

Figure 6-211 Remove the ADF sensors (1 of 2)

ENWW

ADF 399

Disconnect the sensor connector and carefully remove the sensor. Repeat this step for the
remaining sensor.
Figure 6-212 Remove the ADF sensors (2 of 2)

400 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Separation floor assembly
1.

Open the ADF jam cover.
Figure 6-213 Remove the ADF separation floor assembly (1 of 4)

Rotate the separation floor assembly into the upright position.
Figure 6-214 Remove the ADF separation floor assembly (2 of 4)

ENWW

ADF 401

Lift up on the end of the separation floor assembly nearest the front of the device to release the
keyed hinge pin.
TIP: When you reinstall the separation floor assembly, make sure that the keyed hinge pin is fully
seated in the ADF assembly.
Figure 6-215 Remove the ADF separation floor assembly (3 of 4)

Slide the separation floor assembly toward the front of the device to release the rear hinge pin and
remove the assembly.
Figure 6-216 Remove the ADF separation floor assembly (4 of 4)

402 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Diverter
1.

Remove the ADF separation floor assembly. See Separation floor assembly on page 401.

Grasp the middle of the diverter and gently flex it up and away from the ADF.
Figure 6-217 Remove the ADF diverter (1 of 2)

Flex the diverter until you can release the pin nearest the front of the device, and then remove the
diverter.
Figure 6-218 Remove the ADF diverter (2 of 2)

ENWW

ADF 403

Jam cover
1.

Open the ADF jam cover.
Figure 6-219 Remove the ADF jam cover (1 of 3)

Use a small flat-blade screw driver to rotate the retainer clip on the rear jam cover hinge pin until
the groove in the shaft is exposed (callout 1). Place the tip of a small flat-blade screwdriver in the
groove in the shaft and slide the shaft toward the back of the printer to release the cover (callout 2).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the spring or dislodge the retainer clip. Slightly closing and
opening the jam cover might make the shaft easier to move.
Figure 6-220 Remove the ADF jam cover (2 of 3)

404 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Rotate the jam cover up and away from the ADF to remove it.
Figure 6-221 Remove the ADF jam cover (3 of 3)

ENWW

ADF 405

Hinge assemblies
1.

Remove the ADF and lay it upside down on a flat surface. See ADF assembly on page 397.

Remove eight screws (callout 1) and remove the ADF hinges (callout 2).
Figure 6-222 Remove the ADF hinges

406 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Float assembly
1.

Remove the ADF and lay it upside down on a flat surface. See ADF assembly on page 397.

Locate the float assembly.
Figure 6-223 Remove the ADF float assembly (1 of 5)

Release one tab at the hinge end of the float assembly and carefully rotate the end of the assembly
up and away from the ADF.
CAUTION: The springs behind the float assembly are not captive and can easily be lost. Always
remove the ADF and place it upside down on a flat surface before you remove the float assembly.
Figure 6-224 Remove the ADF float assembly (2 of 5)

ENWW

ADF 407

Release the tab at the opposite end of the float assembly and remove the assembly.
Figure 6-225 Remove the ADF float assembly (3 of 5)

Make sure that the springs are correctly seated in the spring holders (callout 1) when you reinstall
the float assembly. The springs must be installed in the spring holders that are located closest to
the locking tabs.
CAUTION: The pin on the bottom of the float must be placed in the hole in the ADF chassis. Make
sure the pin is correctly positioned to prevent the float from being damaged when you press down
on the float.
Figure 6-226 Remove the ADF float assembly (4 of 5)

408 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Make sure that the metal strip (callout 2) along the edge of the float is next to the white backing
when you reinstall the float. Push down on the float until the clips snap over the locking tabs at
each end of the float.
Figure 6-227 Remove the ADF float assembly (5 of 5)

TIP: When the float assembly and springs are correctly reinstalled, the float should freely move
up and down when you push on it with your finger.

ENWW

ADF 409

White backing
1.

Open the ADF.

Carefully pull the white backing off the ADF.
TIP: Make sure that you remove any small pieces of foam or adhesive left on the ADF after the
backing is removed.
Figure 6-228 Remove the ADF white backing (1 of 4)

Remove the protective paper backing from the adhesive side of the replacement white backing.

Place the replacement backing on the scanner glass. Center the replacement backing on the glass.
Figure 6-229 Remove the ADF white backing (2 of 4)

410 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Close the ADF. Push down firmly to adhere the replacement backing to the ADF.
Figure 6-230 Remove the ADF white backing (3 of 4)

Open the ADF and carefully remove the protective plastic covering from the backing.
Figure 6-231 Remove the ADF white backing (4 of 4)

ENWW

ADF 411

Front end cover (cap)
1.

Remove the ADF. See ADF assembly on page 397.

Open the ADF jam cover and remove one screw (callout 1).
TIP: This screw has a star washer. Make sure that you use the correct screw when you reinstall
the front end cover.
Figure 6-232 Remove the ADF front end cover (1 of 4)

Turn the ADF over and remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 6-233 Remove the ADF front end cover (2 of 4)

412 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to carefully release three locking tabs.
Figure 6-234 Remove the ADF front end cover ( 3 of 4)

Carefully rotate the front end cover off and away from the ADF and disconnect one connector
(callout 3).
Figure 6-235 Remove the ADF front end cover (4 of 4)

ENWW

ADF 413

Rear end cover (cap)
1.

Remove the ADF. See ADF assembly on page 397.

Open the ADF jam cover and remove one screw (callout 1).
TIP: This screw has a star washer. Make sure that you use the correct screw when you reinstall
the rear end cover.
Figure 6-236 Remove the ADF rear end cover (1 of 5)

Turn the ADF over and remove five screws (callout 2).
Figure 6-237 Remove the ADF rear end cover (2 of 5)

414 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Carefully pry the corner of the rear end cover off of the ADF.
Figure 6-238 Remove the ADF rear end cover (3 of 5)

Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to carefully pry the opposite corner of the rear end cap off of the
ADF.
Figure 6-239 Remove the ADF rear end cover (4 of 5)

ENWW

ADF 415

Carefully release two tabs (callout 3) along the top edge of the rear end cover and rotate the cover
off and away from the ADF.
NOTE: Before you remove the cover, look at how the tab on the cover fits underneath the tab on
the ADF chassis (callout 4). Make sure that you do not break the tabs when you remove the cover.
Figure 6-240 Remove the ADF rear end cover (5 of 5)

When you reinstall the ADF rear end cover, the tab on the cover near the ADF jam access door
must be positioned under the tab on the ADF chassis.
Figure 6-241 Reinstall the ADF rear end cover

416 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

ADF PCA and wire harness
1.

Remove the ADF rear end cap. See Rear end cover (cap) on page 414.

Disconnect six connectors (callout 1).
Figure 6-242 Remove the ADF PCA and wire harness (1 of 3)

Remove two screws (callout 2) and remove the ADF PCA.
Figure 6-243 Remove the ADF PCA and wire harness (2 of 3)

ENWW

ADF 417

Remove one ground screw (callout 3) and remove the ADF PCA wire harness (callout 4).
Figure 6-244 Remove the ADF PCA and wire harness (3 of 3)

418 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Input tray
1.

Remove the following components or assemblies:
●

ADF front end cap. See Front end cover (cap) on page 412.

●

ADF rear end cap. See Rear end cover (cap) on page 414.

Remove one ground screw (callout 1) and disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Clip one wire tie (callout 3) and release the ground cable and wire harness from the retainer
(callout 4).
Figure 6-245 Remove the ADF input tray (1 of 2)

Rotate the input tray into the upright position and release the keyed hinge pin nearest the front of
the ADF. Slide the tray toward the front of the ADF until the rear hinge pin clears the mounting hole,
and then remove the input tray.
Figure 6-246 Remove the ADF input tray (2 of 2)

ENWW

ADF 419

420 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Solve problems

●

Introduction

●

Troubleshooting process

●

Tools for troubleshooting

●

Solve performance problems

●

Solve connectivity problems

●

Control-panel message types

●

Control-panel messages

●

Event log messages

●

Paper-handling problems

●

Solve image quality problems

●

Interface troubleshooting

●

Engine diagnostics

●

Service-mode functions

●

Solve scanner problems

●

Solve fax problems

●

Solve e-mail problems

●

Diagrams

●

Signals

421

Introduction
The information in this troubleshooting chapter is presented with the assumption that the reader has a
basic understanding of the color laser-printing process. Explanations of each mechanical assembly,
printer systems, and the basic theory of operation are provided in chapter 5. Do not perform any of these
troubleshooting processes without fully understanding the function of each mechanism.
This chapter contains the following sections:
●

Troubleshooting process includes a pre-troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting
flowchart. These tools contain information about common printer errors that can inhibit proper
operation or create print-quality problems. These tools also include recommendations for solving
the cause of the error.

●

Tools for troubleshooting helps isolate the cause of product failures. This section includes
explanations of the product configuration page and the event log.

●

Solve performance problems lists types of performance problems, their causes and solutions.

●

Solve connectivity problems lists types of connectivity problems and possible solutions.

●

Control-panel message types lists the types of control-panel messages.

●

Control-panel messages explains each control-panel display message and suggests
recommendations for clearing the cause of each message. When the printer message indicates a
failure for which the root cause is not obvious, use the printer error troubleshooting section and the
troubleshooting tools section in this chapter to solve the problem.

●

Event log messages lists possible event log messages.

●

Paper handling problems provides techniques to solve feed problems. Explanations are provided
about print media checks, troubleshooting jams, and the differences between jams caused by
media and those caused by the product.

●

Solve image-quality problems suggests methods for solving print-quality problems.

●

Interface troubleshooting provides techniques for isolating communication problems to the
product hardware, printer configuration, network configuration, or software program.

●

Diagnostics provides instructions about how to gain access to and use the diagnostic tools that
are incorporated into the product.

●

Service-mode functions provides procedures for opening the Service menu and performing
service-oriented tasks. These tasks include counts for entering the serial number, service ID,
transfer unit maintenance, fuser maintenance, color page, and total page, and clearing the event
log.

●

Solve scanner problems provides solutions to problems with scanning.

●

Solve fax problems provides a link to additional information for troubleshooting fax problems.

●

Solve e-mail problems provides solutions to problems with e-mail.

●

Diagrams provides graphical locations and tables for the product's internal assemblies and
sensors.

422 Chapter 7 Solve problems

ENWW

Troubleshooting process
Determine the problem source
When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the product control panel alerts
you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible
causes of the problem and a troubleshooting flowchart to help you diagnose the root cause. The
remainder of the chapter provides steps for correcting problems.
●

Use the pre-troubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the
number of steps that are required to fix the problem.

●

Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The
flowchart guides you to the appropriate section of this chapter that provides steps for correcting
the malfunction.

Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following conditions:
●

Are supply items within their rated life? Print a supplies status page.

●

Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors? Print a configuration page. See
Configuration pages on page 431.

NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good
condition.

Pre-troubleshooting checklist
The list below describes basic questions to ask the customer to help quickly define the problem(s).
Table 7-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist
Environment

Media

ENWW

●

Is the product installed on a solid, level surface?

●

Is the product exposed to particle matter or dust?

●

Is the product connected to a dedicated 15 amp (min)
circuit?

●

Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the
specified power source?

●

Is the power supply plug inserted in the product and
directly to the wall outlet (not a power strip)?

●

Is the operating environment within the specified
parameters, as listed in Chapter 1 of this manual?

●

Is the product exposed to ammonia gas, such as that
produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials?

●

Is the product exposed to direct sunlight?

●

Does the customer use only supported media?

●

Is the media in good condition (contains no curls, folds,
and so forth)?

●

Is the media stored correctly and within environmental
limits?

Troubleshooting process 423

Table 7-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist (continued)
●

Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications?

●

Is the media placed in the tray correctly?

●

Are the paper guides aligned with the media?

●

Is the paper tray correctly installed in the product?

●

Is each print cartridge correctly installed?

●

Are original HP print cartridges installed?

●

Are the cartridges damaged?

●

Are the ITB and fuser correctly installed?

●

Is the ITB or fuser damaged?

Covers

●

Are the top cover and front cover closed?

Condensation

●

Does condensation occur following a temperature
change (particularly in winter following cold storage)? If
so, wipe the affected area dry or leave the product on for
10 to 20 minutes.

●

Was a print cartridge installed soon after being moved
from a cold to a warm room? If so, allow the product to sit
at room temperature for one to two hours, or overnight if
possible.

●

Check for and remove any non-HP components (print
cartridges, memory modules, and EIO cards) from the
product.

●

If hardware or software configuration has not changed, or
the problem is not associated with any specific software,
contact the Customer Care Center (see Chapter 1).

●

Remove the product from the network, and ensure that
the failure is associated with the product before beginning
troubleshooting.

●

For any print-quality issues, calibrate the product. See
Calibrate the product on page 566.

Input trays

Print cartridges

ITB and fuser

Miscellaneous

Troubleshooting checklist
If the product is not responding correctly, complete the steps in the following checklist, in order. If the
product does not pass a step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions. If a step resolves
the problem, you can stop without performing the other steps on the checklist.
1.

Make sure one of the following messages displays on the control panel: Ready, Paused, or Sleep
mode on. If no lights are on or the display does not say Ready, Paused, or Sleep mode on, see
Power-on checks on page 427. The backlight goes off when in sleep mode. Touch the screen or
a button or open a door to wake the product.

If the product is in the READY state, check to see if any messages appear on the control-panel
display. If any error messages appear, see Control-panel messages on page 440.

424 Chapter 7 Solve problems

ENWW

Check the cabling.
a.

Check the cable connection between the product and the computer or network port. Make
sure that the connection is secure.

Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible.

Check the network connection.

Check the cable from the formatter to the scanner.

Ensure that the print media that you are using meets specifications. See Supported paper and print
media sizes on page 63.

Print a configuration page. If the product is connected to a network, an HP Jetdirect page also
prints. See Configuration pages on page 431.

If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains print media.

If the page jams in the product, see Jams on page 519.

If the pages don't print, try an engine self test to rule out engine problems and to identify
formatter problems. See Engine-test button on page 583.

If the configuration page prints, check the following items:
a.

Is the issue print or copy related? If copy related, clean the scanner glass and adjust the copy
settings.

If the page prints correctly, the product hardware is working. The problem is with the computer
that you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program.

If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the product hardware.

Does the image quality meet the user's requirements? If yes, go to step 8. If no, check the following
items:
a.

Print the print-quality-troubleshooting pages.

Solve the print-quality problems, and then go to step 8.

At the computer, check to see if the print queue is stopped, paused, or set to print offline.
Windows: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes. Double-click
HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP.
-orMac OS X: Open Printer Setup Utility, and then double-click the line for the HP Color LaserJet
CM6040 MFP.

ENWW

Troubleshooting process 425

Verify that you have installed the HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP Series printer driver. Check the
program to make sure that you are using the HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP Series printer driver.

10. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works,
the problem is with the program that you are using. If this solution does not work (the document
does not print), complete these steps:
a.

Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed.

If you connected the product to the network, connect the product directly to a computer with
a USB cable. Redirect the product to the correct port, or reinstall the software, selecting the
new connection type that you are using.

Troubleshooting flowchart
This flowchart highlights the general processes that you can follow to quickly isolate and solve product
hardware problems.
Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. A “yes” answer to a question allows you to proceed to
the next major step. A “no” answer indicates that additional testing is needed. Proceed to the appropriate
section in this chapter, and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, proceed to
the next major step in this troubleshooting flowchart.
Table 7-2 Troubleshooting flowchart
1

Is the product on and does a readable
message display?

Follow the power-on troubleshooting checks. See Power-on checks
on page 427.

Power on
Yes

After the control-panel display is functional, go to step 2.
Ensure the product isn't in sleep mode by touching any button or
opening any door.

2
Control-panel
messages
3
Event log

Does the message Ready display on the
control panel?
Yes

Open the Troubleshooting menu and print
an event log to see the history of errors with
this product.

If an error message displays, see Control-panel messages
on page 440.
After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3.
If the event log does not print, see Event log messages
on page 511.
If paper jams inside the product, see Jams on page 519.

Does the event log print?
Yes

If error messages display on the control panel when you try to print
an event log, see Control-panel messages on page 440.
After successfully printing and evaluating the event log, go to step 4.

4
Information pages

Open the Information menu and print the
configuration pages to verify that all of the
accessories are installed.
Are all of the accessories installed?
Yes

If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration
pages, remove the accessory and reinstall it.
For more information about optional output devices, see Output
accessories and intermediate paper transfer unit (IPTU)
on page 667.
After evaluating the configuration pages, go to step 5.

Does the print quality meet the customer's
requirements?

Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect
tables.

Image quality
Yes

426 Chapter 7 Solve problems

After the print quality is acceptable, go to step 6.

ENWW

Table 7-2 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued)
6

Can the customer print successfully from the
host computer?

Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid
IP address is listed on the Jetdirect configuration page.

Yes. This is the end of
the troubleshooting
process.

If error messages display on the control panel, see Control-panel
messages on page 440

Interface
No

When the customer can print from the host computer, this is the end
of the troubleshooting process.

Power subsystem
Power-on checks
The basic product functions should start up as soon as the product is plugged into an electrical outlet
and the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the product does not start, use the information in
this section to isolate and solve the problem.
Power-on troubleshooting overview
Turn on the product power. If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or
asterisks remain on the control-panel display, perform power-on checks to locate the cause of the
problem.
During normal operation, the main cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the product power is turned
on. Place your hand over the holes in the plastic cover that is connected to the rear cover and opposite
of the formatter. If the fan is operating, you will feel air passing out of the product. You can also lean
close to the product and hear the fan operating. When this fan is operational, the DC side of the power
supply is functioning correctly.
After the fan is operating, the main motor turns on (unless the top cover is open, a jam condition is
sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You should be able to visually and audibly determine
if the main motor is turned on.
If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine,
formatter, and control-panel problems. Perform an engine test (see Engine-test button on page 583).
If the formatter is damaged, it might interfere with the engine test. If the page does not print, try removing
the formatter and then performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem
is almost certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them.
If the control panel is blank when you turn on the product, check the following items:

ENWW

Make sure that the product is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip) that
delivers the correct voltage. If an error 50.05 occurs, the product is configured for a different voltage
that it is connected to.

Make sure that the power switch is in the on position.

Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.

Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness is connected. See Control panel
on page 364.

Make sure that the formatter is seated and operating correctly.

Remove any HP Jetdirect or other EIO cards, and then try to turn the product on again.

Troubleshooting process 427

NOTE: If the control-panel display is blank, but the main cooling fan runs briefly after the product power
is turned on, try printing an page to determine whether the problem is with the control-panel display,
formatter, or other product components. See Engine-test button on page 583.

428 Chapter 7 Solve problems

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting
Internal print-quality test pages
Print-quality-troubleshooting pages
Use the built-in print-quality-troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems.
1.

Scroll to and touch Administration.

Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting.

Touch PQ Troubleshooting.

Touch Print.

The product returns to the Ready state after printing the print-quality-troubleshooting pages. Follow the
instructions on the pages that print out.

Diagnostics page
Use the diagnostics page to evaluate problems with color-plane registration, EP parameters, and print
quality.

ENWW

Touch Administration.

Touch Troubleshooting.

Touch Diagnostics Page.

Tools for troubleshooting 429

hp color LaserJet CP 6040 MFP Series

Diagnostics Page

1
4

3
PANTONE
Digital Color

2
5
6

ENGLISH

Calibration information

Parameters

Color density

Color-plane registration

Primary colors

Secondary colors

Cleaning page
Use the cleaning page to keep the fuser free of toner and paper particles that can sometimes accumulate
and cause specks to appear on the front or back side of print jobs.
HP recommends that you use the cleaning page when there is a print-quality issue.
A CLEANING message appears on the product control-panel display while the cleaning is taking place.
To work correctly, the cleaning page must be printed on copier-grade paper (not bond, heavy, or rough
paper). Discard the blank page that is printed when the task is complete.
1.

Scroll to and touch Administration.

Scroll to and touch Print Quality.

Touch Calibration/cleaning.

430 Chapter 7 Solve problems

ENWW

Press the up arrow or down arrow.

Touch Process cleaning page.

Configuration pages
Depending on the model, up to three pages print when you select Print Configuration. In addition to
the main configuration page, an embedded Jetdirect configuration page prints as well as a page for the
stapler/stacker.
Configuration page
Use the configuration page to view current product settings, to help troubleshoot product problems, or
to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer
languages.
1.

Touch Administration.

Touch Information.

Touch Configuration/Status Pages.

Touch Configuration Page.

Touch Print.

The message Printing Configuration displays on the control panel until the product finishes printing
the configuration page. The product returns to the Ready state after printing the configuration page.
NOTE: If the product is configured with EIO cards (for example, an HP Jetdirect print server) or an
optional hard-disk drive, an additional configuration page will print that provides information about those
devices.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 431

Figure 7-1 Configuration page
hp color LaserJet CP 6040 MFP Series

Configuration Page

5
2

7
8

ENGLISH

Printer information

Installed personalities and options

Color density

Calibration information

Memory

Event log

Security

Paper trays and options

432 Chapter 7 Solve problems

ENWW

HP embedded Jetdirect page
The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following
information.
Figure 7-2 HP embedded Jetdirect page
hp color LaserJet CP 6040 MFP Series

Embedded Jetdirect Page

HP Jetdirect Configuration indicates the product status, model number, hardware firmware version, port select, port
configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing identification, and manufactured date.

Security Settings

Network Statistics indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing errors
received, total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions.

TCP/IP includes the IP address.

IPX/SPX

Novell/NetWare

Always make sure the status line under the HP Jetdirect configuration lines indicates "I/O Card Ready".

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 433

Embedded protocol page
The embedded protocol page contains the following information.
Figure 7-3 Embedded protocol page
hp color LaserJet CP 6040 MFP Series

Embedded Protocol Page

IPX/SPX

Novell/NetWare

AppleTalk

DLC/LLC

434 Chapter 7 Solve problems

ENWW

Finding important information on the configuration pages
Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the e-mail gateways, is
especially helpful while servicing the product. This information is on the various configuration pages.
Table 7-3 Important information on the configuration pages on page 435 describes where to look for
this information.
Table 7-3 Important information on the configuration pages
Type of information

Specific information

Configuration page

Firmware date codes

DC controller

Look on the main configuration page,
under “Device Information.”

When you use the remote firmware upgrade
procedure, all of these firmware components
are upgraded.

Firmware datecode

Look on the main configuration page,
under “Device Information.”

Stapler/stacker firmware datecode

Look on the paper handling
configuration page, under “Product
Name.”

Embedded Jetdirect firmware version

Look on the embedded Jetdirect page,
under “HP Jetdirect Configuration.”

Accessories and internal storage

Internal disk (4700ph+ model only)

All optional devices that are installed on the
product should be listed on the main
configuration page.

Look on the main configuration page,
under “Installed Personalities and
Options.” Shows model and capacity.

Embedded HP Jetdirect

Look on the main configuration page,
under “Installed Personalities and
Options.” Shows model and ID.

Total RAM

Look on the main configuration page,
under “Memory.”

Duplex unit

Look on the main configuration page,
under “Paper Trays and Options.”

Additional 500-sheet feeders and optional
output devices

Additional 500-sheet feeders and
optional output devices

Look on the main configuration page,
under “Paper Trays and Options.”

Engine cycles and event logs

Engine cycles

Look on the main configuration page,
under “Device Information.”

Pages since last maintenance (print engine
maintenance count)

Pages since last maintenance (print
engine maintenance count)

Look on the main configuration page,
under “Device Information.”

Event-log information

Look on the main configuration page,
under “Event log.”

In addition, separate pages print for the
optional paper handling devices and the fax
accessory. These pages list more-detailed
information for those devices.

Total page counts and maintenance kit
counts are important for ongoing product
maintenance.
The configuration page lists only the three
most recent errors. To see a list of the 50
most recent errors, print an event log from the
Diagnostics menu.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting 435

Solve performance problems
Problem

Cause

Solution

Pages print but are totally blank.

The sealing tape might still be in the print
cartridges.

Verify that the sealing tape has been
completely removed from the print
cartridges.

The document might contain blank
pages.

Check the document that you are printing
to see if content appears on all of the
pages.

The product might be malfunctioning.

To check the product, print a
configuration page.

Heavier media types can slow the print
job.

Print on a different type of media.

Complex pages can print slowly.

Proper fusing may require a slower print
speed to ensure the best print quality.

The RLT photo fix options under HP
real life technologies on the Paper/
Quality tab of the print driver can cause
slow printing.

Deselect these options to improve print
speed.

The product might not be pulling media
correctly.

Make sure paper is loaded in the tray
correctly.

Pages print very slowly.

Pages did not print.

If the problem persists, you might need
to replace the pickup rollers and the
separation pad. See Customer support
on page 1129.
The media is jamming in the device.

Clear the jam. See Jams on page 519.

If using USB, the USB cable might be
defective or incorrectly connected.

●

Disconnect the USB cable at both
ends and reconnect it.

●

Try printing a job that has printed in
the past.

●

Try using a different USB cable.

Other devices are running on your
computer.

436 Chapter 7 Solve problems

The product might not share a USB port.
If you have an external hard drive or
network switchbox that is connected to
the same port as the product, the other
device might be interfering. To connect
and use the product, you must
disconnect the other device or you must
use two USB ports on the computer.

ENWW

Solve connectivity problems
Solve direct-connect problems
If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the USB cable.
●

Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.

●

Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 meters (5 feet). Replace the cable if necessary.

●

Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if
necessary.

Solve network connectivity problems
If the product is having problems communicating with the network, use the information in this section to
resolve the problem.

Solve network printing problems
NOTE: HP recommends that you use the product CD to install and set up the product on a network.
●

Make sure that the network cable is securely seated into the product's RJ45 connector.

●

Make sure that the Link LED on the formatter is lit. See Understand lights on the formatter
on page 580.

●

Make sure that the I/O card is ready. Print a configuration page (see Configuration pages
on page 431). If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, printing a configuration page also prints
a second page that shows the network settings and status.
NOTE: The HP Jetdirect print server supports various network protocols (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX,
Novell NetWare, AppleTalk, and DCL/LLC). Make sure that the correct protocols and network
parameters are set correctly.
On the HP Jetdirect configuration page, verify the following items for your protocol:

ENWW

◦

Under HP Jetdirect Configuration, the status is "I/O Card Ready."

◦

Protocol status is "Ready."

◦

An IP address is listed.

◦

The configuration method (Config by:) is listed correctly. See the network administrator if you
are not sure which method is correct.

●

Try printing the job from another computer.

●

To verify that a product works with a computer, use a USB cable to connect it directly to a computer.
You will have to reinstall the printing software. Print a document from a program that has printed
correctly in the past. If this works, a problem with the network might exist.

●

Contact your network administrator for assistance.

Solve connectivity problems 437

Verify communication over the network
If the HP Jetdirect configuration page shows an IP address for the product, use this procedure to verify
that you can communicate with the product over the network.
1.

Windows: Click Start, click Run, and then type cmd. An MS-DOS command prompt opens.
-orMac: Click Applications, click Utilities, and then open the Terminal application. The terminal
window opens.

Type ping followed by the IP address. For example, type ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where
"XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IPv4 address that is shown on the HP Jetdirect configuration page. If
the product is communicating over the network, the response is a list of replies from the product.

Verify that the IP address is not a duplicate address on the network by using the address resolution
protocol (arp -a) command. At the prompt, type arp -a. Find the IP address in the list and compare
its physical address to the hardware address that is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page
in the section called HP Jetdirect Configuration. If the addresses match, all network
communications are valid.

If you cannot verify that the product is communicating over the network, contact the network
administrator.

438 Chapter 7 Solve problems

ENWW

Control-panel message types
Four types of control-panel messages can indicate the status of or problems with the product.
Message type

Description

Status messages

Status messages reflect the current state of the product. They inform you of normal product operation
and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the product changes. Whenever
the product is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the status message Ready
appears if the product is online.

Warning messages

Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with the
. Some warning
Ready or status messages and remain until you press the checkmark button
messages are clearable. If Clearable Warnings is set to Job, the next print job clears these
messages.

Error messages

Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or clearing
a jam.
Some error messages are auto-continuable. If Auto-Continue is set on the menus, the product will
continue normal operation after an auto-continuable error message appears for 10 seconds.
NOTE: Pressing any button during the 10-second auto-continuable error message overrides the
Auto-Continue setting, and a button function takes precedence. For example, pressing the Stop
button pauses printing with an option to cancel the print job.

Critical-error messages

ENWW

Critical error messages inform you of a product failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by
turning the product off and then on. These messages are not affected by the Auto-Continue setting.
If a critical error persists, service is required.

Control-panel message types 439

Control-panel messages
Table 7-4 Control-panel messages
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

Full Remove all paper from
bin

The specified output bin is full and must be
emptied for printing to continue. The error
happens only after a job is sent, and it starts
out as a warning.

Empty the bin to continue printing.

10.00.YY Supply memory error (image
drum)

The product is unable to read the image drum 1.
data. The image drum is present but
defective.
2.
10.00.05 Supply memory error (black
●
image drum)

Open the front door and remove the
image drum, and then reinsert it.

●

10.00.06 Supply memory error (cyan
image drum)

●

If the error reappears, replace the image
drum. See Change image drums
on page 108.

10.00.07 Supply memory error
(magenta image drum)

●

10.00.08 Supply memory error (yellow
image drum)
1.

Open the front door and remove the
print cartridge, and then reinsert it.

Close the front door. If the message
reappears, turn the product off and then
on.

If the error reappears, replace the print
cartridge. See Change print cartridges
on page 105.

Open the front door and remove the
print cartridge or image drum, and then
reinsert it.

Close the front door. If the message
reappears, turn the product off and then
on.

If the error reappears, replace the print
cartridge or image drum. See Change
image drums on page 108 and Change
print cartridges on page 105.

Replace the toner assembly.

10.00.YY Supply memory error (print
cartridge)

10.10.YY Supply memory error (missing elabel)

The product is unable to read the cartridge
data. The print cartridge is present but
defective.
●

10.00.00 Supply memory error (black
print cartridge)

●

10.00.01 Supply memory error (cyan
print cartridge)

●

10.00.02 Supply memory error
(magenta print cartridge)

●

10.00.03 Supply memory error (yellow
print cartridge)

The product cannot read or write to at least
one e-label, or at least one e-label is missing.
●

440 Chapter 7 Solve problems

10.10.00 Supply memory error (e-label
for the black print cartridge)

●

10.10.01 Supply memory error (e-label
for the cyan print cartridge)

●

10.10.02 Supply memory error (e-label
for the magenta print cartridge)

●

10.10.03 Supply memory error (e-label
for the yellow print cartridge)

●

10.10.05 Supply memory error (e-label
for the black image drum)

●

10.10.06 Supply memory error (e-label
for the cyan image drum)

Close the front door. If the message
reappears, turn the product off and then
on.

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

10.90.XY - Replace Cartridge

Description
●

10.10.07 Supply memory error (e-label
for the magenta image drum)

●

10.10.08 Supply memory error (e-label
for the yellow image drum)

A toner replenishment malfunction occurred
and the toner concentration in the image
drum dropped below 30%. This applies to
both HP and non-HP print cartridges.
●

10.90.00 - Replace Black Cartridge

●

10.90.01 - Replace Cyan Cartridge

●

10.90.02 - Replace Magenta Cartridge

●

10.90.03 - Replace Yellow Cartridge

Recommended action

See Change print cartridges on page 105.
If replacing the print cartridge does not
resolve the problem, replace the image drum.
See Change image drums on page 108.
If replacing the image drum does not resolve
the problem, replace the appropriate
cartridge interface PCA. See Print-cartridge
interface PCA (yellow and magenta)
on page 300 or Print-cartridge interface PCA
(cyan and black) on page 299.

10.xx.yy Supply Memory Error

The product cannot read or write to at least
one print cartridge e-label, or an e-label is
missing from a print cartridge.

Reinstall the print cartridge, or install a new
HP print cartridge.

11.XX Internal clock error To continue
touch OK

The product's real time clock experienced an Whenever the product is turned off and then
error.
turned on again, set the time and date at the
control panel. See Use the control panel
on page 14.
If the error persists, you might need to replace
the formatter.

13.01 Paper feed 1, Paper late jam

●

The leading edge of the paper fed from
Tray 1 stopped before reaching the
registration sensor (C).

●

The leading edge of the paper fed from
Tray 2 stopped before reaching the
registration sensor (B).

●

The leading edge of the paper fed from
Tray 3 stopped before reaching the
registration sensor (A-1).

●

The leading edge of the paper fed from
Tray 4 stopped before reaching the
registration sensor (A-2).

●

The leading edge of the paper fed from
Tray 5 stopped before reaching the
registration sensor (A-3).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.02 Paper Stop Jam In Tray 2 at Sensor
D

The paper stopped at the registration sensor
(D).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.

ENWW

Control-panel messages 441

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

13.05 Paper Late Jam Between Sensors D
and F

The leading edge of the paper stopped
between the registration sensor (D) and the
fuser-output sensor (F).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.06 Paper Jam In Fuser

The paper stopped at the fuser-output sensor
(F).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.10 Paper Late Jam In Duplex Area
Sensors F - G

The leading edge of the paper stopped
between the output sensor (F) and
switchback sensor (G).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.11 Paper Stop Jam In Duplex Area at
Sensor G

The paper stopped at the switchback-jam
sensor (G).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.12 Paper Late Jam In Duplex Area
Sensors H - D

The duplex refeed paper stopped between
the duplexer-delivery sensor (H) and the
registration sensor (D).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.12.11

Finisher stay jam at either PI33 or PI34 when
engine powered on.

Signal generated from PI33 (upper-feedpath-entry sensor) and PI34 (upper-feedpath-exit sensor)

When the engine is powered on, the finisher's
upper-feed-path-entry sensor (PI33) or the
To locate these sensors, see Detect jams in
the stacker unit on page 724.
upper-feed-path-exit sensor (PI34) is
activated suggesting that there is paper in the
1. Open the top door and remove any
upper paper path of the finisher at sensors
media in the paper path (media detected
PI33 or PI34.
at PI33).

442 Chapter 7 Solve problems

Raise the upper paper path (exit)
delivery rollers and remove any media
in the paper path (media detected at
PI34).

Check these sensors for obstructions.
Verify that the sensor flags are not
damaged, move freely, and are correctly
aligned with the sensor body and
properly mounted. Also check wiring
and connectors for damage or loose
connections.

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

13.12.12

Description

Finisher delay jam at PI33.

Recommended action
4.

Carefully clean the sensor body by
gently blowing clean air across the
sensor to remove dust and debris.

Verify that the sensor connectors (J708
and J707) are fully seated on the stacker
controller PCA.

Replace sensor PI33 and PI34.

Only if the error persists, replace the
stacker controller PCA. See Stacker
controller PCA on page 826.

To locate this sensor, see Detect jams in the
stacker unit on page 724.

The engine signals the finisher that paper is
about to enter the finisher from the IPTU. The Open the IPTU and the finisher top door and
check the following items:
finisher's upper-feed-path-entry sensor
(PI33), which detects paper entering the
If media is found in the IPTU but has not
finisher, does not detect the paper within the ●
reached the finisher, perform the
expected time period triggering the error.
following steps:

●

◦

Remove and then reinstall the
IPTU. Make sure that the
connector is fully seated and that
the IPTU is securely fastened.

◦

If the error persists, replace the
IPTU. See IPTU on page 734.

If media is jammed at the exit point of the
IPTU (prior to entering the finisher),
perform the following steps:
◦

Verify that the finisher is securely
fastened to the engine.

◦

Make sure that the finisher and
IPTU are correctly aligned.
Adjust the finisher castors to obtain
a uniform gap between the finisher
and the engine. The engine-tofinisher gap must be the same at
the bottom and the top so that the
finisher is parallel to the engine.
With the engine-to-finisher gap
correct, make sure that the finisher
paper path entry point is aligned
with the IPTU exit point.

◦

Check the finisher entry-point
guides for damage.

◦

Verify that the finisher rollers are
turning before the media leaves
the IPTU.
If the rollers are not turning, test
motor M9 by using the finisher
component test from the control-

ENWW

Control-panel messages 443

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action
panel display. If the motor does not
activate during the test, check the
connectors for motor M9 (inlet
motor).
Make sure that connector J705 is
fully seated on the stacker
controller PCA.
If the error persists, replace motor
M9 or the saddle-paper-feeder
assembly.
Replace the stacker controller
PCA. See Stacker controller PCA
on page 826.
●

●

13.12.13

444 Chapter 7 Solve problems

Finisher stay jam at PI33.

If media is found in the finisher but has
not reached sensor PI33, perform the
following steps:
◦

Check the upper and lower guides
and rollers in the paper path for
damage.

◦

Make sure that the media-diverter
gate (saddle-stitch flapper) is not
blocking the paper path.

If media is found in the finisher-covering
sensor PI33 (the sensor is not detecting
the media), perform the following steps:
◦

Check the sensor for obstructions.
Verify that the sensor flag is not
damaged, moves freely, and is
correctly aligned with the sensor
body. Make sure that the lower end
of the flag is not damaged and is
correctly positioned to activate the
sensor.

◦

Make sure that the sensor is
securely fastened to the chassis.

◦

Carefully clean the sensor body by
gently blowing clean air across the
sensor to remove dust and debris.

◦

Verify that the wiring at the sensor
is not damaged and that the
intermediate connector J1007 and
connector J708 on the stacker
controller PCA are fully seated.
Replace the sensor if necessary.

◦

Only if the error persists, replace
the stacker controller PCA. See
Stacker controller PCA
on page 826.

Control-panel diagnostics: none

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

Finisher's upper-feed-path-entry sensor
To locate this sensor, see Detect jams in the
stacker unit on page 724.
(PI33) is remaining activated longer than
expected, suggesting that paper has jammed
1. Remove any media in the upper paper
at the sensor.
path that might be activating sensor
PI33.

13.12.14

Finisher delay jam at PI34.

Verify that the sensor flag is not
damaged, moves freely, and is correctly
aligned with the sensor body.

Carefully clean the sensor body by
gently blowing clean air across the
sensor to remove dust and debris.

Verify that the wiring at the sensor is not
damaged and that the connector J708
on the stacker controller PCA is fully
seated.

Control-panel diagnostics: none

Upper-paper-path-entry sensor (PI33) has
To locate these sensors, see Detect jams in
the stacker unit on page 724.
signaled that paper has passed but upperpaper-path-exit sensor PI34 does not actuate
within the expected time, suggesting that the 1. Remove any media jammed in the
upper paper path between sensor PI33
paper has jammed between PI33 and PI34 in
and sensor PI34.
the upper paper path.
2.

Check the paper path between sensor
PI33 and sensor PI34 for obstructions
that may be preventing the media from
reaching PI34.

Verify that the PI34 sensor flag is not
damaged, moves freely, and is correctly
aligned with the sensor body.

Make sure that sensor PI34 is securely
fastened to the chassis and wiring is
properly connected to sensor.
NOTE: Sensor PI34 is located on the
front frame of the finisher, directly over
the primary stapler.

13.12.15

Finisher stay jam at PI34

Verify that the wiring at the sensor is not
damaged and that the connector J707
on the stacker controller PCA is fully
seated.

Only if the error persists and none of the
previous steps correct the problem,
replace the stacker controller PCA. See
Stacker controller PCA on page 826.

Control-panel diagnostics: M31 (entrance
motor), SL32 (buffer-roller solenoid), and
SL33 (output-roller solenoid)

Finisher's upper-paper-path-exit sensor
(PI34) remains activated longer than
expected suggesting that paper has jammed To locate this sensor, see Detect jams in the
stacker unit on page 724. PI34 is located on
at the sensor.

ENWW

Control-panel messages 445

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action
the front frame of the finisher, above the main
stapler unit.

13.12.16

446 Chapter 7 Solve problems

Remove any media in the upper paper
path that might be activating sensor
PI34.

Carefully clean the sensor body, by
gently blowing clean air across the
sensor to remove dust and debris.

Verify that the sensor flag is not
damaged, moves freely, and is correctly
aligned with the sensor body.

Lift-swing-guide assembly at the paper
exit area to output bins and inspect for
jammed paper, obstructions, or
damage.

Run a diagnostic through the engine
control panel and turn on M31 (entrance
motor) to observe gear rotations on the
upper-rear frame of the finisher. Ensure
that the first delivery rollers and buffer
rollers that pass paper to and from PI34
are rotating.

Test SL32 (buffer-roller solenoid) and
SL33 (output-roller solenoid) using the
control-panel diagnostics.

Check wiring from sensor PI34 to
stacker-control-board connector J707
for damage.

Only if the error persists and none of the
previous steps correct the problem,
replace the stacker controller PCA. See
Stacker controller PCA on page 826.

Finisher jam - door opened during Staple/
Stacking operation

Control-panel diagnostics: PI31 (top-door
sensor), PI32 (front-door sensor)

While the machine is printing, the upper-door
(open/close) sensor (PI31) or front-door
(open/close) sensor (PI32) or the front-door
(open/close) switch (MSW31) has signaled
that one of the doors has been opened,
suggesting that there may now be paper
found in the upper paper path.

Booklet maker only: check PI3 (bookletdoor-1 sensor) (booklet-delivery door)
1.

Make sure that the doors properly open
and close and stay in the fully closed
position.
If the front door is not closing tightly at
the top, it will not activate the door
switch. If necessary, adjust the
alignment of the front door by opening
the door and carefully twisting it.

Verify that the sensor-activation arms on
the doors are not damaged.

Make sure that the front-door sensor
PI32 and switch MSW31 and top-door
sensor PI31 are not obstructed.

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action
4.

Make sure that the arm on front-door
switch MSSW31 is not bent or
damaged.

Make sure that sensor PI32 and switch
MSSW31 are securely fastened to the
chassis.

Test sensor PI31 (upper-door sensor)
and sensor PI32 (front-door sensor) by
using the finisher component tests from
the control-panel display.
NOTE: For finishers with a booklet
maker, also test sensor PI3 (bookletdoor-1 sensor).

13.12.17

Engine to finisher timing jam: unexpected
arrival of paper to finisher

Control-panel diagnostics: none

To locate this sensor, see Detect jams in the
stacker unit on page 724.
Upper-paper-path-entry sensor (PI33) has
detected paper before a signal from the
1. Verify that the latest firmware updates
engine has been received, indicating that
are installed for the engine and finisher.
paper is being delivered from the IPTU to the
finisher.
2. Remove any media in the upper paper
path that might be activating sensor
PI33.
If no media is found at PI33, proceed to
step 3.
If media is found at PI33, perform the
following steps:

ENWW

◦

Make sure that the power/
communication cable from the
IPTU to the finisher is properly
connected.

◦

Make sure that the IPTU is properly
connected to the engine and that
the mounting screws are tight.

◦

Make sure that the finisher is
properly grounded.
●

Ensure that the finisher is
latched and locked to the
engine by tightening the
thumbscrew inside the front
door.

●

Ensure that the groundingframe assembly (the bar with
the wheel located between
the engine and the finisher) is
in the “down” position with the
wheel touching the floor and
that the grounding plate is not
damaged.

Control-panel messages 447

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action
NOTE: The groundingframe assembly is in the “up”
position when the finisher is
shipped. It must be lowered
when the finisher is installed.
◦
3.

If the error persists, replace the
IPTU. See IPTU on page 734.

Check for media at the finisher entrance
point and at sensor PI33.
If no media is found at PI33, perform the
following steps:
◦

Make sure that the finisher is
properly grounded.
●

Ensure that the finisher is
latched and locked to the
engine by tightening the
thumbscrew inside the front
door.

●

Ensure that the groundingframe assembly (the bar with
the wheel located between
the engine and the finisher) is
in the down position with the
wheel touching the floor and
that the grounding plate is not
damaged.
NOTE: The groundingframe assembly is in the up
position when the finisher is
shipped. It must be lowered
when the finisher is installed.

448 Chapter 7 Solve problems

◦

Carefully clean the sensor body by
gently blowing clean air across the
sensor to remove dust and debris.

◦

Verify that the sensor flag is not
damaged, moves freely, and is
correctly aligned with the sensor
body.

◦

Verify that the wiring at the sensor
is not damaged and that the
connector J708 on the stacker
controller PCA is fully seated.

Only if the error persists and none of the
previous steps correct the problem,
replace the stacker controller PCA. See
Stacker controller PCA on page 826.

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

13.12.21

Finisher upper-stapler (stapler 1) staple jam.

Control-panel diagnostics: none

When the staple motor (M41) is rotated
1.
forward, the staple home-position sensor
(PI5) does not turn back on after the
prescribed time has elapsed after it goes off, 2.
and the staple home-position sensor (PI50)
turns on within the prescribed time after the
3.
staple motor (M41) is rotated backwards.

13.12.41

Finisher - Paper detected in booklet making
portion of finisher at engine power on.

Check the stapler unit for jammed
staples.
Check the stapler unit for loose staples
and paper dust.
Inspect the stapler unit for damage.

Remove the stapler cartridge and make
sure HP-approved staples are being
used.

Verify that the wiring at the stapler unit
and the connector are not damaged.

Install new staple cartridge and retest.

If the error persists, replace the stapler
unit. See Stapler on page 772.

Control-panel diagnostics: none

To locate these sensors, see Detect jams in
Occurs when paper is detected by one of the the booklet maker unit on page 724.
sensors on the paper-sensor board (PI18,
1. Remove media from the booklet-maker
PI19, PI20), vertical-path-paper sensor
paper path.
(PI17), booklet-delivery sensor (PI11), paperpositioning-plate paper sensor (PI8), or
2. Verify that the sensor flags are not
booklet-making paper-entry sensor (PI22)
damaged, move freely, and are correctly
when the machine is powered on.
aligned with the sensor bodies.

13.12.42

ENWW

Carefully clean each sensor body by
gently blowing clean air across each
sensor to remove dust and debris.

Make sure that connectors J6, J9, J10,
J13, and J21 are fully seated on the
saddle-stitcher controller PCA.

Only if the error persists and none of the
previous steps correct the problem,
replace the saddle-stitcher controller
PCA. See Saddle-stitcher controller
PCA (booklet maker only)
on page 827.

Finisher delay jam at booklet-making paperentry sensor (PI22)

Control-panel diagnostics: M9 (Inlet Motor),
SL5 (Inlet-Switch Solenoid)

Occurs when booklet making function is
selected and after the engine signals the
finisher that it is delivering paper to the
finisher. The booklet-making paper-entry
sensor (PI22) is not activated within the
expected time period after receiving the
engine's delivery signal, suggesting that a
paper jam has occurred somewhere between
the output accessory bridge (IPTU) and
sensor PI22.

Signal generated from: PI22 (Booklet-Making
Paper-Entry Sensor)
To locate this sensor, see Detect jams in the
booklet maker unit on page 724.

Control-panel messages 449

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action
Open the IPTU and the finisher top door and
locate the media jam. Check the following
items:
●

●

If media is found in the IPTU but has not
reached the finisher entrance point,
perform the following steps:
◦

Remove and then reinstall the
IPTU. Make sure that the
connector is fully seated and that
the IPTU is securely fastened.

◦

If the error persists, replace the
IPTU.

If media is jammed at the entrance point
of the finisher, perform the following
steps:
◦

Verify that the finisher is securely
fastened to the engine.

◦

Check the finisher entry-point
guides for damage.

◦

Verify that the finisher rollers are
turning before the media leaves
the IPTU.
If the rollers are not turning, test
motor M9 by using the finisher
component test from the controlpanel display. If the motor does not
activate during the test, check the
connectors for motor M9 (inlet
motor).
Make sure that connector J705 is
fully seated on the stacker
controller PCA.
If the error persists, replace motor
M9 or the saddle-paper-feeder
assembly for the type finisher you
are working on.
Only if the error persists and none
of the previous steps correct the

450 Chapter 7 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action
problem, replace the stacker
controller PCA. See Stacker
controller PCA on page 826.
●

●

ENWW

If media is found in the finisher but has
not reached sensor PI22, perform the
following steps:
◦

Check the upper and lower guides
and rollers in the paper path for
damage.

◦

Make sure that the media-diverter
gate (saddle-stitch flapper) is not
blocking the paper path.

◦

Test solenoid SL5 (inlet-switch
solenoid) by using the finisher
component test from the controlpanel display. SL5 should be
opening and closing the mediadiverter gate (saddle stitch
flapper).

If media is found in the finisher cover
sensor PI22 (the sensor is not detecting
the media), perform the following steps:
◦

◦

Make sure that the sensor is
securely fastened to the chassis.

◦

Carefully clean the sensor body by
gently blowing clean air across the
sensor to remove dust and debris.

◦

Verify that the wiring at the sensor
is not damaged and that the
intermediate connectors between
the sensor and connector J21 on
the saddle-stitcher controller PCA
are fully seated. Replace the
sensor if necessary. If PI22 is
determined to be the failure point,
replace the saddle-paper-feeder
assembly, which includes PI22.

◦

Only if the error persists and none
of the previous steps correct the
problem, replace the saddlestitcher controller PCA. See
Saddle-stitcher controller PCA
(booklet maker only)
on page 827.

Control-panel messages 451

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

13.12.43

Finisher stay jam at booklet-making paperentry sensor (PI22)

Control-panel diagnostics: none

To locate this sensor, see Detect jams in the
Occurs when the booklet-making paper-entry stacker unit on page 724.
sensor (PI22) remains activated longer than
1. Remove any media in the upper paper
expected, suggesting that there is a paper
path that might be activating sensor
jam at the sensor.
PI22.

13.12.44

Verify that the sensor flag is not
damaged, moves freely, and is correctly
aligned with the sensor body.

Carefully clean the sensor body by
gently blowing clean air across the
sensor to remove dust and debris.

Verify that the wiring at the sensor is not
damaged and that the intermediate
connectors between sensor PI22 and
connector J21 on saddle-stitcher
controller PCA for damage and proper
connections. Replace the sensor if
necessary.

Finisher delay jam at booklet-making firstpaper sensor (PI18)

Control-panel diagnostics: M1 (Delivery
Motor)

Occurs when the first-paper sensor (PI18) is
not activated within the expected time
following the activation of the booklet-making
paper-entry sensor (PI22), suggesting that
there is a paper jam in the area between PI22
and PI18.

To locate these sensors, see Detect jams in
the booklet maker unit on page 724.
Open the IPTU and the finisher top door and
locate the media jam. Check the following
items:
●

●

452 Chapter 7 Solve problems

If media is found at sensor PI18, perform
the following steps:
◦

Check the sensor PI18 for
damage. Replace the sensor if
necessary.

◦

Carefully clean the sensor body by
gently blowing clean air across the
sensor to remove dust and debris.

◦

Verify that the wiring from sensor
PI18 to connector J10 on the
saddle-stitcher controller PCA is
undamaged and the connectors
are fully seated.

If media is found at the roller prior to
sensor PI18 in the paper path, perform
the following steps:
◦

Test motor M1 (delivery motor) by
using the finisher component test
from the control-panel display.

◦

Remove the finisher rear cover.
Activate motor M1 and verify that
the drive gears and belts are
moving.

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

13.12.45

Description

Recommended action
◦

If motor M1 does not rotate, verify
that connector J5 on the saddlestitcher controller PCA is fully
seated. If the error persists,
replace motor M1. If motor M1 still
does not rotate, replace the
saddle-stitcher controller PCA.
See Saddle-stitcher controller PCA
(booklet maker only)
on page 827.

◦

If motor M1 does rotate but the
gears and belts connected to
motor M1 do not move, check for
damaged components. Replace
damaged components as
necessary.

Finisher stay jam at booklet-making firstpaper sensor (PI18), flapper-1 paper sensor
(PI19) or flapper-2 paper sensor (PI20)

Control-panel diagnostics: PI19 (flapper 1),
PI20 (flapper 2), M1 (delivery motor), SL1
(flapper-1 solenoid), SL2 (flapper-2 solenoid)

Occurs when PI18, PI19 or PI20 remain
activated longer than expected, suggesting
that there is a paper jam in the flapper 1 and
2 area of the booklet-maker section of the
finisher.

To locate these sensors, see Detect jams in
the booklet maker unit on page 724.
1.

Remove any media in the area around
flapper 1 and flapper 2.

Check the flappers for damage.

Test sensor PI19 and sensor PI20 by
using the finisher component test from
the control-panel display.
◦

If the sensors are faulty, perform
the following steps:
●

Verify that the sensor flags
are not damaged, move
freely, and are correctly
aligned with the sensor
bodies.

●

Verify that the wiring at the
sensors is not damaged and
that the connector J10 on the
saddle-stitcher controller
PCA is fully seated.

●

If the error persist, replace the
paper sensor PCA (which
contains PI118, PI119, and
PI20).

Test flapper 1 and flapper 2 by using the
finisher component test from the controlpanel display.
NOTE: To verify the proper movement
of the flappers, activate SL1 and SL2 in
the finisher component test.

13.12.46

ENWW

Finisher jam - door was opened during
booklet making operation.

Control-panel diagnostics: PI31 (top-door
sensor), PI32 (front-door sensor), PI3

Control-panel messages 453

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

Occurs while the machine is booklet making
and the booklet-delivery-door sensor (PI3) or
the booklet-paper-path open/close sensor
(PI3) detects that the door or paper path has
been opened.

(booklet-door-1 sensor) (booklet delivery
door)

Also occurs when the finisher's front-door
sensor (PI32) has been opened with paper
remaining in the processing tray of the main
stapler while the finisher is not operating.

To locate sensor PI31 and sensor PI32, see
Detect jams in the booklet maker unit
on page 724.
1.

Test sensor PI31, sensor PI32, and
sensor PI9 by using the finisher
component test from the control-panel
display.

Make sure that the front door, top door,
and booklet-delivery door properly open
and close and stay in the fully closed
position.
If the front door is not closing tightly at
the top, it will not activate the door
switch. If necessary, adjust the
alignment of the front door by opening
the door and carefully twisting it into
proper alignment.

13.12.51

454 Chapter 7 Solve problems

Verify that the sensor-activation arms on
the doors are not damaged.

Make sure that the sensors and frontdoor switch MSW31 are not obstructed.

Make sure that the arm on switch
MSW31 is not bent or damaged.

Make sure that sensors PI31, PI32, PI9,
and switch MSW31 are securely
fastened to the chassis.

Only if the error persists and none of the
previous steps correct the problem,
replace the stacker controller PCA. See
Stacker controller PCA on page 826.

Finisher jam: rear booklet stapler (SW5)

Control-panel diagnostics: none

When the rear-staple motor (M6) is rotated
forward, the staple home-position sensor
(SW5) does not turn back on after the
prescribed time has elapsed after it goes off
(0.4 seconds).

Check the rear-booklet stapler unit for
jammed staples.

Check the rear-booklet stapler unit for
loose staples.

Inspect the rear-booklet-stitch stapler
unit for damage.

Verify that HP-approved staples for this
stapler are being used.

Verify that the wiring at the stapler unit
and the connector are not damaged.

Replace the staple cartridge.

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action
NOTE: Replace both the front and
rear staple cartridges at the same time
so that the staple low sensors will
properly detect the level of staples in the
cartridges.
7.

13.12.52

Only if the error persists and none of the
previous steps correct the problem,
replace the saddle-stapler assembly.
See Saddle-stapler assembly (booklet
maker only) on page 788.

Finisher jam: front-booklet stapler (SW7)

Control-panel diagnostics: none

When the rear-staple motor (M7) is rotated
forward, the staple home-position sensor
(SW7) does not turn back on after the
prescribed time has elapsed after it goes off
(0.4 seconds).

Check the front-booklet stapler unit for
jammed staples.

Check the front-booklet stapler unit for
loose staples.

Inspect the front-booklet stapler unit for
damage.

Verify that HP-approved staples for this
stapler are being used.

Verify that the wiring at the stapler unit
and the connector are not damaged.

Replace the staple cartridge. See
Stapler on page 772.
NOTE: Replace both the front and
rear cartridges at the same time so that
the staple low sensors will properly
detect the level of staples in the
cartridges.

13.12.61

Finisher delay jam at the booklet-delivery
sensor (PI11)
Occurs when the folded booklet exits the
folding rollers and does not reach the bookletdelivery sensor (PI11) within the expected
time.

13.12.62

Finisher stay jam at the booklet-delivery
sensor (PI11) or the vertical-paper-path
sensor (PI17)
Occurs when the booklet-delivery sensor
(PI11) remains activated longer than

Only if the error persists and none of the
previous steps correct the problem,
replace the saddle-stapler assembly.
See Saddle-stapler assembly (booklet
maker only) on page 788.

Control-panel diagnostics: none
1.

Check the folder-roller area for a jam or
media wrapped around the rollers.

Check sensor PI11 for damage.

Make sure that the sensor is not
obstructed.

Make sure that sensor PI11 is securely
fastened to the chassis.

Control-panel diagnostics: M2 (Folding
motor)
1.

Check the folder-roller area for a jam.

Test the folding motor (M2) by using the
finisher component test from the controlpanel display.
◦

ENWW

Remove the finisher rear cover

Control-panel messages 455

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

expected after sensing the arrival of the new
booklet from the folding rollers.
Also occurs when the vertical-paper-path
sensor (PI17) remains activated longer than
expected after the paper has already passed
through the folding rollers and is now
detected by the booklet-delivery sensor
(PI11).

13.13 Paper Stop Jam In Duplex Area
Sensors G - H

The duplex refeed paper stopped between
the switchback sensor (G) and the duplexerdelivery sensor (H).

before starting the test and make
sure that the folding rollers are
rotating when motor M2 is on.
3.

Check sensor PI11 and PI17 for
damage.

Make sure that the sensors are not
obstructed.

Make sure that sensor PI11 and sensor
PI17 are securely fastened to the
chassis.

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.1C Fuser Wrap Jam, Paper in Fuser

The paper is wrapping at the fuser.

13.20 Paper Eject Jam at Sensors E, F - G The paper stopped at either the loop sensor
(E), the fuser-output sensor (F) or the
switchback sensor (G).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.
Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.21 Door Open Jam

The paper position is unknown.

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.2B Paper Stop Jam In Output
Accessory Bridge

The paper stopped before reaching IPTU
sensor 1 (K).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.2C Paper Late Jam in Output
Accessory Bridge (1)

The paper stopped between IPTU sensor 1
(K) and IPTU sensor 3 (M).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.2D Paper Late Jam in Output
Accessory Bridge (2)

The paper stopped in the path along IPTU
sensor 1 (K), IPTU sensor 2 (L), and IPTU
sensor 3 (M).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.2E Paper Late Jam Near Fuser at
Sensors F - J

456 Chapter 7 Solve problems

The paper stopped between the fuser-output
sensor (F) and the output-bin-full sensor (J).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.30 Paper Late Jam, Jam In Cassette

●

The leading edge of the paper fed from
Tray 1 stopped before reaching the
registration sensor (D).

●

The leading edge of the paper fed from
Tray 2 stopped before reaching the
registration sensor (D).

●

The leading edge of the paper fed from
Tray 3 stopped before reaching the
registration sensor (D).

●

The leading edge of the paper fed from
Tray 4 stopped before reaching the
registration sensor (D).

●

The leading edge of the paper fed from
Tray 5 stopped before reaching the
registration sensor (D).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.
13.7C Delivery Delay Jam 1

There is a delay in reaching the first IPTU
sensor.

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction. See
Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the sensor
originating the failure.

13.7D Delivery Delay Jam 2

There is a delay in reaching the last IPTU
sensor.

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction. See
Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the sensor
originating the failure.

13.7E Delivery Delay Jam 3

There is a delay in reaching the output rollers
from the fuser.

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction. See
Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the sensor
originating the failure.

13.80 Delivery Stay Jam

There is a jam in the IPTU between the first
and last sensor.

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction. See
Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the sensor
originating the failure.

13.80 External Output Device Paper Jam

There is a delivery jam on the IPTU between Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
the first and last sensor.
and remove the paper or obstruction.

13.90 Non-specific Paper Jam

The leading edge of the paper is at the
registration sensor (D).

Follow the onscreen instructions to locate
and remove the paper or obstruction.

See Figure 7-4 Paper-path sensors
on page 512 to determine the location of the
sensor originating the failure.

ENWW

Control-panel messages 457

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

13.JJ.NT - Fuser area jam

A jam occurred in the fuser-output sensor
area. In order to continue processing a job,
clear all paper found.

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool
before handling it.
1.

Open the right door.

Remove the paper in the duplex area.

Open the fuser access.

Remove the paper. Close the fuser
access.

Remove all the paper found. Close the
right door.

13.JJ.NT - Fuser wrap jam

Paper is wrapping at the fuser. In order to
continue processing a job, clear all paper
found.

Clear the jam in the fuser area. See AREA 2
and 3: Jams in the fuser and transfer area
on page 524.

13.JJ.NT - Jam in Tray 1

A page is jammed in the multipurpose tray.

Remove all loose paper from Tray 1.

13.JJ.NT - Jam inside lower-right door

13.JJ.NT - Transfer and fuser jam

Clear the jam in Tray 1. See AREA
6:Jams in Tray 1 on page 539.

Reload paper in Tray 1 and make sure
the guides are next to the paper. Do not
load paper above the fill tabs.

To continue printing, touch OK.

Open the lower-right door.

Remove jammed paper.

Close the lower-right door.

A jam occurred in the lower-right door.

A jam occurred in the registration-sensor
area.

Clear all paper found.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool
before handling it.

458 Chapter 7 Solve problems

Open the right door.

Remove the paper in the duplex area.

Open the transfer access panel.

Remove the paper. Close the transfer
access panel.

Open the fuser access.

Remove the paper. Close the fuser
access.

Remove all the paper found. Close the
right door.

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

13.JJ.NT - Transfer area jam

A jam occurred in the registration-sensor
area.

In order to continue processing a job, clear all
paper found.

13.JJ.NT – Jam inside right door

A page is jammed.

Open the right door.

Remove the paper in the duplex area.

Open the transfer access panel.

Remove the paper. Close the transfer
access panel.

Check the right door of the printer.
1.

Open the right door.

Remove any paper in the duplex area.

Close the right door.

13.JJ.NT- Jam below control panel

A jam occurred below the control panel.

Check the area below the control panel for
any jammed paper. Remove any paper
found, then touch OK to continue.

13.XX.YY Jam inside output accessory
bridge

There is a paper jam inside the outputaccessory bridge (IPTU).

Clear the jam in the IPTU. See AREA 8: Jams
in the optional finishing devices
on page 547.

20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY To continue
touch OK

The product does not have enough memory
to print the page.

Touch OK to print a partial page. Reduce the
page complexity or add printer memory.

22 - USB I/O buffer overflow To continue
touch OK

The printer's USB buffer overflowed during a Touching OK resumes printing but results in
busy state.
a loss of data.

22 EMBEDDED I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue touch OK

Too much data was sent to the embedded HP Touch OK to print the transferred data. Some
Jetdirect print server. An incorrect
data might be lost. Check the host
communications protocol might be in use.
configuration.

30.01.02 Scanner failure

The ADF is jammed or the sensor failed.

Verify that there is no paper in the ADF. Use
the scanner test in the Troubleshooting menu
to check the sensors.

30.01.03 Scanner failure

An ADF pickup failure occurred.

This failure can be caused by using damage
or glossy media. Try scanning through the
ADF with standard 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. You
may need to replace the ADF maintenance
kit.

30.01.06 Scanner failure

The scanner-lamp fan failed.

Determine if the scanner-lamp fan is
running during scanner operation.

Check the scanner connection to the
scanner-control board (SCB).

Replace the fan if the error persists and
the fan is not operational.

30.01.08 Scanner failure

ENWW

The scanner is locked, or the home sensor or
flat cable failed.

Check the scanner lock. Unlock the scanner,
and then turn the product off and then on.

Control-panel messages 459

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

30.01.14 Scanner failure

The SCB firmware failed.

Turn the product off and then on.

Perform a remote firmware upgrade.
See Upgrade the firmware
on page 131.

Check the SCB.

Replace the SCB. See SCB, CPB, and
SCUID on page 388.

Turn the product off and then on.

Check the SCB LEDs for a heartbeat.

Replace the SCB. See SCB, CPB, and
SCUID on page 388.

Turn the product off and then on.

Check the connection on the SCB.

Replace the SCB. See SCB, CPB, and
SCUID on page 388.

Turn the product off and then on.

Determine if the scanner lamp turns on
and off approximately 12 second after
the product turns on.

If the lamp does not turn on and then off:

30.01.15 Scanner failure

30.01.18 Scanner failure

30.01.19 Scanner failure

The scanner initialization failed.

The SCB ASIC failed.

The scanner lamp failed.

30.01.25 Scanner failure

460 Chapter 7 Solve problems

The copy-process board (CPB) failed.

View the lamp through the glass to
determine if it is broken. Replace
the lamp if it is broken.

Re-seat the cables from the lamp
to the inverter.

Replace the inverter. See Inverter
unit on page 384.

If the lamp does turn on and then off:
a.

Reseat the FFC interconnect
between the optical carriage and
the SCB.

Replace the optical carriage.

Replace the SCB. See SCB, CPB,
and SCUID on page 388.

Turn the product off and then on.

Check the CPB LED.

Verify that the CPB connections are
correct.

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

30.01.34 Scanner failure

30.01.39 Scanner failure

30.01.40 Scanner failure

30.01.41 Scanner failure

30.01.42 Scanner failure

30.01.43 Scanner failure

ENWW

Description

Recommended action
4.

Verify the cable from the scanner to the
formatter is not plugged in backwards.

Replace the CPB. See SCB, CPB, and
SCUID on page 388.

The scanner initialization failed, and the
1.
copy-process board (CPB) cannot
communicate with the scanner-control board
2.
(SCB).

There was an AFE1 (analog front-end)
failure.

The scanner AFE 2 failed.

There was a CPB error.

The scanner cable is disconnected.

The CPB memory is full.

Turn the product off and then on.
Check the SCB LEDs.

Verify that the SCB connections are
correct.

Replace the SCB. See SCB, CPB, and
SCUID on page 388.

Turn the product off and then on.

Check the flat cables on the SCB.

Check the LEDs on the SCB.

Replace the SCB. See SCB, CPB, and
SCUID on page 388.

Replace the scanner. See Optical
scanner on page 358.

Turn the product off and then on.

Check the flat cables on the SCB.

Check the LEDs on the SCB.

Replace the SCB. See SCB, CPB, and
SCUID on page 388.

Replace the scanner. See Optical
scanner on page 358.

Check the SCB and CPB LEDs to verify
that the scanner has power.

Verify that the scanner power cable is
connected to the scanner power supply
and fuser power supply.

Replace the CPB. See SCB, CPB, and
SCUID on page 388.

Connect the scanner cable to the
formatter.

Turn the product off and then on.

Connect the CPB memory.

Turn the product off and then on.

Replace the CPB memory.

Control-panel messages 461

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

30.01.44 Scanner failure

There is an SCB communication error.

Turn the product off and then on.

Check the SCB/CPB connections.

Check the SCB LEDs.

Turn the product off and then on.

Check the SCB/CPB connections.

Check the SCB LEDs.

Turn the product off and then on.

Check the PCI cable at the scanner and
formatter.

Check the SCB connections.

Replace the CPB. See SCB, CPB, and
SCUID on page 388.

30.01.45 Scanner failure

30.01.46 Scanner failure

The CPB memory is full.

The CPB enumeration failed.

40 Embedded I/O Bad Transmission To
continue touch OK

A temporary printing error occurred. The
Touch OK to clear the error message and
connection between the product and the EIO continue printing. Turn the product off and
card in the specified slot has been broken.
then on.

41.3 Load Tray : [Type] [Size]

The specified tray is loaded with media that
is longer or shorter in the feed direction than
the size adjusted for the tray. This message
also appears if two or more sheets of media
stick together in the product or if the tray is
not adjusted correctly. If using glossy paper,
ensure that it has been acclimated.

Touch OK to use another tray. Reconfigure
the size in a tray so that the product will use
a tray that is loaded with the correct media
size. If the message does not clear
automatically from the control-panel display,
turn the product off and then on.

41.5 Load Tray : [Type], [Size] To use
another tray, touch OK

The product detected an unexpected paper
size. There is a tray type mismatch.

To continue, load the tray with the size and
type indicated. Or, if another tray is available,
touch OK to use it. This problem affects
printing, but some scan functions might still
be available.

The tray is a cassette and there is another
tray available for use.
41.X ERROR To continue touch OK

A temporary printing error occurred.

Touch OK to clear the error. If the error is not
cleared, turn the product off and then on.

48.01 Transfer unit error

The ITB top sensor malfunctioned.

Turn the product off and then on. Check the
sensor and replace the ITB. See Intermediate
transfer belt (ITB) on page 238.

49.XXXXX ERROR To continue turn off
then on

A critical firmware error occurred.

Remove third-party products. Turn the
product off and then on.

50.1 Fuser error

The fuser experienced a low-temperature
error while printing or after it warmed up.

Remove any paper jams from the fuser
area. See AREA 2 and 3: Jams in the
fuser and transfer area on page 524.

Reinstall the fuser. Fuser on page 233.
Check the connector (J1901) between
the fuser and the product. Replace the
cable or fuser if the connector is
damaged.

Reconnect the connectors of the
thermopile (J1990), fuser control PCA
(J302, J305, J306, J309), and the DC
controller PCA (J107).

462 Chapter 7 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

50.2 Fuser error

50.3 Fuser error

50.4 Fuser error

ENWW

Description

The fuser experienced a warm-up error.

The fuser experienced a high-temperature
error.

There was an error with the fuser driver
circuit.

Recommended action
4.

Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 233.

Replace the fuser power supply unit.
See Fuser power-supply unit
on page 291.

Replace the thermopile. See
Thermopile unit on page 334.

Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector
(J1901) between the fuser and the
product. Replace the cable or fuser if the
connector is damaged.

Reconnect the connectors of the
thermopile (J1990), fuser control PCA
(J302, J305, J306, J309), and the DC
controller PCA (J107).

Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 233.

Replace the fuser power supply unit.
See Fuser power-supply unit
on page 291.

Replace the thermopile. See
Thermopile unit on page 334.

Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector
(J1901) between the fuser and the
product. Replace the cable or fuser if the
connector is damaged.

Reconnect the connectors of the
thermopile (J1990), fuser control PCA
(J302, J305, J306, J309), and the DC
controller PCA (J107).

Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 233.

Replace the fuser power supply unit.
See Fuser power-supply unit
on page 291.

Replace the thermopile. See
Thermopile unit on page 334.

Reconnect the connectors of the fuser
control PCA (J305) and the DC
controller PCA (J107).

If the product does not meet the power
requirement of 40 to 70Hz frequency,
the fuser temperature control will not
work properly, which will cause a
malfunction.

Control-panel messages 463

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

50.5 Fuser error

50.7 Fuser error

50.8 Fuser error

464 Chapter 7 Solve problems

Description

The fuser experienced a type-mismatch
error.

The fuser experienced a pressure-release
mechanism error.

The fuser experienced a low-temperature
error.

Recommended action
3.

Check the low-voltage power supply unit
for proper voltage.

Replace the fuser power supply unit.
See Fuser power-supply unit
on page 291.

Ensure that the fuser is the correct
voltage.

Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector
(J1901) between the fuser and the
product. Replace the cable or fuser if the
connector is damaged.

Reconnect the connectors of the fuser
control PCA (J303, J305), low-voltage
power supply unit (J6), and the DC
controller PCA (J102, J207).

Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 233.

Reconnect the connectors of the fuser
motor (J1720), fuser-unit home-position
sensor (J1965), intermediate (J1964),
and the DC controller PCA (J105, J121).

Test the fuser pressure-release sensor
by performing the paper-path test or the
manual sensor test in the
Troubleshooting menu. See Paper-path
sensors test on page 587.

Check the sensor flag of the fuser
pressure-release sensor. If the sensor
flag is damaged, replace the fuser. See
Fuser on page 233.

Check the inside gear on the product
that drives the fuser.

Perform the fuser motor and fuser
pressure-release motor component
tests in the Troubleshooting menu. See
Paper-path sensors test on page 587.

Replace the fuser motor. See Fuser
motor on page 269.

Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 233.

Remove any paper jams from the fuser
area.

Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector
(J1901) between the fuser and the
product. Replace the cable or fuser if the
connector is damaged.

Reconnect the connectors of the fuser
control PCA (J302, J303, J305) and the
DC controller PCA (J107).

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

50.9 Fuser error

50.A Fuser Error

50.B Fuser Error

ENWW

Description

The fuser experienced a high-temperature
error.

There is a low-temperature error.

There is a high-temperature error.

Recommended action
4.

Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 233.

Replace the fuser power supply unit.
See Fuser power-supply unit
on page 291.

Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector
(J1901) between the fuser and the
product. Replace the cable or fuser if the
connector is damaged.

Reconnect the connectors of the fuser
control PCA (J302, J303, J305) and the
DC controller PCA (J107).

Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 233.

Replace the fuser power supply unit.
See Fuser power-supply unit
on page 291.

Remove any paper jams from the fuser
area. See AREA 2 and 3: Jams in the
fuser and transfer area on page 524.

Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector
(J1901) between the fuser and the
product. Replace the cable or fuser if the
connector is damaged.

Reconnect the connectors of the fuser
control PCA (J302, J303, J305) and the
DC controller PCA (J107).

Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 233.

Replace the fuser power supply unit.
See Fuser power-supply unit
on page 291.

Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector
(J1901) between the fuser and the
product. Replace the cable or fuser if the
connector is damaged.

Reconnect the connectors of the fuser
control PCA (J302, J303, J305) and the
DC controller PCA (J107).

Replace the fuser. See Fuser
on page 233.

Replace the fuser power supply unit.
See Fuser power-supply unit
on page 291.

Control-panel messages 465

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

51.1Y Error To continue turn off and then
on

There is a beam detect error.

Turn the product off and then on.

●

51.10=black

●

Check the connectors on the laser
scanner.

51.11=cyan

●

3.
51.12=magenta

●

51.13=yellow

Replace the specific laser scanner. See
Laser/scanner assembly (cyan and
black) on page 319 or Laser/scanner
assembly (yellow and magenta)
on page 316.

There is a laser error.

Turn the product off and then on.

●

51.20=black

●

Check the connectors on the laser
scanner.

51.21=cyan

●

3.
51.22=magenta

●

51.23=yellow

Replace the specific laser scanner. See
Laser/scanner assembly (cyan and
black) on page 319 or Laser/scanner
assembly (yellow and magenta)
on page 316.

Perform the laser scanner component
tests in the Troubleshooting menu.

Depending on the test results, perform
one of the following steps:

51.2Y Error To continue turn off and then
on

52.00 Error To continue turn off and then
on

The scanner experienced a startup error.

52.10 Error To continue turn off and then
on

466 Chapter 7 Solve problems

There is a laser scanner startup error.

◦

If the cyan or black component
tests showed a startup failure,
reconnect the connectors of the
cyan/black scanner motor (J1702)
and the DC controller PCA (J129).

◦

If the yellow or magenta
component tests showed a startup
failure, reconnect the connectors
of the yellow/magenta scanner
motor (J1701) and the DC
controller PCA (J129).

Replace the cyan/black laser scanner
unit or the yellow/magenta laser
scanner unit. See Laser/scanner
assembly (cyan and black)
on page 319 or Laser/scanner assembly
(yellow and magenta) on page 316.

Check the cyan/black laser scanner unit or
the yellow/magenta laser scanner unit.

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

52.20 Error To continue turn off and then
on

The scanner experienced a rotational error.

Perform the laser scanner component
tests in the Troubleshooting menu.

Depending on the test results, perform
one of the following steps:

◦

If the cyan or black component
tests showed a startup failure,
reconnect the connectors of the
cyan/black scanner motor (J1702)
and the DC controller PCA (J129).

◦

If the yellow or magenta
component tests showed a startup
failure, reconnect the connectors
of the yellow/magenta scanner
motor (J1701) and the DC
controller PCA (J129).

Replace the cyan and black laserscanner assembly or the yellow and
magenta laser-scanner assembly. See
Laser/scanner assembly (cyan and
black) on page 319 or Laser/scanner
assembly (yellow and magenta)
on page 316.

53.10.0X Unsupported DIMM

An unsupported DIMM is installed.

Turn the product off, and then replace the
DIMM that caused the error. See Install DDR
memory DIMMs on page 111.

54.01 Error

The environmental sensor experienced an
error.

Reconnect the connector of the DC
controller PCA (J115).

Replace the environmental sensor. See
Environmental sensor on page 283.

Reconnect the connectors of the printcartridge interface PCA (yellow and
magenta).

Replace the print-cartridge interface
PCA (yellow and magenta). See Printcartridge interface PCA (yellow and
magenta) on page 300.

The magenta-toner-level sensor experienced 1.
an error.

Reconnect the connectors of the printcartridge interface PCA (yellow and
magenta).

Replace the print-cartridge interface
PCA (yellow and magenta). See Printcartridge interface PCA (yellow and
magenta) on page 300.

Reconnect the connectors of the printcartridge interface PCA (cyan and
black).

Replace the print-cartridge interface
PCA (cyan and black). See Printcartridge interface PCA (cyan and
black) on page 299.

54.15 Error

54.16 Error

54.17 Error

ENWW

The yellow-toner-level sensor experienced
an error.

The cyan-toner-level sensor experienced an
error.

Control-panel messages 467

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

54.18 Error

The black-toner-level sensor experienced an
error.

Reconnect the connectors of the printcartridge interface PCA (cyan and
black).

Replace the print-cartridge interface
PCA (cyan and black). See Printcartridge interface PCA (cyan and
black) on page 299.

Turn the product off and then on.

Perform an engine test. See Engine-test
button on page 583.

Verify the connectors on the DC
controller.

Replace the DC controller. See DC
controller PCA on page 281.

Turn the product off and then on.

Perform an engine test. See Engine-test
button on page 583..

Verify the connectors on the DC
controller.

Replace the DC controller. See DC
controller PCA on page 281.

55.00.YY DC Controller Communication
Error To continue turn off and then on

55.01.YY DC Controller Memory Error To
continue turn off and then on

55.02.YY Outgoing Parity Error To
continue turn off and then on

55.03.YY No Engine Response To
continue turn off and then on

55.04.YY Communications Timeout To
continue turn off and then on

468 Chapter 7 Solve problems

The DC controller experienced a
communication error.

There is an error with the DC controller
memory.

There is a DC controller outgoing parity error. 1.

DC controller no response error.

There was a DC controller communications
timeout.

Turn the product off and then on.

Perform an engine test. See Engine-test
button on page 583.

Verify the connectors on the DC
controller.

Replace the DC controller. See DC
controller PCA on page 281.

Turn the product off and then on.

Perform an engine test. See Engine-test
button on page 583.

Verify the connectors on the DC
controller.

Replace the DC controller. See DC
controller PCA on page 281.

Turn the product off and then on.

Perform an engine test. See Engine-test
button on page 583.

Verify the connectors on the DC
controller.

Replace the DC controller. See DC
controller PCA on page 281.

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

55.05 Error To continue turn off and then
on

An interruption occurred during a remote
firmware update.

Turn the product off and then on.

Remove any third-party hardware.

Attempt the remote firmware update
again.

Turn the product off and then on.

Remove any third-party hardware.

Attempt the remote firmware update
again.

56.01 - Illegal input To continue turn off
and then on

There was an illegal input.

56.02 - Illegal output To continue turn off
and then on

There was an illegal output.

Turn the product off and then on.

57.01 Error To continue turn off and then
on

The VOC fan (FM4) experienced an error.

Reconnect the connectors of the VOC
fan (J1921) and the DC controller PCA
(J103).

Measure the voltage between
connectors J103-4 and J103-6 on the
DC controller PCA right after the product
is turned on. If the voltage changes from
0V to approximately 24V, replace the
VOC fan. See VOC fan on page 322.

Reconnect the connectors of the fuser
cooling fan (J1917) and the DC
controller PCA (J132).

Measure the voltage between
connectors J132-7 and J132-9 on the
DC controller PCA right after the product
is turned on. If the voltage changes from
0V to approximately 24V, replace the
cartridge-area cooling fan. See
Cartridge fan unit on page 289.

Reconnect the connectors of the
cartridge-area cooling fan (J1915) and
the DC controller PCA (J132).

Measure the voltage between
connectors J132-1 and J132-3 on the
DC controller PCA right after the product
is turned on. If the voltage changes from
0V to approximately 24V, replace the
cartridge-area cooling fan. See
Cartridge fan unit on page 289.

Reconnect the connectors of the lowvoltage power-supply cooling fan (J2),
low-voltage power supply (J6), and the
DC controller PCA (J102).

Measure the voltage between
connectors J2-1 and J2-3 on the lowvoltage power-supply cooling fan right
after the product is turned on. If the
voltage changes from 0V to
approximately 24V, replace the lowvoltage power-supply cooling fan.

57.03 Error To continue turn off and then
on

57.04 Error To continue turn off and then
on

57.05 Error To continue turn off and then
on

ENWW

The fuser cooling fan (FM2) experienced an
error.

The cartridge-area cooling fan (FM3)
experienced an error.

The low-voltage power-supply cooling fan
(FM5) experienced an error.

Control-panel messages 469

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

57.06 Error To continue turn off and then
on

The cartridge-front-area cooling fan (FM6)
experienced an error.

Reconnect the connectors of the
cartridge-front-area cooling fan (J1934)
and the DC controller PCA (J103).

Measure the voltage between
connectors J103-1 and J103-3 on the
DC controller PCA right after the product
is turned on. If the voltage changes from
0V to approximately 24V, replace the
cartridge-front-area cooling fan.

Reconnect the connectors on the laser/
scanner unit cooling fan and the DC
controller PCA.

Replace the laser/scanner unit cooling
fan. See Laser/scanner fan unit
on page 290.

Reconnect the connectors of the
delivery-unit cooling fan (J1910) and the
DC controller PCA (J103).

Measure the voltage between
connectors J103-7 and J103-9 on the
DC controller PCA right after the product
is turned on. If the voltage changes from
0V to approximately 24V, replace the
delivery-unit cooling fan.

Check if the scanner fan or control panel
fan is running while the engine is
running. You may be able to hear the
fans. If not, perform a visual inspection.

If the fans are not running, determine if
the lights on the CPB are on. If so, the
connectors at the fan or at the scanner
power supply may be disconnected.

If only one fan is not running, try
switching the connectors at the power
supply. If the failure follows the
connection, the power supply may have
failed. If the same fan fails regardless of
the connection, replace the failed fan.

Perform the fuser motor component test
in the Troubleshooting menu.

Reconnect the connectors of the fuser
motor (J1711), intermediate (J1720),
and the DC controller PCA (J105).

Replace the fuser motor. See Fuser
motor on page 269.

57.07 Error To continue turn off and then
on

57.08 Error To continue turn off and then
on

57.09 Error To continue turn off and then
on

59.30 Error To continue turn off and then
on

470 Chapter 7 Solve problems

The laser/scanner-unit cooling fan (FM1)
experienced an error.

The delivery-unit cooling fan (FM7)
experienced an error.

The scanner fan or control panel fan has
failed.

The fuser motor experienced a startup error.

ENWW

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

59.40 Error To continue turn off and then
on

The fuser motor experienced a rotational
error.

Perform the fuser motor component test
in the Troubleshooting menu.

Reconnect the connectors of the fuser
motor (J1711), intermediate (J1720),
and the DC controller PCA (J105).

Replace the fuser motor. See Fuser
motor on page 269.

Perform the image-drum motors
component test in the
Troubleshooting menu.

Reconnect the connectors of the blackimage-drum motor (J1715) and the DC
controller PCA (J139).

Replace the black-image-drum motor.
See Image-drum motor on page 284.

Perform the image-drum motors
component test in the
Troubleshooting menu.

Reconnect the connectors of the cyanimage-drum motor (J1714) and the DC
controller PCA (J139).

Replace the cyan-image-drum motor.
See Image-drum motor on page 284.

Perform the image-drum motors
component test in the
Troubleshooting menu.

Reconnect the connectors of the
magenta-image-drum motor (J1713)
and the DC controller PCA (J138).

Replace the magenta-image-drum
motor. See Image-drum motor
on page 284.

59.50 Error To continue turn off and then
on

59.51 Error To continue turn off and then
on

59.52 Error To continue turn off and then
on

59.53 Error To continue turn off and then
on

ENWW

The black-image-drum motor experienced a
startup error.

The cyan-image-drum motor experienced a
startup error.

The magenta-image-drum motor
experienced a startup error.

The yellow-image-drum motor experienced a 1.
startup error.

Perform the image-drum motors
component test in the Troubleshooting
menu.

Reconnect the connectors of the yellowimage-drum motor (J1712) and the DC
controller PCA (J138).

Replace the yellow-image-drum motor.
See Image-drum motor on page 284.

Control-panel messages 471

Table 7-4 Control-panel messages (continued)
Control panel message

Description

Recommended action

59.60 Error Black Image Drum Motor
rotation error

The black-image-drum motor experienced a
rotational error.